gtk.c.types
C types for gtk3 library
Types 1017
A #GtkAllocation-struct of a widget represents region which has been allocated to the widget by its parent. It is a subregion of its parents allocation. See [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management] for more information.
Accelerator flags used with [gtk.accel_group.AccelGroup.connect].
Controls how a widget deals with extra space in a single (x or y) dimension.
Alignment only matters if the widget receives a “too large” allocation, for example if you packed the widget with the #GtkWidget:expand flag inside a #GtkBox, then the widget might get extra space. If you have for example a 16x16 icon inside a 32x32 space, the icon could be scaled and stretched, it could be centered, or it could be positioned to one side of the space.
Note that in horizontal context @GTK_ALIGN_START and @GTK_ALIGN_END are interpreted relative to text direction.
GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE support for it is optional for containers and widgets, and it is only supported for vertical alignment. When its not supported by a child or a container it is treated as @GTK_ALIGN_FILL.
Types of user actions that may be blocked by [gtk.application.Application.inhibit].
Used to specify the placement of scroll arrows in scrolling menus.
Used to indicate the direction in which an arrow should point.
An enum for determining the page role inside the #GtkAssistant. It's used to handle buttons sensitivity and visibility.
Note that an assistant needs to end its page flow with a page of type [gtk.types.AssistantPageType.Confirm], [gtk.types.AssistantPageType.Summary] or [gtk.types.AssistantPageType.Progress] to be correct.
The Cancel button will only be shown if the page isn’t “committed”. See [gtk.assistant.Assistant.commit] for details.
Denotes the expansion properties that a widget will have when it (or its parent) is resized.
Whenever a container has some form of natural row it may align children in that row along a common typographical baseline. If the amount of verical space in the row is taller than the total requested height of the baseline-aligned children then it can use a #GtkBaselinePosition to select where to put the baseline inside the extra availible space.
Describes how the border of a UI element should be rendered.
Error codes that identify various errors that can occur while using #GtkBuilder.
Used to dictate the style that a #GtkButtonBox uses to layout the buttons it contains.
The role specifies the desired appearance of a #GtkModelButton.
Prebuilt sets of buttons for the dialog. If none of these choices are appropriate, simply use [gtk.types.ButtonsType.None] then call [gtk.dialog.Dialog.addButtons].
Please note that [gtk.types.ButtonsType.Ok], [gtk.types.ButtonsType.YesNo]and [gtk.types.ButtonsType.OkCancel] are discouraged by the
GNOME Human Interface Guidelines.
These options can be used to influence the display and behaviour of a #GtkCalendar.
Determines if the edited accelerators are GTK+ accelerators. If they are, consumed modifiers are suppressed, only accelerators accepted by GTK+ are allowed, and the accelerators are rendered in the same way as they are in menus.
Identifies how the user can interact with a particular cell.
Tells how a cell is to be rendered.
Specifies which corner a child widget should be placed in when packed into a #GtkScrolledWindow. This is effectively the opposite of where the scroll bars are placed.
Error codes for GTK_CSS_PROVIDER_ERROR.
The different types of sections indicate parts of a CSS document as parsed by GTK’s CSS parser. They are oriented towards the
CSS Grammar,but may contain extensions.
More types might be added in the future as the parser incorporates more features.
See also: #GtkEntry::delete-from-cursor.
The #GtkDestDefaults enumeration specifies the various types of action that will be taken on behalf of the user for a drag destination site.
Flags used to influence dialog construction.
Focus movement types.
Gives an indication why a drag operation failed. The value can by obtained by connecting to the #GtkWidget::drag-failed signal.
Specifies the side of the entry at which an icon is placed.
Describes the behavior of a #GtkEventControllerScroll.
Describes the state of a #GdkEventSequence in a #GtkGesture.
Used to specify the style of the expanders drawn by a #GtkTreeView.
Describes whether a #GtkFileChooser is being used to open existing files or to save to a possibly new file.
Used as a return value of handlers for the #GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal of a #GtkFileChooser. This value determines whether the file chooser will present the stock confirmation dialog, accept the user’s choice of a filename, or let the user choose another filename.
These identify the various errors that can occur while calling #GtkFileChooser functions.
These flags indicate what parts of a #GtkFileFilterInfo struct are filled or need to be filled.
This enumeration specifies the granularity of font selection that is desired in a font chooser.
This enumeration may be extended in the future; applications should ignore unknown values.
Style for input method preedit. See also #GtkSettings:gtk-im-preedit-style
Style for input method status. See also #GtkSettings:gtk-im-status-style
Used to specify options for [gtk.icon_theme.IconTheme.lookupIcon]
Built-in stock icon sizes.
Error codes for GtkIconTheme operations.
An enum for determining where a dropped item goes.
Describes the image data representation used by a #GtkImage. If you want to get the image from the widget, you can only get the currently-stored representation. e.g. if the [gtk.image.Image.getStorageType] returns #GTK_IMAGE_PIXBUF, then you can call [gtk.image.Image.getPixbuf] but not [gtk.image.Image.getStock]. For empty images, you can request any storage type (call any of the "get" functions), but they will all return null values.
Describes hints that might be taken into account by input methods or applications. Note that input methods may already tailor their behaviour according to the #GtkInputPurpose of the entry.
Some common sense is expected when using these flags - mixing @GTK_INPUT_HINT_LOWERCASE with any of the uppercase hints makes no sense.
This enumeration may be extended in the future; input methods should ignore unknown values.
Describes primary purpose of the input widget. This information is useful for on-screen keyboards and similar input methods to decide which keys should be presented to the user.
Note that the purpose is not meant to impose a totally strict rule about allowed characters, and does not replace input validation. It is fine for an on-screen keyboard to let the user override the character set restriction that is expressed by the purpose. The application is expected to validate the entry contents, even if it specified a purpose.
The difference between @GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_DIGITS and @GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_NUMBER is that the former accepts only digits while the latter also some punctuation (like commas or points, plus, minus) and “e” or “E” as in 3.14E+000.
This enumeration may be extended in the future; input methods should interpret unknown values as “free form”.
Describes how a rendered element connects to adjacent elements.
Used for justifying the text inside a #GtkLabel widget. (See also #GtkAlignment).
Describes how #GtkLevelBar contents should be rendered. Note that this enumeration could be extended with additional modes in the future.
The type of license for an application.
This enumeration can be expanded at later date.
An enumeration representing directional movements within a menu.
The type of message being displayed in the dialog.
Used to determine the layout of pages on a sheet when printing multiple pages per sheet.
Represents the orientation of widgets and other objects which can be switched between horizontal and vertical orientation on the fly, like #GtkToolbar or #GtkGesturePan.
Determines how widgets should be packed inside menubars and menuitems contained in menubars.
Represents the packing location #GtkBox children. (See: #GtkVBox, #GtkHBox, and #GtkButtonBox).
The type of a pad action.
See also [gtk.print_settings.PrintSettings.setOrientation].
See also [gtk.print_job.PrintJob.setPageSet].
Describes the panning direction of a #GtkGesturePan
Priorities for path lookups. See also [gtk.binding_set.BindingSet.addPath].
Widget path types. See also [gtk.binding_set.BindingSet.addPath].
These flags serve two purposes. First, the application can call [gtk.places_sidebar.PlacesSidebar.setOpenFlags] using these flags as a bitmask. This tells the sidebar that the application is able to open folders selected from the sidebar in various ways, for example, in new tabs or in new windows in addition to the normal mode.
Second, when one of these values gets passed back to the application in the #GtkPlacesSidebar::open-location signal, it means that the application should open the selected location in the normal way, in a new tab, or in a new window. The sidebar takes care of determining the desired way to open the location, based on the modifier keys that the user is pressing at the time the selection is made.
If the application never calls [gtk.places_sidebar.PlacesSidebar.setOpenFlags], then the sidebar will only use #GTK_PLACES_OPEN_NORMAL in the #GtkPlacesSidebar::open-location signal. This is the default mode of operation.
Determines how the size should be computed to achieve the one of the visibility mode for the scrollbars.
Describes constraints to positioning of popovers. More values may be added to this enumeration in the future.
Describes which edge of a widget a certain feature is positioned at, e.g. the tabs of a #GtkNotebook, the handle of a #GtkHandleBox or the label of a #GtkScale.
See also [gtk.print_settings.PrintSettings.setDuplex].
Error codes that identify various errors that can occur while using the GTK+ printing support.
The @action parameter to [gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.run] determines what action the print operation should perform.
A value of this type is returned by [gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.run].
See also [gtk.print_job.PrintJob.setPages]
See also [gtk.print_settings.PrintSettings.setQuality].
The status gives a rough indication of the completion of a running print operation.
Describes the stage at which events are fed into a #GtkEventController.
Deprecated
The #GtkRcTokenType enumeration represents the tokens in the RC file. It is exposed so that theme engines can reuse these tokens when parsing the theme-engine specific portions of a RC file.
Deprecated
These identify the various errors that can occur while calling #GtkRecentChooser functions.
These flags indicate what parts of a #GtkRecentFilterInfo struct are filled or need to be filled.
Error codes for #GtkRecentManager operations
Used to specify the sorting method to be applyed to the recently used resource list.
Describes a region within a widget.
Indicated the relief to be drawn around a #GtkButton.
Predefined values for use as response ids in [gtk.dialog.Dialog.addButton]. All predefined values are negative; GTK+ leaves values of 0 or greater for application-defined response ids.
These enumeration values describe the possible transitions when the child of a #GtkRevealer widget is shown or hidden.
Scrolling types.
Defines the policy to be used in a scrollable widget when updating the scrolled window adjustments in a given orientation.
Used to control what selections users are allowed to make.
Determines how GTK+ handles the sensitivity of stepper arrows at the end of range widgets.
Used to change the appearance of an outline typically provided by a #GtkFrame.
Note that many themes do not differentiate the appearance of the various shadow types: Either their is no visible shadow (@GTK_SHADOW_NONE), or there is (any other value).
GtkShortcutType specifies the kind of shortcut that is being described. More values may be added to this enumeration over time.
The mode of the size group determines the directions in which the size group affects the requested sizes of its component widgets.
Specifies a preference for height-for-width or width-for-height geometry management.
Determines the direction of a sort.
The spin button update policy determines whether the spin button displays values even if they are outside the bounds of its adjustment. See [gtk.spin_button.SpinButton.setUpdatePolicy].
The values of the GtkSpinType enumeration are used to specify the change to make in [gtk.spin_button.SpinButton.spin].
These enumeration values describe the possible transitions between pages in a #GtkStack widget.
New values may be added to this enumeration over time.
Describes a widget state. Widget states are used to match the widget against CSS pseudo-classes. Note that GTK extends the regular CSS classes and sometimes uses different names.
This type indicates the current state of a widget; the state determines how the widget is drawn. The #GtkStateType enumeration is also used to identify different colors in a #GtkStyle for drawing, so states can be used for subparts of a widget as well as entire widgets.
Deprecated
in favor of alternatives using #GtkStateFlags.
Flags that modify the behavior of [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.toString_]. New values may be added to this enumeration.
The #GtkTargetFlags enumeration is used to specify constraints on a #GtkTargetEntry.
These values are used as “info” for the targets contained in the lists returned by [gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.getCopyTargetList] and [gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.getPasteTargetList].
The values counts down from -1 to avoid clashes with application added drag destinations which usually start at 0.
Reading directions for text.
Granularity types that extend the text selection. Use the #GtkTextView::extend-selection signal to customize the selection.
Flags affecting how a search is done.
If neither #GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY nor #GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY are enabled, the match must be exact; the special 0xFFFC character will match embedded pixbufs or child widgets.
Used to reference the layers of #GtkTextView for the purpose of customized drawing with the ::draw_layer vfunc.
Used to reference the parts of #GtkTextView.
Flags used to specify the supported drag targets.
Whether spacers are vertical lines or just blank.
Used to customize the appearance of a #GtkToolbar. Note that setting the toolbar style overrides the user’s preferences for the default toolbar style. Note that if the button has only a label set and GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS is used, the label will be visible, and vice versa.
These flags indicate various properties of a #GtkTreeModel.
They are returned by [gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.getFlags], and must be static for the lifetime of the object. A more complete description of #GTK_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST can be found in the overview of this section.
The sizing method the column uses to determine its width. Please note that @GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE are inefficient for large views, and can make columns appear choppy.
An enum for determining where a dropped row goes.
Used to indicate which grid lines to draw in a tree view.
These enumeration values are used by [gtk.uimanager.UIManager.addUi] to determine what UI element to create.
See also [gtk.print_settings.PrintSettings.setPaperWidth].
Kinds of widget-specific help. Used by the ::show-help signal.
Window placement can be influenced using this enumeration. Note that using #GTK_WIN_POS_CENTER_ALWAYS is almost always a bad idea. It won’t necessarily work well with all window managers or on all windowing systems.
A #GtkWindow can be one of these types. Most things you’d consider a “window” should have type #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL; windows with this type are managed by the window manager and have a frame by default (call [gtk.window.Window.setDecorated] to toggle the frame). Windows with type #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP are ignored by the window manager; window manager keybindings won’t work on them, the window manager won’t decorate the window with a frame, many GTK+ features that rely on the window manager will not work (e.g. resize grips and maximization/minimization). #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is used to implement widgets such as #GtkMenu or tooltips that you normally don’t think of as windows per se. Nearly all windows should be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. In particular, do not use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP just to turn off the window borders; use [gtk.window.Window.setDecorated] for that.
Describes a type of line wrapping.
The GtkAboutDialog offers a simple way to display information about a program like its logo, name, copyright, website and license. It is also possible to give credits to the authors, documenters, translators and artists who have worked on the program. An about dialog is typically opened when the user selects the About option from the Help menu. All parts of the dialog are optional.
About dialogs often contain links and email addresses. GtkAboutDialog displays these as clickable links. By default, it calls [gtk.global.showUriOnWindow] when a user clicks one. The behaviour can be overridden with the #GtkAboutDialog::activate-link signal.
To specify a person with an email address, use a string like "Edgar Allan Poe <edgar\@poe.com>". To specify a website with a title, use a string like "GTK+ team http://www.gtk.org".
To make constructing a GtkAboutDialog as convenient as possible, you can use the function [gtk.global.showAboutDialog] which constructs and shows a dialog and keeps it around so that it can be shown again.
Note that GTK+ sets a default title of _("About s`")` on the dialog window (where \s is replaced by the name of the application, but in order to ensure proper translation of the title, applications should set the title property explicitly when constructing a GtkAboutDialog, as shown in the following example:
GdkPixbuf *example_logo = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file ("./logo.png", NULL);
gtk_show_about_dialog (NULL,
"program-name", "ExampleCode",
"logo", example_logo,
"title", _("About ExampleCode"),
NULL);It is also possible to show a #GtkAboutDialog like any other #GtkDialog, e.g. using [gtk.dialog.Dialog.run]. In this case, you might need to know that the “Close” button returns the #GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL response id.
GtkDialogClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkAboutDialog * dialog, const(char) * uri) activateLinkvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkAccelGroup represents a group of keyboard accelerators, typically attached to a toplevel #GtkWindow (with [gtk.window.Window.addAccelGroup]). Usually you won’t need to create a #GtkAccelGroup directly; instead, when using #GtkUIManager, GTK+ automatically sets up the accelerators for your menus in the ui manager’s #GtkAccelGroup.
Note that “accelerators” are different from “mnemonics”. Accelerators are shortcuts for activating a menu item; they appear alongside the menu item they’re a shortcut for. For example “Ctrl+Q” might appear alongside the “Quit” menu item. Mnemonics are shortcuts for GUI elements such as text entries or buttons; they appear as underlined characters. See [gtk.label.Label.newWithMnemonic]. Menu items can have both accelerators and mnemonics, of course.
GObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkAccelGroup * accelGroup, uint keyval, GdkModifierType modifier, GClosure * accelClosure) accelChangedSignal emitted when an entry is added to or removed from the accel group.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4uint accelKeyThe accelerator keyvalGdkModifierType accelModsThe accelerator modifiersuint accelFlagsThe accelerator flagsThe #GtkAccelLabel widget is a subclass of #GtkLabel that also displays an accelerator key on the right of the label text, e.g. “Ctrl+S”. It is commonly used in menus to show the keyboard short-cuts for commands.
The accelerator key to display is typically not set explicitly (although it can be, with [gtk.accel_label.AccelLabel.setAccel]). Instead, the #GtkAccelLabel displays the accelerators which have been added to a particular widget. This widget is set by calling [gtk.accel_label.AccelLabel.setAccelWidget].
For example, a #GtkMenuItem widget may have an accelerator added to emit the “activate” signal when the “Ctrl+S” key combination is pressed. A #GtkAccelLabel is created and added to the #GtkMenuItem, and [gtk.accel_label.AccelLabel.setAccelWidget] is called with the #GtkMenuItem as the second argument. The #GtkAccelLabel will now display “Ctrl+S” after its label.
Note that creating a #GtkMenuItem with [gtk.menu_item.MenuItem.newWithLabel] (or one of the similar functions for #GtkCheckMenuItem and #GtkRadioMenuItem) automatically adds a #GtkAccelLabel to the #GtkMenuItem and calls [gtk.accel_label.AccelLabel.setAccelWidget] to set it up for you.
A #GtkAccelLabel will only display accelerators which have [gtk.types.AccelFlags.Visible] set (see #GtkAccelFlags). A #GtkAccelLabel can display multiple accelerators and even signal names, though it is almost always used to display just one accelerator key.
Creating a simple menu item with an accelerator key.
GtkWidget *window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
GtkWidget *menu = gtk_menu_new ();
GtkWidget *save_item;
GtkAccelGroup *accel_group;
// Create a GtkAccelGroup and add it to the window.
accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new ();
gtk_window_add_accel_group (GTK_WINDOW (window), accel_group);
// Create the menu item using the convenience function.
save_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label ("Save");
gtk_widget_show (save_item);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (menu), save_item);
// Now add the accelerator to the GtkMenuItem. Note that since we
// called gtk_menu_item_new_with_label() to create the GtkMenuItem
// the GtkAccelLabel is automatically set up to display the
// GtkMenuItem accelerators. We just need to make sure we use
// GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE here.
gtk_widget_add_accelerator (save_item, "activate", accel_group,
GDK_KEY_s, GDK_CONTROL_MASK, GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE);CSS nodes
label
╰── acceleratorLike #GtkLabel, GtkAccelLabel has a main CSS node with the name label. It adds a subnode with name accelerator.
GtkLabelClass parentClasschar * signalQuote1char * signalQuote2char * modNameShiftchar * modNameControlchar * modNameAltchar * modSeparatorvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Accelerator maps are used to define runtime configurable accelerators. Functions for manipulating them are are usually used by higher level convenience mechanisms like #GtkUIManager and are thus considered “low-level”. You’ll want to use them if you’re manually creating menus that should have user-configurable accelerators.
An accelerator is uniquely defined by:
- accelerator path
- accelerator key
- accelerator modifiers
The accelerator path must consist of “<WINDOWTYPE>/Category1/Category2/.../Action”, where WINDOWTYPE should be a unique application-specific identifier that corresponds to the kind of window the accelerator is being used in, e.g. “Gimp-Image”, “Abiword-Document” or “Gnumeric-Settings”. The “Category1/.../Action” portion is most appropriately chosen by the action the accelerator triggers, i.e. for accelerators on menu items, choose the item’s menu path, e.g. “File/Save As”, “Image/View/Zoom” or “Edit/Select All”. So a full valid accelerator path may look like: “<Gimp-Toolbox>/File/Dialogs/Tool Options...”.
All accelerators are stored inside one global #GtkAccelMap that can be obtained using [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.get]. See [Monitoring changes][monitoring-changes] for additional details.
Manipulating accelerators
New accelerators can be added using [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.addEntry]. To search for specific accelerator, use [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.lookupEntry]. Modifications of existing accelerators should be done using [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.changeEntry].
In order to avoid having some accelerators changed, they can be locked using [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.lockPath]. Unlocking is done using [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.unlockPath].
Saving and loading accelerator maps
Accelerator maps can be saved to and loaded from some external resource. For simple saving and loading from file, [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.save] and [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.load] are provided. Saving and loading can also be done by providing file descriptor to [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.saveFd] and [gtk.accel_map.AccelMap.loadFd].
Monitoring changes
#GtkAccelMap object is only useful for monitoring changes of accelerators. By connecting to #GtkAccelMap::changed signal, one can monitor changes of all accelerators. It is also possible to monitor only single accelerator path by using it as a detail of the #GtkAccelMap::changed signal.
The #GtkAccessible class is the base class for accessible implementations for #GtkWidget subclasses. It is a thin wrapper around #AtkObject, which adds facilities for associating a widget with its accessible object.
An accessible implementation for a third-party widget should derive from #GtkAccessible and implement the suitable interfaces from ATK, such as #AtkText or #AtkSelection. To establish the connection between the widget class and its corresponding acccessible implementation, override the get_accessible vfunc in #GtkWidgetClass.
AtkObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkAccessible * accessible) connectWidgetDestroyedvoid function(GtkAccessible * accessible) widgetSetvoid function(GtkAccessible * accessible) widgetUnsetvoid function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4In GTK+ 3.10, GtkAction has been deprecated. Use #GActioninstead, and associate actions with #GtkActionable widgets. Use #GMenuModel for creating menus with [gtk.menu.Menu.newFromModel].
Actions represent operations that the user can be perform, along with some information how it should be presented in the interface. Each action provides methods to create icons, menu items and toolbar items representing itself.
As well as the callback that is called when the action gets activated, the following also gets associated with the action:
- a name (not translated, for path lookup)
- a label (translated, for display)
- an accelerator
- whether label indicates a stock id
- a tooltip (optional, translated)
- a toolbar label (optional, shorter than label)
The action will also have some state information:
- visible (shown/hidden)
- sensitive (enabled/disabled)
Apart from regular actions, there are [toggle actions][GtkToggleAction], which can be toggled between two states and [radio actions][GtkRadioAction], of which only one in a group can be in the “active” state. Other actions can be implemented as #GtkAction subclasses.
Each action can have one or more proxy widgets. To act as an action proxy, widget needs to implement #GtkActivatable interface. Proxies mirror the state of the action and should change when the action’s state changes. Properties that are always mirrored by proxies are #GtkAction:sensitive and #GtkAction:visible. #GtkAction:gicon, #GtkAction:icon-name, #GtkAction:label, #GtkAction:short-label and #GtkAction:stock-id properties are only mirorred if proxy widget has #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance property set to true.
When the proxy is activated, it should activate its action.
GtkActionBar is designed to present contextual actions. It is expected to be displayed below the content and expand horizontally to fill the area.
It allows placing children at the start or the end. In addition, it contains an internal centered box which is centered with respect to the full width of the box, even if the children at either side take up different amounts of space.
CSS nodes
GtkActionBar has a single CSS node with name actionbar.
GtkBin binGtkBinClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkAction * action) activateSignal emitted when the action is activated.GType menuItemTypeGType toolbarItemTypevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkActionEntry structs are used with [gtk.action_group.ActionGroup.addActions] to construct actions.
const(char) * nameThe name of the action.const(char) * stockIdThe stock id for the action, or the name of an icon from the icon theme.const(char) * labelThe label for the action. This field should typically be marked for translation, see [gtk.actiongroup.ActionGroup.setTranslationDomain]. If @label is null, the label of the stock item with id @stoc...const(char) * acceleratorThe accelerator for the action, in the format understood by [gtk.global.acceleratorParse].const(char) * tooltipThe tooltip for the action. This field should typically be marked for translation, see [gtk.action_group.ActionGroup.setTranslationDomain].GCallback callbackThe function to call when the action is activated.Actions are organised into groups. An action group is essentially a map from names to #GtkAction objects.
All actions that would make sense to use in a particular context should be in a single group. Multiple action groups may be used for a particular user interface. In fact, it is expected that most nontrivial applications will make use of multiple groups. For example, in an application that can edit multiple documents, one group holding global actions (e.g. quit, about, new), and one group per document holding actions that act on that document (eg. save, cut/copy/paste, etc). Each window’s menus would be constructed from a combination of two action groups.
Accelerators ## {#Action-Accel}
Accelerators are handled by the GTK+ accelerator map. All actions are assigned an accelerator path (which normally has the form <Actions>/group-name/action-name) and a shortcut is associated with this accelerator path. All menuitems and toolitems take on this accelerator path. The GTK+ accelerator map code makes sure that the correct shortcut is displayed next to the menu item.
GtkActionGroup as GtkBuildable # {#GtkActionGroup-BUILDER-UI}
The #GtkActionGroup implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface accepts #GtkAction objects as <child> elements in UI definitions.
Note that it is probably more common to define actions and action groups in the code, since they are directly related to what the code can do.
The GtkActionGroup implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <accelerator> element, which has attributes named “key“ and “modifiers“ and allows to specify accelerators. This is similar to the <accelerator> element of #GtkWidget, the main difference is that it doesn’t allow you to specify a signal.
A #GtkDialog UI definition fragment.
<object class="GtkActionGroup" id="actiongroup">
<child>
<object class="GtkAction" id="About">
<property name="name">About</property>
<property name="stock_id">gtk-about</property>
<signal handler="about_activate" name="activate"/>
</object>
<accelerator key="F1" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_SHIFT_MASK"/>
</child>
</object>GObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.GtkAction * function(GtkActionGroup * actionGroup, const(char) * actionName) getActionLooks up an action in the action group by name.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4This interface provides a convenient way of associating widgets with actions on a #GtkApplicationWindow or #GtkApplication.
It primarily consists of two properties: #GtkActionable:action-name and #GtkActionable:action-target. There are also some convenience APIs for setting these properties.
The action will be looked up in action groups that are found among the widgets ancestors. Most commonly, these will be the actions with the “win.” or “app.” prefix that are associated with the #GtkApplicationWindow or #GtkApplication, but other action groups that are added with [gtk.widget.Widget.insertActionGroup] will be consulted as well.
The interface vtable for #GtkActionable.
GTypeInterface gIfaceconst(char) * function(GtkActionable * actionable) getActionNamevirtual function for [gtk.actionable.Actionable.getActionName]void function(GtkActionable * actionable, const(char) * actionName) setActionNamevirtual function for [gtk.actionable.Actionable.setActionName]GVariant * function(GtkActionable * actionable) getActionTargetValuevirtual function for [gtk.actionable.Actionable.getActionTargetValue]void function(GtkActionable * actionable, GVariant * targetValue) setActionTargetValuevirtual function for [gtk.actionable.Actionable.setActionTargetValue]Activatable widgets can be connected to a #GtkAction and reflects the state of its action. A #GtkActivatable can also provide feedback through its action, as they are responsible for activating their related actions.
Implementing GtkActivatable
When extending a class that is already #GtkActivatable; it is only necessary to implement the #GtkActivatable->sync_action_properties() and #GtkActivatable->update() methods and chain up to the parent implementation, however when introducing a new #GtkActivatable class; the #GtkActivatable:related-action and #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance properties need to be handled by the implementor. Handling these properties is mostly a matter of installing the action pointer and boolean flag on your instance, and calling [gtk.activatable.Activatable.doSetRelatedAction] and [gtk.activatable.Activatable.syncActionProperties] at the appropriate times.
A class fragment implementing #GtkActivatable
enum {
...
PROP_ACTIVATABLE_RELATED_ACTION,
PROP_ACTIVATABLE_USE_ACTION_APPEARANCE
}
struct _FooBarPrivate
{
...
GtkAction *action;
gboolean use_action_appearance;
};
...
static void foo_bar_activatable_interface_init (GtkActivatableIface *iface);
static void foo_bar_activatable_update (GtkActivatable *activatable,
GtkAction *action,
const gchar *property_name);
static void foo_bar_activatable_sync_action_properties (GtkActivatable *activatable,
GtkAction *action);
...
static void
foo_bar_class_init (FooBarClass *klass)
{
...
g_object_class_override_property (gobject_class, PROP_ACTIVATABLE_RELATED_ACTION, "related-action");
g_object_class_override_property (gobject_class, PROP_ACTIVATABLE_USE_ACTION_APPEARANCE, "use-action-appearance");
...
}
static void
foo_bar_activatable_interface_init (GtkActivatableIface *iface)
{
iface->update = foo_bar_activatable_update;
iface->sync_action_properties = foo_bar_activatable_sync_action_properties;
}
... Break the reference using gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()...
static void
foo_bar_dispose (GObject *object)
{
FooBar *bar = FOO_BAR (object);
FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
...
if (priv->action)
{
gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action (GTK_ACTIVATABLE (bar), NULL);
priv->action = NULL;
}
G_OBJECT_CLASS (foo_bar_parent_class)->dispose (object);
}
... Handle the “related-action” and “use-action-appearance” properties ...
static void
foo_bar_set_property (GObject *object,
guint prop_id,
const GValue *value,
GParamSpec *pspec)
{
FooBar *bar = FOO_BAR (object);
FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
switch (prop_id)
{
...
case PROP_ACTIVATABLE_RELATED_ACTION:
foo_bar_set_related_action (bar, g_value_get_object (value));
break;
case PROP_ACTIVATABLE_USE_ACTION_APPEARANCE:
foo_bar_set_use_action_appearance (bar, g_value_get_boolean (value));
break;
default:
G_OBJECT_WARN_INVALID_PROPERTY_ID (object, prop_id, pspec);
break;
}
}
static void
foo_bar_get_property (GObject *object,
guint prop_id,
GValue *value,
GParamSpec *pspec)
{
FooBar *bar = FOO_BAR (object);
FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
switch (prop_id)
{
...
case PROP_ACTIVATABLE_RELATED_ACTION:
g_value_set_object (value, priv->action);
break;
case PROP_ACTIVATABLE_USE_ACTION_APPEARANCE:
g_value_set_boolean (value, priv->use_action_appearance);
break;
default:
G_OBJECT_WARN_INVALID_PROPERTY_ID (object, prop_id, pspec);
break;
}
}
static void
foo_bar_set_use_action_appearance (FooBar *bar,
gboolean use_appearance)
{
FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
if (priv->use_action_appearance != use_appearance)
{
priv->use_action_appearance = use_appearance;
gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties (GTK_ACTIVATABLE (bar), priv->action);
}
}
... call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() and then assign the action pointer,
no need to reference the action here since gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() already
holds a reference here for you...
static void
foo_bar_set_related_action (FooBar *bar,
GtkAction *action)
{
FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
if (priv->action == action)
return;
gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action (GTK_ACTIVATABLE (bar), action);
priv->action = action;
}
... Selectively reset and update activatable depending on the use-action-appearance property ...
static void
gtk_button_activatable_sync_action_properties (GtkActivatable *activatable,
GtkAction *action)
{
GtkButtonPrivate *priv = GTK_BUTTON_GET_PRIVATE (activatable);
if (!action)
return;
if (gtk_action_is_visible (action))
gtk_widget_show (GTK_WIDGET (activatable));
else
gtk_widget_hide (GTK_WIDGET (activatable));
gtk_widget_set_sensitive (GTK_WIDGET (activatable), gtk_action_is_sensitive (action));
...
if (priv->use_action_appearance)
{
if (gtk_action_get_stock_id (action))
foo_bar_set_stock (button, gtk_action_get_stock_id (action));
else if (gtk_action_get_label (action))
foo_bar_set_label (button, gtk_action_get_label (action));
...
}
}
static void
foo_bar_activatable_update (GtkActivatable *activatable,
GtkAction *action,
const gchar *property_name)
{
FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (activatable);
if (strcmp (property_name, "visible") == 0)
{
if (gtk_action_is_visible (action))
gtk_widget_show (GTK_WIDGET (activatable));
else
gtk_widget_hide (GTK_WIDGET (activatable));
}
else if (strcmp (property_name, "sensitive") == 0)
gtk_widget_set_sensitive (GTK_WIDGET (activatable), gtk_action_is_sensitive (action));
...
if (!priv->use_action_appearance)
return;
if (strcmp (property_name, "stock-id") == 0)
foo_bar_set_stock (button, gtk_action_get_stock_id (action));
else if (strcmp (property_name, "label") == 0)
foo_bar_set_label (button, gtk_action_get_label (action));
...
}This method can be called with a null action at times.
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkActivatable * activatable, GtkAction * action, const(char) * propertyName) updateCalled to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change. You must check the #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance property only apply action properties that are meant to effe...void function(GtkActivatable * activatable, GtkAction * action) syncActionPropertiesCalled to update the activatable completely, this is called internally when #GtkActivatable:related-action property is set or unset and by the implementor when #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance...The #GtkAdjustment object represents a value which has an associated lower and upper bound, together with step and page increments, and a page size. It is used within several GTK+ widgets, including #GtkSpinButton, #GtkViewport, and #GtkRange (which is a base class for #GtkScrollbar and #GtkScale).
The #GtkAdjustment object does not update the value itself. Instead it is left up to the owner of the #GtkAdjustment to control the value.
GInitiallyUnownedClass parentClassvoid function(GtkAdjustment * adjustment) changedvoid function(GtkAdjustment * adjustment) valueChangedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkAlignment widget controls the alignment and size of its child widget. It has four settings: xscale, yscale, xalign, and yalign.
The scale settings are used to specify how much the child widget should expand to fill the space allocated to the #GtkAlignment. The values can range from 0 (meaning the child doesn’t expand at all) to 1 (meaning the child expands to fill all of the available space).
The align settings are used to place the child widget within the available area. The values range from 0 (top or left) to 1 (bottom or right). Of course, if the scale settings are both set to 1, the alignment settings have no effect.
GtkAlignment has been deprecated in 3.14 and should not be used in newly-written code. The desired effect can be achieved by using the #GtkWidget:halign, #GtkWidget:valign and #GtkWidget:margin properties on the child widget.
GtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkAppChooser is an interface that can be implemented by widgets which allow the user to choose an application (typically for the purpose of opening a file). The main objects that implement this interface are #GtkAppChooserWidget, #GtkAppChooserDialog and #GtkAppChooserButton.
Applications are represented by GIO #GAppInfo objects here. GIO has a concept of recommended and fallback applications for a given content type. Recommended applications are those that claim to handle the content type itself, while fallback also includes applications that handle a more generic content type. GIO also knows the default and last-used application for a given content type. The #GtkAppChooserWidget provides detailed control over whether the shown list of applications should include default, recommended or fallback applications.
To obtain the application that has been selected in a #GtkAppChooser, use [gtk.app_chooser.AppChooser.getAppInfo].
The #GtkAppChooserButton is a widget that lets the user select an application. It implements the #GtkAppChooser interface.
Initially, a #GtkAppChooserButton selects the first application in its list, which will either be the most-recently used application or, if #GtkAppChooserButton:show-default-item is true, the default application.
The list of applications shown in a #GtkAppChooserButton includes the recommended applications for the given content type. When #GtkAppChooserButton:show-default-item is set, the default application is also included. To let the user chooser other applications, you can set the #GtkAppChooserButton:show-dialog-item property, which allows to open a full #GtkAppChooserDialog.
It is possible to add custom items to the list, using [gtk.app_chooser_button.AppChooserButton.appendCustomItem]. These items cause the #GtkAppChooserButton::custom-item-activated signal to be emitted when they are selected.
To track changes in the selected application, use the #GtkComboBox::changed signal.
GtkComboBoxClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkAppChooserButton * self, const(char) * itemName) customItemActivatedSignal emitted when a custom item, previously added with [gtk.appchooserbutton.AppChooserButton.appendCustomItem], is activated from the dropdown menu.void *[16] padding#GtkAppChooserDialog shows a #GtkAppChooserWidget inside a #GtkDialog.
Note that #GtkAppChooserDialog does not have any interesting methods of its own. Instead, you should get the embedded #GtkAppChooserWidget using [gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog.getWidget] and call its methods if the generic #GtkAppChooser interface is not sufficient for your needs.
To set the heading that is shown above the #GtkAppChooserWidget, use [gtk.app_chooser_dialog.AppChooserDialog.setHeading].
#GtkAppChooserWidget is a widget for selecting applications. It is the main building block for #GtkAppChooserDialog. Most applications only need to use the latter; but you can use this widget as part of a larger widget if you have special needs.
#GtkAppChooserWidget offers detailed control over what applications are shown, using the #GtkAppChooserWidget:show-default, #GtkAppChooserWidget:show-recommended, #GtkAppChooserWidget:show-fallback, #GtkAppChooserWidget:show-other and #GtkAppChooserWidget:show-all properties. See the #GtkAppChooser documentation for more information about these groups of applications.
To keep track of the selected application, use the #GtkAppChooserWidget::application-selected and #GtkAppChooserWidget::application-activated signals.
CSS nodes
GtkAppChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name appchooser.
GtkBoxClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkAppChooserWidget * self, GAppInfo * appInfo) applicationSelectedSignal emitted when an application item is selected from the widget’s list.void function(GtkAppChooserWidget * self, GAppInfo * appInfo) applicationActivatedSignal emitted when an application item is activated from the widget’s list.void function(GtkAppChooserWidget * self, GtkMenu * menu, GAppInfo * appInfo) populatePopupSignal emitted when a context menu is about to popup over an application item.void *[16] padding#GtkApplication is a class that handles many important aspects of a GTK+ application in a convenient fashion, without enforcing a one-size-fits-all application model.
Currently, GtkApplication handles GTK+ initialization, application uniqueness, session management, provides some basic scriptability and desktop shell integration by exporting actions and menus and manages a list of toplevel windows whose life-cycle is automatically tied to the life-cycle of your application.
While GtkApplication works fine with plain #GtkWindows, it is recommended to use it together with #GtkApplicationWindow.
When GDK threads are enabled, GtkApplication will acquire the GDK lock when invoking actions that arrive from other processes. The GDK lock is not touched for local action invocations. In order to have actions invoked in a predictable context it is therefore recommended that the GDK lock be held while invoking actions locally with [gio.action_group.ActionGroup.activateAction]. The same applies to actions associated with #GtkApplicationWindow and to the “activate” and “open” #GApplication methods.
Automatic resources ## {#automatic-resources}
#GtkApplication will automatically load menus from the #GtkBuilder resource located at "gtk/menus.ui", relative to the application's resource base path (see [gio.application.Application.setResourceBasePath]). The menu with the ID "app-menu" is taken as the application's app menu and the menu with the ID "menubar" is taken as the application's menubar. Additional menus (most interesting submenus) can be named and accessed via [gtk.application.Application.getMenuById] which allows for dynamic population of a part of the menu structure.
If the resources "gtk/menus-appmenu.ui" or "gtk/menus-traditional.ui" are present then these files will be used in preference, depending on the value of [gtk.application.Application.prefersAppMenu]. If the resource "gtk/menus-common.ui" is present it will be loaded as well. This is useful for storing items that are referenced from both "gtk/menus-appmenu.ui" and "gtk/menus-traditional.ui".
It is also possible to provide the menus manually using [gtk.application.Application.setAppMenu] and [gtk.application.Application.setMenubar].
#GtkApplication will also automatically setup an icon search path for the default icon theme by appending "icons" to the resource base path. This allows your application to easily store its icons as resources. See [gtk.icon_theme.IconTheme.addResourcePath] for more information.
If there is a resource located at "gtk/help-overlay.ui" which defines a #GtkShortcutsWindow with ID "help_overlay" then GtkApplication associates an instance of this shortcuts window with each #GtkApplicationWindow and sets up keyboard accelerators (Control-F1 and Control-?) to open it. To create a menu item that displays the shortcuts window, associate the item with the action win.show-help-overlay.
A simple application ## {#gtkapplication}
A simple exampleGtkApplication optionally registers with a session manager of the users session (if you set the #GtkApplication:register-session property) and offers various functionality related to the session life-cycle.
An application can block various ways to end the session with the [gtk.application.Application.inhibit] function. Typical use cases for this kind of inhibiting are long-running, uninterruptible operations, such as burning a CD or performing a disk backup. The session manager may not honor the inhibitor, but it can be expected to inform the user about the negative consequences of ending the session while inhibitors are present.
See Also ## {#seealso}
HowDoI: Using GtkApplication, Getting Started with GTK+: BasicsGApplicationClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkApplication * application, GtkWindow * window) windowAddedSignal emitted when a #GtkWindow is added to application through [gtk.application.Application.addWindow].void function(GtkApplication * application, GtkWindow * window) windowRemovedSignal emitted when a #GtkWindow is removed from application, either as a side-effect of being destroyed or explicitly through [gtk.application.Application.removeWindow].void *[12] padding#GtkApplicationWindow is a #GtkWindow subclass that offers some extra functionality for better integration with #GtkApplication features. Notably, it can handle both the application menu as well as the menubar. See [gtk.application.Application.setAppMenu] and [gtk.application.Application.setMenubar].
This class implements the #GActionGroup and #GActionMap interfaces, to let you add window-specific actions that will be exported by the associated #GtkApplication, together with its application-wide actions. Window-specific actions are prefixed with the “win.” prefix and application-wide actions are prefixed with the “app.” prefix. Actions must be addressed with the prefixed name when referring to them from a #GMenuModel.
Note that widgets that are placed inside a #GtkApplicationWindow can also activate these actions, if they implement the #GtkActionable interface.
As with #GtkApplication, the GDK lock will be acquired when processing actions arriving from other processes and should therefore be held when activating actions locally (if GDK threads are enabled).
The settings #GtkSettings:gtk-shell-shows-app-menu and #GtkSettings:gtk-shell-shows-menubar tell GTK+ whether the desktop environment is showing the application menu and menubar models outside the application as part of the desktop shell. For instance, on OS X, both menus will be displayed remotely; on Windows neither will be. gnome-shell (starting with version 3.4) will display the application menu, but not the menubar.
If the desktop environment does not display the menubar, then #GtkApplicationWindow will automatically show a #GtkMenuBar for it. This behaviour can be overridden with the #GtkApplicationWindow:show-menubar property. If the desktop environment does not display the application menu, then it will automatically be included in the menubar or in the windows client-side decorations.
A GtkApplicationWindow with a menubar
GtkApplication *app = gtk_application_new ("org.gtk.test", 0);
GtkBuilder *builder = gtk_builder_new_from_string (
"<interface>"
" <menu id='menubar'>"
" <submenu label='_Edit'>"
" <item label='_Copy' action='win.copy'/>"
" <item label='_Paste' action='win.paste'/>"
" </submenu>"
" </menu>"
"</interface>",
-1);
GMenuModel *menubar = G_MENU_MODEL (gtk_builder_get_object (builder,
"menubar"));
gtk_application_set_menubar (GTK_APPLICATION (app), menubar);
g_object_unref (builder);
// ...
GtkWidget *window = gtk_application_window_new (app);Handling fallback yourself
A simple exampleThe XML format understood by #GtkBuilder for #GMenuModel consists of a toplevel <menu> element, which contains one or more <item> elements. Each <item> element contains <attribute> and <link> elements with a mandatory name attribute. <link> elements have the same content model as <menu>. Instead of <link name="submenu> or <link name="section">, you can use <submenu> or <section> elements.
Attribute values can be translated using gettext, like other #GtkBuilder content. <attribute> elements can be marked for translation with a translatable="yes" attribute. It is also possible to specify message context and translator comments, using the context and comments attributes. To make use of this, the #GtkBuilder must have been given the gettext domain to use.
The following attributes are used when constructing menu items:
- "label": a user-visible string to display
- "action": the prefixed name of the action to trigger
- "target": the parameter to use when activating the action
- "icon" and "verb-icon": names of icons that may be displayed
- "submenu-action": name of an action that may be used to determine
if a submenu can be opened
- "hidden-when": a string used to determine when the item will be hidden.
Possible values include "action-disabled", "action-missing", "macos-menubar".
The following attributes are used when constructing sections:
- "label": a user-visible string to use as section heading
- "display-hint": a string used to determine special formatting for the section.
Possible values include "horizontal-buttons".
- "text-direction": a string used to determine the #GtkTextDirection to use
when "display-hint" is set to "horizontal-buttons". Possible values include "rtl", "ltr", and "none".
The following attributes are used when constructing submenus:
- "label": a user-visible string to display
- "icon": icon name to display
GtkArrow should be used to draw simple arrows that need to point in one of the four cardinal directions (up, down, left, or right). The style of the arrow can be one of shadow in, shadow out, etched in, or etched out. Note that these directions and style types may be amended in versions of GTK+ to come.
GtkArrow will fill any space alloted to it, but since it is inherited from #GtkMisc, it can be padded and/or aligned, to fill exactly the space the programmer desires.
Arrows are created with a call to [gtk.arrow.Arrow.new_]. The direction or style of an arrow can be changed after creation by using [gtk.arrow.Arrow.set].
GtkArrow has been deprecated; you can simply use a #GtkImage with a suitable icon name, such as “pan-down-symbolic“. When replacing GtkArrow by an image, pay attention to the fact that GtkArrow is doing automatic flipping between #GTK_ARROW_LEFT and #GTK_ARROW_RIGHT, depending on the text direction. To get the same effect with an image, use the icon names “pan-start-symbolic“ and “pan-end-symbolic“, which react to the text direction.
GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassGtkMiscClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkAspectFrame is useful when you want pack a widget so that it can resize but always retains the same aspect ratio. For instance, one might be drawing a small preview of a larger image. #GtkAspectFrame derives from #GtkFrame, so it can draw a label and a frame around the child. The frame will be “shrink-wrapped” to the size of the child.
CSS nodes
GtkAspectFrame uses a CSS node with name frame.
GtkFrameClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkAssistant is a widget used to represent a generally complex operation splitted in several steps, guiding the user through its pages and controlling the page flow to collect the necessary data.
The design of GtkAssistant is that it controls what buttons to show and to make sensitive, based on what it knows about the page sequence and the [type][GtkAssistantPageType] of each page, in addition to state information like the page [completion][gtk-assistant-set-page-complete] and [committed][gtk-assistant-commit] status.
If you have a case that doesn’t quite fit in #GtkAssistants way of handling buttons, you can use the #GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CUSTOM page type and handle buttons yourself.
GtkAssistant as GtkBuildable
The GtkAssistant implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface exposes the @action_area as internal children with the name “action_area”.
To add pages to an assistant in #GtkBuilder, simply add it as a child to the GtkAssistant object, and set its child properties as necessary.
CSS nodes
GtkAssistant has a single CSS node with the name assistant.
GtkWindowClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkAssistant * assistant, GtkWidget * page) prepareSignal emitted when a new page is set as the assistant’s current page, before making the new page visible.void function(GtkAssistant * assistant) applySignal emitted when the apply button is clicked.void function(GtkAssistant * assistant) closeSignal emitted either when the close button or last page apply button is clicked.void function(GtkAssistant * assistant) cancelSignal emitted when the cancel button is clicked.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5The #GtkBin widget is a container with just one child. It is not very useful itself, but it is useful for deriving subclasses, since it provides common code needed for handling a single child widget.
Many GTK+ widgets are subclasses of #GtkBin, including #GtkWindow, #GtkButton, #GtkFrame, #GtkHandleBox or #GtkScrolledWindow.
GtkContainerClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkBindingArg holds the data associated with an argument for a key binding signal emission as stored in #GtkBindingSignal.
Each key binding element of a binding sets binding list is represented by a GtkBindingEntry.
uint keyvalkey value to matchGdkModifierType modifierskey modifiers to matchGtkBindingSet * bindingSetbinding set this entry belongs touint destroyedimplementation detailuint inEmissionimplementation detailuint marksUnboundimplementation detailGtkBindingEntry * setNextlinked list of entries maintained by binding setGtkBindingEntry * hashNextimplementation detailGtkBindingSignal * signalsaction signals of this entryA binding set maintains a list of activatable key bindings. A single binding set can match multiple types of widgets. Similar to style contexts, can be matched by any information contained in a widgets #GtkWidgetPath. When a binding within a set is matched upon activation, an action signal is emitted on the target widget to carry out the actual activation.
char * setNameunique name of this binding setint priorityunusedGSList * widgetPathPspecsunusedGSList * widgetClassPspecsunusedGSList * classBranchPspecsunusedGtkBindingEntry * entriesthe key binding entries in this binding setGtkBindingEntry * currentimplementation detailuint parsedwhether this binding set stems from a CSS file and is reset upon theme changesA GtkBindingSignal stores the necessary information to activate a widget in response to a key press via a signal emission.
GtkBindingSignal * nextimplementation detailchar * signalNamethe action signal to be emitteduint nArgsnumber of arguments specified for the signalGtkBindingArg * argsthe arguments specified for the signalGtkRendererCellAccessibleClass parentClassA struct that specifies a border around a rectangular area that can be of different width on each side.
short leftThe width of the left bordershort rightThe width of the right bordershort topThe width of the top bordershort bottomThe width of the bottom borderThe GtkBox widget arranges child widgets into a single row or column, depending upon the value of its #GtkOrientable:orientation property. Within the other dimension, all children are allocated the same size. Of course, the #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties can be used on the children to influence their allocation.
GtkBox uses a notion of packing. Packing refers to adding widgets with reference to a particular position in a #GtkContainer. For a GtkBox, there are two reference positions: the start and the end of the box. For a vertical #GtkBox, the start is defined as the top of the box and the end is defined as the bottom. For a horizontal #GtkBox the start is defined as the left side and the end is defined as the right side.
Use repeated calls to [gtk.box.Box.packStart] to pack widgets into a GtkBox from start to end. Use [gtk.box.Box.packEnd] to add widgets from end to start. You may intersperse these calls and add widgets from both ends of the same GtkBox.
Because GtkBox is a #GtkContainer, you may also use [gtk.container.Container.add] to insert widgets into the box, and they will be packed with the default values for expand and fill child properties. Use [gtk.container.Container.remove] to remove widgets from the GtkBox.
Use [gtk.box.Box.setHomogeneous] to specify whether or not all children of the GtkBox are forced to get the same amount of space.
Use [gtk.box.Box.setSpacing] to determine how much space will be minimally placed between all children in the GtkBox. Note that spacing is added between the children, while padding added by [gtk.box.Box.packStart] or [gtk.box.Box.packEnd] is added on either side of the widget it belongs to.
Use [gtk.box.Box.reorderChild] to move a GtkBox child to a different place in the box.
Use [gtk.box.Box.setChildPacking] to reset the expand, fill and padding child properties. Use [gtk.box.Box.queryChildPacking] to query these fields.
CSS nodes
GtkBox uses a single CSS node with name box.
In horizontal orientation, the nodes of the children are always arranged from left to right. So :first-child will always select the leftmost child, regardless of text direction.
GtkContainerClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkBuildable allows objects to extend and customize their deserialization from [GtkBuilder UI descriptions][BUILDER-UI]. The interface includes methods for setting names and properties of objects, parsing custom tags and constructing child objects.
The GtkBuildable interface is implemented by all widgets and many of the non-widget objects that are provided by GTK+. The main user of this interface is #GtkBuilder. There should be very little need for applications to call any of these functions directly.
An object only needs to implement this interface if it needs to extend the #GtkBuilder format or run any extra routines at deserialization time.
The #GtkBuildableIface interface contains method that are necessary to allow #GtkBuilder to construct an object from a #GtkBuilder UI definition.
GTypeInterface gIfacethe parent classvoid function(GtkBuildable * buildable, const(char) * name) setNameStores the name attribute given in the GtkBuilder UI definition. #GtkWidget stores the name as object data. Implement this method if your object has some notion of “name” and it makes sense to ...const(char) * function(GtkBuildable * buildable) getNameThe getter corresponding to @setname. Implement this if you implement @setname.void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, GObject * child, const(char) * type) addChildAdds a child. The @type parameter can be used to differentiate the kind of child. #GtkContainer implements this to add add a child widget to the container, #GtkNotebook uses the @type to distinguis...void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * name, const(GValue) * value) setBuildablePropertySets a property of a buildable object. It is normally not necessary to implement this, [gobject.object.ObjectWrap.setProperty] is used by default. #GtkWindow implements this to delay showing itself...GObject * function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * name) constructChildConstructs a child of a buildable that has been specified as “constructor” in the UI definition. #GtkUIManager implements this to reference to a widget created in a `<ui>` tag which is outside ...gboolean function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, GObject * child, const(char) * tagname, GMarkupParser * parser, void * * data) customTagStartImplement this if the buildable needs to parse content below `<child>`. To handle an element, the implementation must fill in the @parser and @userdata and return true. #GtkWidget implements this t...void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, GObject * child, const(char) * tagname, void * * data) customTagEndCalled for the end tag of each custom element that is handled by the buildable (see @customtagstart).void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, GObject * child, const(char) * tagname, void * data) customFinishedCalled for each custom tag handled by the buildable when the builder finishes parsing (see @customtagstart)void function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder) parserFinishedCalled when a builder finishes the parsing of a UI definition. It is normally not necessary to implement this, unless you need to perform special cleanup actions. #GtkWindow sets the #GtkWidget:vis...GObject * function(GtkBuildable * buildable, GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * childname) getInternalChildReturns an internal child of a buildable. #GtkDialog implements this to give access to its @vbox, making it possible to add children to the vbox in a UI definition. Implement this if the buildable ...A GtkBuilder is an auxiliary object that reads textual descriptions of a user interface and instantiates the described objects. To create a GtkBuilder from a user interface description, call [gtk.builder.Builder.newFromFile], [gtk.builder.Builder.newFromResource] or [gtk.builder.Builder.newFromString].
In the (unusual) case that you want to add user interface descriptions from multiple sources to the same GtkBuilder you can call [gtk.builder.Builder.new_] to get an empty builder and populate it by (multiple) calls to [gtk.builder.Builder.addFromFile], [gtk.builder.Builder.addFromResource] or [gtk.builder.Builder.addFromString].
A GtkBuilder holds a reference to all objects that it has constructed and drops these references when it is finalized. This finalization can cause the destruction of non-widget objects or widgets which are not contained in a toplevel window. For toplevel windows constructed by a builder, it is the responsibility of the user to call [gtk.widget.Widget.destroy] to get rid of them and all the widgets they contain.
The functions [gtk.builder.Builder.getObject] and [gtk.builder.Builder.getObjects] can be used to access the widgets in the interface by the names assigned to them inside the UI description. Toplevel windows returned by these functions will stay around until the user explicitly destroys them with [gtk.widget.Widget.destroy]. Other widgets will either be part of a larger hierarchy constructed by the builder (in which case you should not have to worry about their lifecycle), or without a parent, in which case they have to be added to some container to make use of them. Non-widget objects need to be reffed with [gobject.object.ObjectWrap.ref_] to keep them beyond the lifespan of the builder.
The function [gtk.builder.Builder.connectSignals] and variants thereof can be used to connect handlers to the named signals in the description.
GtkBuilder UI Definitions # {#BUILDER-UI}
GtkBuilder parses textual descriptions of user interfaces which are specified in an XML format which can be roughly described by the RELAX NG schema below. We refer to these descriptions as “GtkBuilder UI definitions” or just “UI definitions” if the context is clear. Do not confuse GtkBuilder UI Definitions with [GtkUIManager UI Definitions][XML-UI], which are more limited in scope. It is common to use .ui as the filename extension for files containing GtkBuilder UI definitions.
The toplevel element is <interface>. It optionally takes a “domain” attribute, which will make the builder look for translated strings using dgettext() in the domain specified. This can also be done by calling [gtk.builder.Builder.setTranslationDomain] on the builder. Objects are described by <object> elements, which can contain <property> elements to set properties, <signal> elements which connect signals to handlers, and <child> elements, which describe child objects (most often widgets inside a container, but also e.g. actions in an action group, or columns in a tree model). A <child> element contains an <object> element which describes the child object. The target toolkit version(s) are described by <requires> elements, the “lib” attribute specifies the widget library in question (currently the only supported value is “gtk+”) and the “version” attribute specifies the target version in the form <major>.<minor>. The builder will error out if the version requirements are not met.
Typically, the specific kind of object represented by an <object> element is specified by the “class” attribute. If the type has not been loaded yet, GTK+ tries to find the get_type() function from the class name by applying heuristics. This works in most cases, but if necessary, it is possible to specify the name of the get_type() function explictly with the "type-func" attribute. As a special case, GtkBuilder allows to use an object that has been constructed by a #GtkUIManager in another part of the UI definition by specifying the id of the #GtkUIManager in the “constructor” attribute and the name of the object in the “id” attribute.
Objects may be given a name with the “id” attribute, which allows the application to retrieve them from the builder with [gtk.builder.Builder.getObject]. An id is also necessary to use the object as property value in other parts of the UI definition. GTK+ reserves ids starting and ending with ___ (3 underscores) for its own purposes.
Setting properties of objects is pretty straightforward with the <property> element: the “name” attribute specifies the name of the property, and the content of the element specifies the value. If the “translatable” attribute is set to a true value, GTK+ uses gettext() (or dgettext() if the builder has a translation domain set) to find a translation for the value. This happens before the value is parsed, so it can be used for properties of any type, but it is probably most useful for string properties. It is also possible to specify a context to disambiguate short strings, and comments which may help the translators.
GtkBuilder can parse textual representations for the most common property types: characters, strings, integers, floating-point numbers, booleans (strings like “TRUE”, “t”, “yes”, “y”, “1” are interpreted as true, strings like “FALSE”, “f”, “no”, “n”, “0” are interpreted as false), enumerations (can be specified by their name, nick or integer value), flags (can be specified by their name, nick, integer value, optionally combined with “|”, e.g. “GTK_VISIBLE|GTK_REALIZED”) and colors (in a format understood by [gdk.rgba.RGBA.parse]).
GVariants can be specified in the format understood by [glib.variant.Variant.parse], and pixbufs can be specified as a filename of an image file to load.
Objects can be referred to by their name and by default refer to objects declared in the local xml fragment and objects exposed via [gtk.builder.Builder.exposeObject]. In general, GtkBuilder allows forward references to objects — declared in the local xml; an object doesn’t have to be constructed before it can be referred to. The exception to this rule is that an object has to be constructed before it can be used as the value of a construct-only property.
It is also possible to bind a property value to another object's property value using the attributes "bind-source" to specify the source object of the binding, "bind-property" to specify the source property and optionally "bind-flags" to specify the binding flags. Internally builder implements this using GBinding objects. For more information see [gobject.object.ObjectWrap.bindProperty]
Signal handlers are set up with the <signal> element. The “name” attribute specifies the name of the signal, and the “handler” attribute specifies the function to connect to the signal. By default, GTK+ tries to find the handler using [gmodule.module_.Module.symbol], but this can be changed by passing a custom #GtkBuilderConnectFunc to [gtk.builder.Builder.connectSignalsFull]. The remaining attributes, “after”, “swapped” and “object”, have the same meaning as the corresponding parameters of the [gobject.global.signalConnectObject] or [gobject.global.signalConnectData] functions. A “last_modification_time” attribute is also allowed, but it does not have a meaning to the builder.
Sometimes it is necessary to refer to widgets which have implicitly been constructed by GTK+ as part of a composite widget, to set properties on them or to add further children (e.g. the @vbox of a #GtkDialog). This can be achieved by setting the “internal-child” property of the <child> element to a true value. Note that GtkBuilder still requires an <object> element for the internal child, even if it has already been constructed.
A number of widgets have different places where a child can be added (e.g. tabs vs. page content in notebooks). This can be reflected in a UI definition by specifying the “type” attribute on a <child> The possible values for the “type” attribute are described in the sections describing the widget-specific portions of UI definitions.
A GtkBuilder UI Definition
<interface>
<object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1">
<child internal-child="vbox">
<object class="GtkBox" id="vbox1">
<property name="border-width">10</property>
<child internal-child="action_area">
<object class="GtkButtonBox" id="hbuttonbox1">
<property name="border-width">20</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="ok_button">
<property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
<property name="use-stock">TRUE</property>
<signal name="clicked" handler="ok_button_clicked"/>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</interface>Beyond this general structure, several object classes define their own XML DTD fragments for filling in the ANY placeholders in the DTD above. Note that a custom element in a <child> element gets parsed by the custom tag handler of the parent object, while a custom element in an <object> element gets parsed by the custom tag handler of the object.
These XML fragments are explained in the documentation of the respective objects.
Additionally, since 3.10 a special <template> tag has been added to the format allowing one to define a widget class’s components. See the [GtkWidget documentation][composite-templates] for details.
GObjectClass parentClassGType function(GtkBuilder * builder, const(char) * typeName) getTypeFromNamevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8The #GtkButton widget is generally used to trigger a callback function that is called when the button is pressed. The various signals and how to use them are outlined below.
The #GtkButton widget can hold any valid child widget. That is, it can hold almost any other standard #GtkWidget. The most commonly used child is the #GtkLabel.
CSS nodes
GtkButton has a single CSS node with name button. The node will get the style classes .image-button or .text-button, if the content is just an image or label, respectively. It may also receive the .flat style class.
Other style classes that are commonly used with GtkButton include .suggested-action and .destructive-action. In special cases, buttons can be made round by adding the .circular style class.
Button-like widgets like #GtkToggleButton, #GtkMenuButton, #GtkVolumeButton, #GtkLockButton, #GtkColorButton, #GtkFontButton or #GtkFileChooserButton use style classes such as .toggle, .popup, .scale, .lock, .color, .font, .file to differentiate themselves from a plain GtkButton.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBoxClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkButton * button) pressedSignal emitted when the button is pressed. Deprecated: 2.8.void function(GtkButton * button) releasedSignal emitted when the button is released. Deprecated: 2.8.void function(GtkButton * button) clickedSignal emitted when the button has been activated (pressed and released).void function(GtkButton * button) enterSignal emitted when the pointer enters the button. Deprecated: 2.8.void function(GtkButton * button) leaveSignal emitted when the pointer leaves the button. Deprecated: 2.8.void function(GtkButton * button) activateSignal that causes the button to animate press then release. Applications should never connect to this signal, but use the @clicked signal.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkCalendar is a widget that displays a Gregorian calendar, one month at a time. It can be created with [gtk.calendar.Calendar.new_].
The month and year currently displayed can be altered with [gtk.calendar.Calendar.selectMonth]. The exact day can be selected from the displayed month using [gtk.calendar.Calendar.selectDay].
To place a visual marker on a particular day, use [gtk.calendar.Calendar.markDay] and to remove the marker, [gtk.calendar.Calendar.unmarkDay]. Alternative, all marks can be cleared with [gtk.calendar.Calendar.clearMarks].
The way in which the calendar itself is displayed can be altered using [gtk.calendar.Calendar.setDisplayOptions].
The selected date can be retrieved from a #GtkCalendar using [gtk.calendar.Calendar.getDate].
Users should be aware that, although the Gregorian calendar is the legal calendar in most countries, it was adopted progressively between 1582 and 1929. Display before these dates is likely to be historically incorrect.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCalendar * calendar) monthChangedvoid function(GtkCalendar * calendar) daySelectedvoid function(GtkCalendar * calendar) daySelectedDoubleClickvoid function(GtkCalendar * calendar) prevMonthvoid function(GtkCalendar * calendar) nextMonthvoid function(GtkCalendar * calendar) prevYearvoid function(GtkCalendar * calendar) nextYearvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkAccessibleClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCellAccessible * cell, gboolean emitSignal) updateCacheGTypeInterface parentvoid function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell, int * x, int * y, int * width, int * height, AtkCoordType coordType) getCellExtentsvoid function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell, GdkRectangle * cellRect) getCellAreagboolean function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell) grabFocusint function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell) getChildIndexGtkCellRendererState function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell) getRendererStatevoid function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell) expandCollapsevoid function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell) activatevoid function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell) editvoid function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell, AtkRelationSet * relationset) updateRelationsetvoid function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell, int * row, int * column) getCellPositionGPtrArray * function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell) getColumnHeaderCellsGPtrArray * function(GtkCellAccessibleParent * parent, GtkCellAccessible * cell) getRowHeaderCellsThe #GtkCellArea is an abstract class for #GtkCellLayout widgets (also referred to as "layouting widgets") to interface with an arbitrary number of #GtkCellRenderers and interact with the user for a given #GtkTreeModel row.
The cell area handles events, focus navigation, drawing and size requests and allocations for a given row of data.
Usually users dont have to interact with the #GtkCellArea directly unless they are implementing a cell-layouting widget themselves.
Requesting area sizes
As outlined in [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management], GTK+ uses a height-for-width geometry management system to compute the sizes of widgets and user interfaces. #GtkCellArea uses the same semantics to calculate the size of an area for an arbitrary number of #GtkTreeModel rows.
When requesting the size of a cell area one needs to calculate the size for a handful of rows, and this will be done differently by different layouting widgets. For instance a #GtkTreeViewColumn always lines up the areas from top to bottom while a #GtkIconView on the other hand might enforce that all areas received the same width and wrap the areas around, requesting height for more cell areas when allocated less width.
It’s also important for areas to maintain some cell alignments with areas rendered for adjacent rows (cells can appear “columnized” inside an area even when the size of cells are different in each row). For this reason the #GtkCellArea uses a #GtkCellAreaContext object to store the alignments and sizes along the way (as well as the overall largest minimum and natural size for all the rows which have been calculated with the said context).
The #GtkCellAreaContext is an opaque object specific to the #GtkCellArea which created it (see [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.createContext]). The owning cell-layouting widget can create as many contexts as it wishes to calculate sizes of rows which should receive the same size in at least one orientation (horizontally or vertically), However, it’s important that the same #GtkCellAreaContext which was used to request the sizes for a given #GtkTreeModel row be used when rendering or processing events for that row.
In order to request the width of all the rows at the root level of a #GtkTreeModel one would do the following:
GtkTreeIter iter;
gint minimum_width;
gint natural_width;
valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter);
while (valid)
{
gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width (area, context, widget, NULL, NULL);
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter);
}
gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width (context, &minimum_width, &natural_width);Note that in this example it’s not important to observe the returned minimum and natural width of the area for each row unless the cell-layouting object is actually interested in the widths of individual rows. The overall width is however stored in the accompanying #GtkCellAreaContext object and can be consulted at any time.
This can be useful since #GtkCellLayout widgets usually have to support requesting and rendering rows in treemodels with an exceedingly large amount of rows. The #GtkCellLayout widget in that case would calculate the required width of the rows in an idle or timeout source (see [glib.global.timeoutAdd]) and when the widget is requested its actual width in #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_width() it can simply consult the width accumulated so far in the #GtkCellAreaContext object.
A simple example where rows are rendered from top to bottom and take up the full width of the layouting widget would look like:
static void
foo_get_preferred_width (GtkWidget *widget,
gint *minimum_size,
gint *natural_size)
{
Foo *foo = FOO (widget);
FooPrivate *priv = foo->priv;
foo_ensure_at_least_one_handfull_of_rows_have_been_requested (foo);
gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width (priv->context, minimum_size, natural_size);
}In the above example the Foo widget has to make sure that some row sizes have been calculated (the amount of rows that Foo judged was appropriate to request space for in a single timeout iteration) before simply returning the amount of space required by the area via the #GtkCellAreaContext.
Requesting the height for width (or width for height) of an area is a similar task except in this case the #GtkCellAreaContext does not store the data (actually, it does not know how much space the layouting widget plans to allocate it for every row. It’s up to the layouting widget to render each row of data with the appropriate height and width which was requested by the #GtkCellArea).
In order to request the height for width of all the rows at the root level of a #GtkTreeModel one would do the following:
GtkTreeIter iter;
gint minimum_height;
gint natural_height;
gint full_minimum_height = 0;
gint full_natural_height = 0;
valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter);
while (valid)
{
gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width (area, context, widget,
width, &minimum_height, &natural_height);
if (width_is_for_allocation)
cache_row_height (&iter, minimum_height, natural_height);
full_minimum_height += minimum_height;
full_natural_height += natural_height;
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter);
}Note that in the above example we would need to cache the heights returned for each row so that we would know what sizes to render the areas for each row. However we would only want to really cache the heights if the request is intended for the layouting widgets real allocation.
In some cases the layouting widget is requested the height for an arbitrary for_width, this is a special case for layouting widgets who need to request size for tens of thousands of rows. For this case it’s only important that the layouting widget calculate one reasonably sized chunk of rows and return that height synchronously. The reasoning here is that any layouting widget is at least capable of synchronously calculating enough height to fill the screen height (or scrolled window height) in response to a single call to #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height_for_width(). Returning a perfect height for width that is larger than the screen area is inconsequential since after the layouting receives an allocation from a scrolled window it simply continues to drive the scrollbar values while more and more height is required for the row heights that are calculated in the background.
Rendering Areas
Once area sizes have been aquired at least for the rows in the visible area of the layouting widget they can be rendered at #GtkWidgetClass.draw() time.
A crude example of how to render all the rows at the root level runs as follows:
GtkAllocation allocation;
GdkRectangle cell_area = { 0, };
GtkTreeIter iter;
gint minimum_width;
gint natural_width;
gtk_widget_get_allocation (widget, &allocation);
cell_area.width = allocation.width;
valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter);
while (valid)
{
cell_area.height = get_cached_height_for_row (&iter);
gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
gtk_cell_area_render (area, context, widget, cr,
&cell_area, &cell_area, state_flags, FALSE);
cell_area.y += cell_area.height;
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter);
}Note that the cached height in this example really depends on how the layouting widget works. The layouting widget might decide to give every row its minimum or natural height or, if the model content is expected to fit inside the layouting widget without scrolling, it would make sense to calculate the allocation for each row at #GtkWidget::size-allocate time using [gtk.global.distributeNaturalAllocation].
Handling Events and Driving Keyboard Focus
Passing events to the area is as simple as handling events on any normal widget and then passing them to the [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.event] API as they come in. Usually #GtkCellArea is only interested in button events, however some customized derived areas can be implemented who are interested in handling other events. Handling an event can trigger the #GtkCellArea::focus-changed signal to fire; as well as #GtkCellArea::add-editable in the case that an editable cell was clicked and needs to start editing. You can call [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.stopEditing] at any time to cancel any cell editing that is currently in progress.
The #GtkCellArea drives keyboard focus from cell to cell in a way similar to #GtkWidget. For layouting widgets that support giving focus to cells it’s important to remember to pass [gtk.types.CellRendererState.Focused] to the area functions for the row that has focus and to tell the area to paint the focus at render time.
Layouting widgets that accept focus on cells should implement the #GtkWidgetClass.focus() virtual method. The layouting widget is always responsible for knowing where #GtkTreeModel rows are rendered inside the widget, so at #GtkWidgetClass.focus() time the layouting widget should use the #GtkCellArea methods to navigate focus inside the area and then observe the GtkDirectionType to pass the focus to adjacent rows and areas.
A basic example of how the #GtkWidgetClass.focus() virtual method should be implemented:
static gboolean
foo_focus (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkDirectionType direction)
{
Foo *foo = FOO (widget);
FooPrivate *priv = foo->priv;
gint focus_row;
gboolean have_focus = FALSE;
focus_row = priv->focus_row;
if (!gtk_widget_has_focus (widget))
gtk_widget_grab_focus (widget);
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, priv->focus_row);
while (valid)
{
gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (priv->area, priv->model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
if (gtk_cell_area_focus (priv->area, direction))
{
priv->focus_row = focus_row;
have_focus = TRUE;
break;
}
else
{
if (direction == GTK_DIR_RIGHT ||
direction == GTK_DIR_LEFT)
break;
else if (direction == GTK_DIR_UP ||
direction == GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD)
{
if (focus_row == 0)
break;
else
{
focus_row--;
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, focus_row);
}
}
else
{
if (focus_row == last_row)
break;
else
{
focus_row++;
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (priv->model, &iter);
}
}
}
}
return have_focus;
}Note that the layouting widget is responsible for matching the GtkDirectionType values to the way it lays out its cells.
Cell Properties
The #GtkCellArea introduces cell properties for #GtkCellRenderers in very much the same way that #GtkContainer introduces [child properties][child-properties] for #GtkWidgets. This provides some general interfaces for defining the relationship cell areas have with their cells. For instance in a #GtkCellAreaBox a cell might “expand” and receive extra space when the area is allocated more than its full natural request, or a cell might be configured to “align” with adjacent rows which were requested and rendered with the same #GtkCellAreaContext.
Use [gtk.cell_area_class.CellAreaClass.installCellProperty] to install cell properties for a cell area class and [gtk.cell_area_class.CellAreaClass.findCellProperty] or [gtk.cell_area_class.CellAreaClass.listCellProperties] to get information about existing cell properties.
To set the value of a cell property, use [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellSetProperty], [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellSet] or [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellSetValist]. To obtain the value of a cell property, use [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellGetProperty], [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellGet] or [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellGetValist].
The #GtkCellAreaBox renders cell renderers into a row or a column depending on its #GtkOrientation.
GtkCellAreaBox uses a notion of packing. Packing refers to adding cell renderers with reference to a particular position in a #GtkCellAreaBox. There are two reference positions: the start and the end of the box. When the #GtkCellAreaBox is oriented in the [gtk.types.Orientation.Vertical] orientation, the start is defined as the top of the box and the end is defined as the bottom. In the [gtk.types.Orientation.Horizontal] orientation start is defined as the left side and the end is defined as the right side.
Alignments of #GtkCellRenderers rendered in adjacent rows can be configured by configuring the #GtkCellAreaBox align child cell property with [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.cellSetProperty] or by specifying the "align" argument to [gtk.cell_area_box.CellAreaBox.packStart] and [gtk.cell_area_box.CellAreaBox.packEnd].
GtkCellAreaClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GInitiallyUnownedClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellRenderer * renderer) addadds a #GtkCellRenderer to the area.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellRenderer * renderer) removeremoves a #GtkCellRenderer from the area.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellCallback callback, void * callbackData) foreach_calls the #GtkCellCallback function on every #GtkCellRenderer in the area with the provided user data until the callback returns true.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, GtkCellAllocCallback callback, void * callbackData) foreachAllocCalls the #GtkCellAllocCallback function on every #GtkCellRenderer in the area with the allocated area for the cell and the provided user data until the callback returns true.int function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, GdkEvent * event, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags) eventHandle an event in the area, this is generally used to activate a cell at the event location for button events but can also be used to generically pass events to #GtkWidgets drawn onto the area.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, cairo_t * cr, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags, gboolean paintFocus) renderActually render the area’s cells to the specified rectangle, @background_area should be correctly distributed to the cells corresponding background areas.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, gboolean isExpander, gboolean isExpanded) applyAttributesApply the cell attributes to the cells. This is implemented as a signal and generally #GtkCellArea subclasses don't need to implement it since it is handled by the base class.GtkCellAreaContext * function(GtkCellArea * area) createContextCreates and returns a class specific #GtkCellAreaContext to store cell alignment and allocation details for a said #GtkCellArea class.GtkCellAreaContext * function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context) copyContextCreates a new #GtkCellAreaContext in the same state as the passed @context with any cell alignment data and allocations intact.GtkSizeRequestMode function(GtkCellArea * area) getRequestModeThis allows an area to tell its layouting widget whether it prefers to be allocated in [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.HeightForWidth] or [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.WidthForHeight] mode.void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthCalculates the minimum and natural width of the areas cells with the current attributes applied while considering the particular layouting details of the said #GtkCellArea. While requests are perfo...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, int width, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightForWidthCalculates the minimum and natural height for the area if the passed @context would be allocated the given width. When implementing this virtual method it is safe to assume that @context has alread...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightCalculates the minimum and natural height of the areas cells with the current attributes applied. Essentially this is the same as #GtkCellAreaClass.getpreferredwidth() only for areas that are being...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, int height, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthForHeightCalculates the minimum and natural width for the area if the passed @context would be allocated the given height. The same as #GtkCellAreaClass.getpreferredheightforwidth() only for handling reques...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellRenderer * renderer, uint propertyId, const(GValue) * value, GParamSpec * pspec) setCellPropertyThis should be implemented to handle changes in child cell properties for a given #GtkCellRenderer that were previously installed on the #GtkCellAreaClass with [gtk.cellareaclass.CellAreaClass.inst...void function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellRenderer * renderer, uint propertyId, GValue * value, GParamSpec * pspec) getCellPropertyThis should be implemented to report the values of child cell properties for a given child #GtkCellRenderer.gboolean function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkDirectionType direction) focusThis virtual method should be implemented to navigate focus from cell to cell inside the #GtkCellArea. The #GtkCellArea should move focus from cell to cell inside the area and return false if focus...gboolean function(GtkCellArea * area) isActivatableReturns whether the #GtkCellArea can respond to #GtkCellAreaClass.activate(), usually this does not need to be implemented since the base class takes care of this however it can be enhanced if the ...gboolean function(GtkCellArea * area, GtkCellAreaContext * context, GtkWidget * widget, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags, gboolean editOnly) activateThis is called when the layouting widget rendering the #GtkCellArea activates the focus cell (see [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.getFocusCell]).void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8The #GtkCellAreaContext object is created by a given #GtkCellArea implementation via its #GtkCellAreaClass.create_context() virtual method and is used to store cell sizes and alignments for a series of #GtkTreeModel rows that are requested and rendered in the same context.
#GtkCellLayout widgets can create any number of contexts in which to request and render groups of data rows. However, it’s important that the same context which was used to request sizes for a given #GtkTreeModel row also be used for the same row when calling other #GtkCellArea APIs such as [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.render] and [gtk.cell_area.CellArea.event].
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCellAreaContext * context, int width, int height) allocateThis tells the context that an allocation width or height (or both) have been decided for a group of rows. The context should store any allocations for internally aligned cells at this point so tha...void function(GtkCellAreaContext * context) resetClear any previously stored information about requested and allocated sizes for the context.void function(GtkCellAreaContext * context, int width, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightForWidthReturns the aligned height for the given width that context must store while collecting sizes for it’s rows.void function(GtkCellAreaContext * context, int height, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthForHeightReturns the aligned width for the given height that context must store while collecting sizes for it’s rows.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6The #GtkCellEditable interface must be implemented for widgets to be usable to edit the contents of a #GtkTreeView cell. It provides a way to specify how temporary widgets should be configured for editing, get the new value, etc.
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkCellEditable * cellEditable) editingDoneSignal is a sign for the cell renderer to update its value from the cell_editable.void function(GtkCellEditable * cellEditable) removeWidgetSignal is meant to indicate that the cell is finished editing, and the widget may now be destroyed.void function(GtkCellEditable * cellEditable, GdkEvent * event) startEditingBegins editing on a cell_editable.#GtkCellLayout is an interface to be implemented by all objects which want to provide a #GtkTreeViewColumn like API for packing cells, setting attributes and data funcs.
One of the notable features provided by implementations of GtkCellLayout are attributes. Attributes let you set the properties in flexible ways. They can just be set to constant values like regular properties. But they can also be mapped to a column of the underlying tree model with [gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout.setAttributes], which means that the value of the attribute can change from cell to cell as they are rendered by the cell renderer. Finally, it is possible to specify a function with [gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout.setCellDataFunc] that is called to determine the value of the attribute for each cell that is rendered.
GtkCellLayouts as GtkBuildable
Implementations of GtkCellLayout which also implement the GtkBuildable interface (#GtkCellView, #GtkIconView, #GtkComboBox, #GtkEntryCompletion, #GtkTreeViewColumn) accept GtkCellRenderer objects as <child> elements in UI definitions. They support a custom <attributes> element for their children, which can contain multiple <attribute> elements. Each <attribute> element has a name attribute which specifies a property of the cell renderer; the content of the element is the attribute value.
This is an example of a UI definition fragment specifying attributes:
<object class="GtkCellView">
<child>
<object class="GtkCellRendererText"/>
<attributes>
<attribute name="text">0</attribute>
</attributes>
</child>
</object>Furthermore for implementations of GtkCellLayout that use a #GtkCellArea to lay out cells (all GtkCellLayouts in GTK+ use a GtkCellArea) [cell properties][cell-properties] can also be defined in the format by specifying the custom <cell-packing> attribute which can contain multiple <property> elements defined in the normal way.
Here is a UI definition fragment specifying cell properties:
<object class="GtkTreeViewColumn">
<child>
<object class="GtkCellRendererText"/>
<cell-packing>
<property name="align">True</property>
<property name="expand">False</property>
</cell-packing>
</child>
</object>Subclassing GtkCellLayout implementations
When subclassing a widget that implements #GtkCellLayout like #GtkIconView or #GtkComboBox, there are some considerations related to the fact that these widgets internally use a #GtkCellArea. The cell area is exposed as a construct-only property by these widgets. This means that it is possible to e.g. do
combo = g_object_new (GTK_TYPE_COMBO_BOX, "cell-area", my_cell_area, NULL);to use a custom cell area with a combo box. But construct properties are only initialized after instance init() functions have run, which means that using functions which rely on the existence of the cell area in your subclass’ init() function will cause the default cell area to be instantiated. In this case, a provided construct property value will be ignored (with a warning, to alert you to the problem).
static void
my_combo_box_init (MyComboBox *b)
{
GtkCellRenderer *cell;
cell = gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_new ();
// The following call causes the default cell area for combo boxes,
// a GtkCellAreaBox, to be instantiated
gtk_cell_layout_pack_start (GTK_CELL_LAYOUT (b), cell, FALSE);
...
}
GtkWidget *
my_combo_box_new (GtkCellArea *area)
{
// This call is going to cause a warning about area being ignored
return g_object_new (MY_TYPE_COMBO_BOX, "cell-area", area, NULL);
}If supporting alternative cell areas with your derived widget is not important, then this does not have to concern you. If you want to support alternative cell areas, you can do so by moving the problematic calls out of init() and into a constructor() for your class.
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, gboolean expand) packStartPacks the cell into the beginning of cell_layout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, gboolean expand) packEndAdds the cell to the end of cell_layout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout) clearUnsets all the mappings on all renderers on celllayout and removes all renderers from celllayout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, const(char) * attribute, int column) addAttributeAdds an attribute mapping to the list in cell_layout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkCellLayoutDataFunc func, void * funcData, GDestroyNotify destroy) setCellDataFuncSets the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use for cell_layout.void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell) clearAttributesClears all existing attributes previously set with [gtk.cell_layout.CellLayout.setAttributes].void function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout, GtkCellRenderer * cell, int position) reorderRe-inserts cell at position.GList * function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout) getCellsGet the cell renderers which have been added to cell_layout.GtkCellArea * function(GtkCellLayout * cellLayout) getAreaGet the underlying #GtkCellArea which might be celllayout if called on a #GtkCellArea or might be NULL if no #GtkCellArea is used by celllayout.The #GtkCellRenderer is a base class of a set of objects used for rendering a cell to a #cairo_t. These objects are used primarily by the #GtkTreeView widget, though they aren’t tied to them in any specific way. It is worth noting that #GtkCellRenderer is not a #GtkWidget and cannot be treated as such.
The primary use of a #GtkCellRenderer is for drawing a certain graphical elements on a #cairo_t. Typically, one cell renderer is used to draw many cells on the screen. To this extent, it isn’t expected that a CellRenderer keep any permanent state around. Instead, any state is set just prior to use using #GObjects property system. Then, the cell is measured using [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer.getSize]. Finally, the cell is rendered in the correct location using [gtk.cell_renderer.CellRenderer.render].
There are a number of rules that must be followed when writing a new #GtkCellRenderer. First and foremost, it’s important that a certain set of properties will always yield a cell renderer of the same size, barring a #GtkStyle change. The #GtkCellRenderer also has a number of generic properties that are expected to be honored by all children.
Beyond merely rendering a cell, cell renderers can optionally provide active user interface elements. A cell renderer can be “activatable” like #GtkCellRendererToggle, which toggles when it gets activated by a mouse click, or it can be “editable” like #GtkCellRendererText, which allows the user to edit the text using a widget implementing the #GtkCellEditable interface, e.g. #GtkEntry. To make a cell renderer activatable or editable, you have to implement the #GtkCellRendererClass.activate or #GtkCellRendererClass.start_editing virtual functions, respectively.
Many properties of #GtkCellRenderer and its subclasses have a corresponding “set” property, e.g. “cell-background-set” corresponds to “cell-background”. These “set” properties reflect whether a property has been set or not. You should not set them independently.
#GtkCellRendererAccel displays a keyboard accelerator (i.e. a key combination like Control + a). If the cell renderer is editable, the accelerator can be changed by simply typing the new combination.
The #GtkCellRendererAccel cell renderer was added in GTK+ 2.10.
GtkCellRendererTextClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCellRendererAccel * accel, const(char) * pathString, uint accelKey, GdkModifierType accelMods, uint hardwareKeycode) accelEditedvoid function(GtkCellRendererAccel * accel, const(char) * pathString) accelClearedvoid function() GtkReserved0void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GInitiallyUnownedClass parentClassGtkSizeRequestMode function(GtkCellRenderer * cell) getRequestModeCalled to gets whether the cell renderer prefers a height-for-width layout or a width-for-height layout.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumSize, int * naturalSize) getPreferredWidthCalled to get a renderer’s natural width.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, int width, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightForWidthCalled to get a renderer’s natural height for width.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumSize, int * naturalSize) getPreferredHeightCalled to get a renderer’s natural height.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, int height, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthForHeightCalled to get a renderer’s natural width for height.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, GtkCellRendererState flags, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GdkRectangle * alignedArea) getAlignedAreaCalled to get the aligned area used by @cell inside @cell_area.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkWidget * widget, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, int * xOffset, int * yOffset, int * width, int * height) getSizeCalled to get the width and height needed to render the cell. Deprecated: 3.0.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, cairo_t * cr, GtkWidget * widget, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags) renderCalled to render the content of the #GtkCellRenderer.gboolean function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GdkEvent * event, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * path, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags) activateCalled to activate the content of the #GtkCellRenderer.GtkCellEditable * function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GdkEvent * event, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * path, const(GdkRectangle) * backgroundArea, const(GdkRectangle) * cellArea, GtkCellRendererState flags) startEditingCalled to initiate editing the content of the #GtkCellRenderer.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell) editingCanceledSignal gets emitted when the user cancels the process of editing a cell.void function(GtkCellRenderer * cell, GtkCellEditable * editable, const(char) * path) editingStartedSignal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.GtkCellRendererClassPrivate * privvoid function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkCellRendererCombo renders text in a cell like #GtkCellRendererText from which it is derived. But while #GtkCellRendererText offers a simple entry to edit the text, #GtkCellRendererCombo offers a #GtkComboBox widget to edit the text. The values to display in the combo box are taken from the tree model specified in the #GtkCellRendererCombo:model property.
The combo cell renderer takes care of adding a text cell renderer to the combo box and sets it to display the column specified by its #GtkCellRendererCombo:text-column property. Further properties of the combo box can be set in a handler for the #GtkCellRenderer::editing-started signal.
The #GtkCellRendererCombo cell renderer was added in GTK+ 2.6.
GtkCellRendererTextClass parentvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkCellRendererPixbuf can be used to render an image in a cell. It allows to render either a given #GdkPixbuf (set via the #GtkCellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf property) or a named icon (set via the #GtkCellRendererPixbuf:icon-name property).
To support the tree view, #GtkCellRendererPixbuf also supports rendering two alternative pixbufs, when the #GtkCellRenderer:is-expander property is true. If the #GtkCellRenderer:is-expanded property is true and the #GtkCellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf-expander-open property is set to a pixbuf, it renders that pixbuf, if the #GtkCellRenderer:is-expanded property is false and the #GtkCellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf-expander-closed property is set to a pixbuf, it renders that one.
GtkCellRendererClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkCellRendererProgress renders a numeric value as a progress par in a cell. Additionally, it can display a text on top of the progress bar.
The #GtkCellRendererProgress cell renderer was added in GTK+ 2.6.
GtkCellRendererClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkCellRendererSpin renders text in a cell like #GtkCellRendererText from which it is derived. But while #GtkCellRendererText offers a simple entry to edit the text, #GtkCellRendererSpin offers a #GtkSpinButton widget. Of course, that means that the text has to be parseable as a floating point number.
The range of the spinbutton is taken from the adjustment property of the cell renderer, which can be set explicitly or mapped to a column in the tree model, like all properties of cell renders. #GtkCellRendererSpin also has properties for the #GtkCellRendererSpin:climb-rate and the number of #GtkCellRendererSpin:digits to display. Other #GtkSpinButton properties can be set in a handler for the #GtkCellRenderer::editing-started signal.
The #GtkCellRendererSpin cell renderer was added in GTK+ 2.10.
GtkCellRendererTextClass parentvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkCellRendererSpinner renders a spinning animation in a cell, very similar to #GtkSpinner. It can often be used as an alternative to a #GtkCellRendererProgress for displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.
To start the animation in a cell, set the #GtkCellRendererSpinner:active property to true and increment the #GtkCellRendererSpinner:pulse property at regular intervals. The usual way to set the cell renderer properties for each cell is to bind them to columns in your tree model using e.g. [gtk.tree_view_column.TreeViewColumn.addAttribute].
GtkCellRendererClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkCellRendererText renders a given text in its cell, using the font, color and style information provided by its properties. The text will be ellipsized if it is too long and the #GtkCellRendererText:ellipsize property allows it.
If the #GtkCellRenderer:mode is [gtk.types.CellRendererMode.Editable], the #GtkCellRendererText allows to edit its text using an entry.
GtkCellRendererClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCellRendererText * cellRendererText, const(char) * path, const(char) * newText) editedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkCellRendererToggle renders a toggle button in a cell. The button is drawn as a radio or a checkbutton, depending on the #GtkCellRendererToggle:radio property. When activated, it emits the #GtkCellRendererToggle::toggled signal.
GtkCellRendererClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCellRendererToggle * cellRendererToggle, const(char) * path) toggledvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkCellView displays a single row of a #GtkTreeModel using a #GtkCellArea and #GtkCellAreaContext. A #GtkCellAreaContext can be provided to the #GtkCellView at construction time in order to keep the cellview in context of a group of cell views, this ensures that the renderers displayed will be properly aligned with eachother (like the aligned cells in the menus of #GtkComboBox).
#GtkCellView is #GtkOrientable in order to decide in which orientation the underlying #GtkCellAreaContext should be allocated. Taking the #GtkComboBox menu as an example, cellviews should be oriented horizontally if the menus are listed top-to-bottom and thus all share the same width but may have separate individual heights (left-to-right menus should be allocated vertically since they all share the same height but may have variable widths).
CSS nodes
GtkCellView has a single CSS node with name cellview.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkCheckButton places a discrete #GtkToggleButton next to a widget, (usually a #GtkLabel). See the section on #GtkToggleButton widgets for more information about toggle/check buttons.
The important signal ( #GtkToggleButton::toggled ) is also inherited from #GtkToggleButton.
CSS nodes
checkbutton
├── check
╰── <child>A GtkCheckButton with indicator (see [gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.setMode]) has a main CSS node with name checkbutton and a subnode with name check.
button.check
├── check
╰── <child>A GtkCheckButton without indicator changes the name of its main node to button and adds a .check style class to it. The subnode is invisible in this case.
GtkToggleButton toggleButtonGtkToggleButtonClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCheckButton * checkButton, cairo_t * cr) drawIndicatorvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkCheckMenuItem is a menu item that maintains the state of a boolean value in addition to a #GtkMenuItem usual role in activating application code.
A check box indicating the state of the boolean value is displayed at the left side of the #GtkMenuItem. Activating the #GtkMenuItem toggles the value.
CSS nodes
menuitem
├── check.left
╰── <child>GtkCheckMenuItem has a main CSS node with name menuitem, and a subnode with name check, which gets the .left or .right style class.
GtkMenuItemAccessibleClass parentClassGtkMenuItemClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkCheckMenuItem * checkMenuItem) toggledSignal emitted when the state of the check box is changed.void function(GtkCheckMenuItem * checkMenuItem, cairo_t * cr) drawIndicatorCalled to draw the check indicator.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkClipboard object represents a clipboard of data shared between different processes or between different widgets in the same process. Each clipboard is identified by a name encoded as a #GdkAtom. (Conversion to and from strings can be done with [gdk.atom.Atom.intern] and [gdk.atom.Atom.name].) The default clipboard corresponds to the “CLIPBOARD” atom; another commonly used clipboard is the “PRIMARY” clipboard, which, in X, traditionally contains the currently selected text.
To support having a number of different formats on the clipboard at the same time, the clipboard mechanism allows providing callbacks instead of the actual data. When you set the contents of the clipboard, you can either supply the data directly (via functions like [gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.setText]), or you can supply a callback to be called at a later time when the data is needed (via [gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.setWithData] or [gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.setWithOwner].) Providing a callback also avoids having to make copies of the data when it is not needed.
[gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.setWithData] and [gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.setWithOwner] are quite similar; the choice between the two depends mostly on which is more convenient in a particular situation. The former is most useful when you want to have a blob of data with callbacks to convert it into the various data types that you advertise. When the @clear_func you provided is called, you simply free the data blob. The latter is more useful when the contents of clipboard reflect the internal state of a #GObject (As an example, for the PRIMARY clipboard, when an entry widget provides the clipboard’s contents the contents are simply the text within the selected region.) If the contents change, the entry widget can call [gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.setWithOwner] to update the timestamp for clipboard ownership, without having to worry about @clear_func being called.
Requesting the data from the clipboard is essentially asynchronous. If the contents of the clipboard are provided within the same process, then a direct function call will be made to retrieve the data, but if they are provided by another process, then the data needs to be retrieved from the other process, which may take some time. To avoid blocking the user interface, the call to request the selection, [gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.requestContents] takes a callback that will be called when the contents are received (or when the request fails.) If you don’t want to deal with providing a separate callback, you can also use [gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.waitForContents]. What this does is run the GLib main loop recursively waiting for the contents. This can simplify the code flow, but you still have to be aware that other callbacks in your program can be called while this recursive mainloop is running.
Along with the functions to get the clipboard contents as an arbitrary data chunk, there are also functions to retrieve it as text, [gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.requestText] and [gtk.clipboard.Clipboard.waitForText]. These functions take care of determining which formats are advertised by the clipboard provider, asking for the clipboard in the best available format and converting the results into the UTF-8 encoding. (The standard form for representing strings in GTK+.)
The #GtkColorButton is a button which displays the currently selected color and allows to open a color selection dialog to change the color. It is suitable widget for selecting a color in a preference dialog.
CSS nodes
GtkColorButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain #GtkButton, it gets the .color style class.
GtkButtonClass parentClassvoid function(GtkColorButton * cp) colorSetvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkColorChooser is an interface that is implemented by widgets for choosing colors. Depending on the situation, colors may be allowed to have alpha (translucency).
In GTK+, the main widgets that implement this interface are #GtkColorChooserWidget, #GtkColorChooserDialog and #GtkColorButton.
The #GtkColorChooserDialog widget is a dialog for choosing a color. It implements the #GtkColorChooser interface.
GtkDialogClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GTypeInterface baseInterfacevoid function(GtkColorChooser * chooser, GdkRGBA * color) getRgbavoid function(GtkColorChooser * chooser, const(GdkRGBA) * color) setRgbavoid function(GtkColorChooser * chooser, GtkOrientation orientation, int colorsPerLine, int nColors, GdkRGBA * colors) addPalettevoid function(GtkColorChooser * chooser, const(GdkRGBA) * color) colorActivatedvoid *[12] paddingThe #GtkColorChooserWidget widget lets the user select a color. By default, the chooser presents a predefined palette of colors, plus a small number of settable custom colors. It is also possible to select a different color with the single-color editor. To enter the single-color editing mode, use the context menu of any color of the palette, or use the '+' button to add a new custom color.
The chooser automatically remembers the last selection, as well as custom colors.
To change the initially selected color, use [gtk.color_chooser.ColorChooser.setRgba]. To get the selected color use [gtk.color_chooser.ColorChooser.getRgba].
The #GtkColorChooserWidget is used in the #GtkColorChooserDialog to provide a dialog for selecting colors.
CSS names
GtkColorChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name colorchooser.
GtkBoxClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8GtkBoxClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkColorSelection * colorSelection) colorChangedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkDialogClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A GtkComboBox is a widget that allows the user to choose from a list of valid choices. The GtkComboBox displays the selected choice. When activated, the GtkComboBox displays a popup which allows the user to make a new choice. The style in which the selected value is displayed, and the style of the popup is determined by the current theme. It may be similar to a Windows-style combo box.
The GtkComboBox uses the model-view pattern; the list of valid choices is specified in the form of a tree model, and the display of the choices can be adapted to the data in the model by using cell renderers, as you would in a tree view. This is possible since GtkComboBox implements the #GtkCellLayout interface. The tree model holding the valid choices is not restricted to a flat list, it can be a real tree, and the popup will reflect the tree structure.
To allow the user to enter values not in the model, the “has-entry” property allows the GtkComboBox to contain a #GtkEntry. This entry can be accessed by calling [gtk.bin.Bin.getChild] on the combo box.
For a simple list of textual choices, the model-view API of GtkComboBox can be a bit overwhelming. In this case, #GtkComboBoxText offers a simple alternative. Both GtkComboBox and #GtkComboBoxText can contain an entry.
CSS nodes
combobox
├── box.linked
│ ╰── button.combo
│ ╰── box
│ ├── cellview
│ ╰── arrow
╰── window.popupA normal combobox contains a box with the .linked class, a button with the .combo class and inside those buttons, there are a cellview and an arrow.
combobox
├── box.linked
│ ├── entry.combo
│ ╰── button.combo
│ ╰── box
│ ╰── arrow
╰── window.popupA GtkComboBox with an entry has a single CSS node with name combobox. It contains a box with the .linked class. That box contains an entry and a button, both with the .combo class added. The button also contains another node with name arrow.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkComboBox * comboBox) changedSignal is emitted when the active item is changed.char * function(GtkComboBox * comboBox, const(char) * path) formatEntryTextSignal which allows you to change how the text displayed in a combo box’s entry is displayed.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3A GtkComboBoxText is a simple variant of #GtkComboBox that hides the model-view complexity for simple text-only use cases.
To create a GtkComboBoxText, use [gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.new_] or [gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.newWithEntry].
You can add items to a GtkComboBoxText with [gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.appendText], [gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.insertText] or [gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.prependText] and remove options with [gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.remove].
If the GtkComboBoxText contains an entry (via the “has-entry” property), its contents can be retrieved using [gtk.combo_box_text.ComboBoxText.getActiveText]. The entry itself can be accessed by calling [gtk.bin.Bin.getChild] on the combo box.
You should not call [gtk.combo_box.ComboBox.setModel] or attempt to pack more cells into this combo box via its GtkCellLayout interface.
GtkComboBoxText as GtkBuildable
The GtkComboBoxText implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding items directly using the <items> element and specifying <item> elements for each item. Each <item> element can specify the “id” corresponding to the appended text and also supports the regular translation attributes “translatable”, “context” and “comments”.
Here is a UI definition fragment specifying GtkComboBoxText items:
<object class="GtkComboBoxText">
<items>
<item translatable="yes" id="factory">Factory</item>
<item translatable="yes" id="home">Home</item>
<item translatable="yes" id="subway">Subway</item>
</items>
</object>CSS nodes
combobox
╰── box.linked
├── entry.combo
├── button.combo
╰── window.popupGtkComboBoxText has a single CSS node with name combobox. It adds the style class .combo to the main CSS nodes of its entry and button children, and the .linked class to the node of its internal box.
GtkComboBoxClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A GTK+ user interface is constructed by nesting widgets inside widgets. Container widgets are the inner nodes in the resulting tree of widgets: they contain other widgets. So, for example, you might have a #GtkWindow containing a #GtkFrame containing a #GtkLabel. If you wanted an image instead of a textual label inside the frame, you might replace the #GtkLabel widget with a #GtkImage widget.
There are two major kinds of container widgets in GTK+. Both are subclasses of the abstract GtkContainer base class.
The first type of container widget has a single child widget and derives from #GtkBin. These containers are decorators, which add some kind of functionality to the child. For example, a #GtkButton makes its child into a clickable button; a #GtkFrame draws a frame around its child and a #GtkWindow places its child widget inside a top-level window.
The second type of container can have more than one child; its purpose is to manage layout. This means that these containers assign sizes and positions to their children. For example, a #GtkHBox arranges its children in a horizontal row, and a #GtkGrid arranges the widgets it contains in a two-dimensional grid.
For implementations of #GtkContainer the virtual method #GtkContainerClass.forall() is always required, since it's used for drawing and other internal operations on the children. If the #GtkContainer implementation expect to have non internal children it's needed to implement both #GtkContainerClass.add() and #GtkContainerClass.remove(). If the GtkContainer implementation has internal children, they should be added with [gtk.widget.Widget.setParent] on init() and removed with [gtk.widget.Widget.unparent] in the #GtkWidgetClass.destroy() implementation. See more about implementing custom widgets at https://wiki.gnome.org/HowDoI/CustomWidgets
Height for width geometry management
GTK+ uses a height-for-width (and width-for-height) geometry management system. Height-for-width means that a widget can change how much vertical space it needs, depending on the amount of horizontal space that it is given (and similar for width-for-height).
There are some things to keep in mind when implementing container widgets that make use of GTK+’s height for width geometry management system. First, it’s important to note that a container must prioritize one of its dimensions, that is to say that a widget or container can only have a #GtkSizeRequestMode that is [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.HeightForWidth] or [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.WidthForHeight]. However, every widget and container must be able to respond to the APIs for both dimensions, i.e. even if a widget has a request mode that is height-for-width, it is possible that its parent will request its sizes using the width-for-height APIs.
To ensure that everything works properly, here are some guidelines to follow when implementing height-for-width (or width-for-height) containers.
Each request mode involves 2 virtual methods. Height-for-width apis run through [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredWidth] and then through [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredHeightForWidth]. When handling requests in the opposite #GtkSizeRequestMode it is important that every widget request at least enough space to display all of its content at all times.
When [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredHeight] is called on a container that is height-for-width, the container must return the height for its minimum width. This is easily achieved by simply calling the reverse apis implemented for itself as follows:
static void
foo_container_get_preferred_height (GtkWidget *widget,
gint *min_height,
gint *nat_height)
{
if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
{
gint min_width;
GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
&min_width,
NULL);
GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_height_for_width
(widget,
min_width,
min_height,
nat_height);
}
else
{
... many containers support both request modes, execute the
real width-for-height request here by returning the
collective heights of all widgets that are stacked
vertically (or whatever is appropriate for this container)
...
}
}Similarly, when [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredWidthForHeight] is called for a container or widget that is height-for-width, it then only needs to return the base minimum width like so:
static void
foo_container_get_preferred_width_for_height (GtkWidget *widget,
gint for_height,
gint *min_width,
gint *nat_width)
{
if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
{
GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
min_width,
nat_width);
}
else
{
... execute the real width-for-height request here based on
the required width of the children collectively if the
container were to be allocated the said height ...
}
}Height for width requests are generally implemented in terms of a virtual allocation of widgets in the input orientation. Assuming an height-for-width request mode, a container would implement the get_preferred_height_for_width() virtual function by first calling [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredWidth] for each of its children.
For each potential group of children that are lined up horizontally, the values returned by [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredWidth] should be collected in an array of #GtkRequestedSize structures. Any child spacing should be removed from the input @for_width and then the collective size should be allocated using the [gtk.global.distributeNaturalAllocation] convenience function.
The container will then move on to request the preferred height for each child by using [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredHeightForWidth] and using the sizes stored in the #GtkRequestedSize array.
To allocate a height-for-width container, it’s again important to consider that a container must prioritize one dimension over the other. So if a container is a height-for-width container it must first allocate all widgets horizontally using a #GtkRequestedSize array and [gtk.global.distributeNaturalAllocation] and then add any extra space (if and where appropriate) for the widget to expand.
After adding all the expand space, the container assumes it was allocated sufficient height to fit all of its content. At this time, the container must use the total horizontal sizes of each widget to request the height-for-width of each of its children and store the requests in a #GtkRequestedSize array for any widgets that stack vertically (for tabular containers this can be generalized into the heights and widths of rows and columns). The vertical space must then again be distributed using [gtk.global.distributeNaturalAllocation] while this time considering the allocated height of the widget minus any vertical spacing that the container adds. Then vertical expand space should be added where appropriate and available and the container should go on to actually allocating the child widgets.
See [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management] to learn more about implementing height-for-width geometry management for widgets.
Child properties
GtkContainer introduces child properties. These are object properties that are not specific to either the container or the contained widget, but rather to their relation. Typical examples of child properties are the position or pack-type of a widget which is contained in a #GtkBox.
Use [gtk.container_class.ContainerClass.installChildProperty] to install child properties for a container class and [gtk.container_class.ContainerClass.findChildProperty] or [gtk.container_class.ContainerClass.listChildProperties] to get information about existing child properties.
To set the value of a child property, use [gtk.container.Container.childSetProperty], [gtk.container.Container.childSet] or [gtk.container.Container.childSetValist]. To obtain the value of a child property, use [gtk.container.Container.childGetProperty], [gtk.container.Container.childGet] or [gtk.container.Container.childGetValist]. To emit notification about child property changes, use [gtk.widget.Widget.childNotify].
GtkContainer as GtkBuildable
The GtkContainer implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a <packing> element for children, which can contain multiple <property> elements that specify child properties for the child.
Since 2.16, child properties can also be marked as translatable using the same “translatable”, “comments” and “context” attributes that are used for regular properties.
Since 3.16, containers can have a <focus-chain> element containing multiple <widget> elements, one for each child that should be added to the focus chain. The ”name” attribute gives the id of the widget.
An example of these properties in UI definitions:
<object class="GtkBox">
<child>
<object class="GtkEntry" id="entry1"/>
<packing>
<property name="pack-type">start</property>
</packing>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkEntry" id="entry2"/>
</child>
<focus-chain>
<widget name="entry1"/>
<widget name="entry2"/>
</focus-chain>
</object>GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassint function(GtkContainer * container, GtkWidget * widget, void * data) addGtkint function(GtkContainer * container, GtkWidget * widget, void * data) removeGtkGtkCellAccessibleClass parentClassBase class for containers.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkContainer * container, GtkWidget * widget) addSignal emitted when a widget is added to container.void function(GtkContainer * container, GtkWidget * widget) removeSignal emitted when a widget is removed from container.void function(GtkContainer * container) checkResizeSignal emitted when a size recalculation is needed.void function(GtkContainer * container, gboolean includeInternals, GtkCallback callback, void * callbackData) forallInvokes callback on each child of container. The callback handler may remove the child.void function(GtkContainer * container, GtkWidget * child) setFocusChildSets the focused child of container.GType function(GtkContainer * container) childTypeReturns the type of the children supported by the container.char * function(GtkContainer * container, GtkWidget * child) compositeNameGets a widget’s composite name. Deprecated: 3.10.void function(GtkContainer * container, GtkWidget * child, uint propertyId, const(GValue) * value, GParamSpec * pspec) setChildPropertySet a property on a child of container.void function(GtkContainer * container, GtkWidget * child, uint propertyId, GValue * value, GParamSpec * pspec) getChildPropertyGet a property from a child of container.GtkWidgetPath * function(GtkContainer * container, GtkWidget * child) getPathForChildGet path representing entire widget hierarchy from the toplevel down to and including @child.uint HandleBorderWidthvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8GtkCssProvider is an object implementing the #GtkStyleProvider interface. It is able to parse [CSS-like][css-overview] input in order to style widgets.
An application can make GTK+ parse a specific CSS style sheet by calling [gtk.css_provider.CssProvider.loadFromFile] or [gtk.css_provider.CssProvider.loadFromResource] and adding the provider with [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProvider] or [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProviderForScreen].
In addition, certain files will be read when GTK+ is initialized. First, the file $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-3.0/gtk.css is loaded if it exists. Then, GTK+ loads the first existing file among XDG_DATA_HOME/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk.css, $HOME/.themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk.css, $XDG_DATA_DIRS/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk.css and DATADIR/share/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk.css, where THEME is the name of the current theme (see the #GtkSettings:gtk-theme-name setting), DATADIR is the prefix configured when GTK+ was compiled (unless overridden by the GTK_DATA_PREFIX environment variable), and VERSION is the GTK+ version number. If no file is found for the current version, GTK+ tries older versions all the way back to 3.0.
In the same way, GTK+ tries to load a gtk-keys.css file for the current key theme, as defined by #GtkSettings:gtk-key-theme-name.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkCssProvider * provider, GtkCssSection * section, const(GError) * error) parsingErrorvoid function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Defines a part of a CSS document. Because sections are nested into one another, you can use [gtk.css_section.CssSection.getParent] to get the containing region.
Dialog boxes are a convenient way to prompt the user for a small amount of input, e.g. to display a message, ask a question, or anything else that does not require extensive effort on the user’s part.
GTK+ treats a dialog as a window split vertically. The top section is a #GtkVBox, and is where widgets such as a #GtkLabel or a #GtkEntry should be packed. The bottom area is known as the “action area”. This is generally used for packing buttons into the dialog which may perform functions such as cancel, ok, or apply.
#GtkDialog boxes are created with a call to [gtk.dialog.Dialog.new_] or [gtk.dialog.Dialog.newWithButtons]. [gtk.dialog.Dialog.newWithButtons] is recommended; it allows you to set the dialog title, some convenient flags, and add simple buttons.
If “dialog” is a newly created dialog, the two primary areas of the window can be accessed through [gtk.dialog.Dialog.getContentArea] and [gtk.dialog.Dialog.getActionArea], as can be seen from the example below.
A “modal” dialog (that is, one which freezes the rest of the application from user input), can be created by calling [gtk.window.Window.setModal] on the dialog. Use the GTK_WINDOW() macro to cast the widget returned from [gtk.dialog.Dialog.new_] into a #GtkWindow. When using [gtk.dialog.Dialog.newWithButtons] you can also pass the #GTK_DIALOG_MODAL flag to make a dialog modal.
If you add buttons to #GtkDialog using [gtk.dialog.Dialog.newWithButtons], [gtk.dialog.Dialog.addButton], [gtk.dialog.Dialog.addButtons], or [gtk.dialog.Dialog.addActionWidget], clicking the button will emit a signal called #GtkDialog::response with a response ID that you specified. GTK+ will never assign a meaning to positive response IDs; these are entirely user-defined. But for convenience, you can use the response IDs in the #GtkResponseType enumeration (these all have values less than zero). If a dialog receives a delete event, the #GtkDialog::response signal will be emitted with a response ID of #GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT.
If you want to block waiting for a dialog to return before returning control flow to your code, you can call [gtk.dialog.Dialog.run]. This function enters a recursive main loop and waits for the user to respond to the dialog, returning the response ID corresponding to the button the user clicked.
For the simple dialog in the following example, in reality you’d probably use #GtkMessageDialog to save yourself some effort. But you’d need to create the dialog contents manually if you had more than a simple message in the dialog.
An example for simple GtkDialog usage:
// Function to open a dialog box with a message
void
quick_message (GtkWindow *parent, gchar *message)
{
GtkWidget *dialog, *label, *content_area;
GtkDialogFlags flags;
// Create the widgets
flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
dialog = gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons ("Message",
parent,
flags,
_("_OK"),
GTK_RESPONSE_NONE,
NULL);
content_area = gtk_dialog_get_content_area (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
label = gtk_label_new (message);
// Ensure that the dialog box is destroyed when the user responds
g_signal_connect_swapped (dialog,
"response",
G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy),
dialog);
// Add the label, and show everything we’ve added
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (content_area), label);
gtk_widget_show_all (dialog);
}GtkDialog as GtkBuildable
The GtkDialog implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface exposes the @vbox and @action_area as internal children with the names “vbox” and “action_area”.
GtkDialog supports a custom <action-widgets> element, which can contain multiple <action-widget> elements. The “response” attribute specifies a numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget (which should be a child of the dialogs @action_area). To mark a response as default, set the “default“ attribute of the <action-widget> element to true.
GtkDialog supports adding action widgets by specifying “action“ as the “type“ attribute of a <child> element. The widget will be added either to the action area or the headerbar of the dialog, depending on the “use-header-bar“ property. The response id has to be associated with the action widget using the <action-widgets> element.
An example of a #GtkDialog UI definition fragment:
<object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1">
<child type="action">
<object class="GtkButton" id="button_cancel"/>
</child>
<child type="action">
<object class="GtkButton" id="button_ok">
<property name="can-default">True</property>
</object>
</child>
<action-widgets>
<action-widget response="cancel">button_cancel</action-widget>
<action-widget response="ok" default="true">button_ok</action-widget>
</action-widgets>
</object>GtkWindowClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkDialog * dialog, int responseId) responseSignal emitted when an action widget is activated.void function(GtkDialog * dialog) closeSignal emitted when the user uses a keybinding to close the dialog.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkDrawingArea widget is used for creating custom user interface elements. It’s essentially a blank widget; you can draw on it. After creating a drawing area, the application may want to connect to:
- Mouse and button press signals to respond to input from
the user. (Use [gtk.widget.Widget.addEvents] to enable events you wish to receive.)
- The #GtkWidget::realize signal to take any necessary actions
when the widget is instantiated on a particular display. (Create GDK resources in response to this signal.)
- The #GtkWidget::size-allocate signal to take any necessary
actions when the widget changes size.
- The #GtkWidget::draw signal to handle redrawing the
contents of the widget.
The following code portion demonstrates using a drawing area to display a circle in the normal widget foreground color.
Note that GDK automatically clears the exposed area before sending the expose event, and that drawing is implicitly clipped to the exposed area. If you want to have a theme-provided background, you need to call [gtk.global.renderBackground] in your ::draw method.
Simple GtkDrawingArea usage
gboolean
draw_callback (GtkWidget *widget, cairo_t *cr, gpointer data)
{
guint width, height;
GdkRGBA color;
GtkStyleContext *context;
context = gtk_widget_get_style_context (widget);
width = gtk_widget_get_allocated_width (widget);
height = gtk_widget_get_allocated_height (widget);
gtk_render_background (context, cr, 0, 0, width, height);
cairo_arc (cr,
width / 2.0, height / 2.0,
MIN (width, height) / 2.0,
0, 2 * G_PI);
gtk_style_context_get_color (context,
gtk_style_context_get_state (context),
&color);
gdk_cairo_set_source_rgba (cr, &color);
cairo_fill (cr);
return FALSE;
}
[...]
GtkWidget *drawing_area = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
gtk_widget_set_size_request (drawing_area, 100, 100);
g_signal_connect (G_OBJECT (drawing_area), "draw",
G_CALLBACK (draw_callback), NULL);Draw signals are normally delivered when a drawing area first comes onscreen, or when it’s covered by another window and then uncovered. You can also force an expose event by adding to the “damage region” of the drawing area’s window; [gtk.widget.Widget.queueDrawArea] and [gdk.window.Window.invalidateRect] are equally good ways to do this. You’ll then get a draw signal for the invalid region.
The available routines for drawing are documented on the [GDK Drawing Primitives][gdk3-Cairo-Interaction] page and the cairo documentation.
To receive mouse events on a drawing area, you will need to enable them with [gtk.widget.Widget.addEvents]. To receive keyboard events, you will need to set the “can-focus” property on the drawing area, and you should probably draw some user-visible indication that the drawing area is focused. Use [gtk.widget.Widget.hasFocus] in your expose event handler to decide whether to draw the focus indicator. See [gtk.global.renderFocus] for one way to draw focus.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkEditable interface is an interface which should be implemented by text editing widgets, such as #GtkEntry and #GtkSpinButton. It contains functions for generically manipulating an editable widget, a large number of action signals used for key bindings, and several signals that an application can connect to to modify the behavior of a widget.
As an example of the latter usage, by connecting the following handler to #GtkEditable::insert-text, an application can convert all entry into a widget into uppercase.
Forcing entry to uppercase.
#include <ctype.h>;
void
insert_text_handler (GtkEditable *editable,
const gchar *text,
gint length,
gint *position,
gpointer data)
{
gchar *result = g_utf8_strup (text, length);
g_signal_handlers_block_by_func (editable,
(gpointer) insert_text_handler, data);
gtk_editable_insert_text (editable, result, length, position);
g_signal_handlers_unblock_by_func (editable,
(gpointer) insert_text_handler, data);
g_signal_stop_emission_by_name (editable, "insert_text");
g_free (result);
}GTypeInterface baseIfacevoid function(GtkEditable * editable, const(char) * newText, int newTextLength, int * position) insertTextvoid function(GtkEditable * editable, int startPos, int endPos) deleteTextvoid function(GtkEditable * editable) changedvoid function(GtkEditable * editable, const(char) * newText, int newTextLength, int * position) doInsertTextvoid function(GtkEditable * editable, int startPos, int endPos) doDeleteTextchar * function(GtkEditable * editable, int startPos, int endPos) getCharsvoid function(GtkEditable * editable, int startPos, int endPos) setSelectionBoundsgboolean function(GtkEditable * editable, int * startPos, int * endPos) getSelectionBoundsvoid function(GtkEditable * editable, int position) setPositionint function(GtkEditable * editable) getPositionThe #GtkEntry widget is a single line text entry widget. A fairly large set of key bindings are supported by default. If the entered text is longer than the allocation of the widget, the widget will scroll so that the cursor position is visible.
When using an entry for passwords and other sensitive information, it can be put into “password mode” using [gtk.entry.Entry.setVisibility]. In this mode, entered text is displayed using a “invisible” character. By default, GTK+ picks the best invisible character that is available in the current font, but it can be changed with [gtk.entry.Entry.setInvisibleChar]. Since 2.16, GTK+ displays a warning when Caps Lock or input methods might interfere with entering text in a password entry. The warning can be turned off with the #GtkEntry:caps-lock-warning property.
Since 2.16, GtkEntry has the ability to display progress or activity information behind the text. To make an entry display such information, use [gtk.entry.Entry.setProgressFraction] or [gtk.entry.Entry.setProgressPulseStep].
Additionally, GtkEntry can show icons at either side of the entry. These icons can be activatable by clicking, can be set up as drag source and can have tooltips. To add an icon, use [gtk.entry.Entry.setIconFromGicon] or one of the various other functions that set an icon from a stock id, an icon name or a pixbuf. To trigger an action when the user clicks an icon, connect to the #GtkEntry::icon-press signal. To allow DND operations from an icon, use [gtk.entry.Entry.setIconDragSource]. To set a tooltip on an icon, use [gtk.entry.Entry.setIconTooltipText] or the corresponding function for markup.
Note that functionality or information that is only available by clicking on an icon in an entry may not be accessible at all to users which are not able to use a mouse or other pointing device. It is therefore recommended that any such functionality should also be available by other means, e.g. via the context menu of the entry.
CSS nodes
entry[.read-only][.flat][.warning][.error]
├── image.left
├── image.right
├── undershoot.left
├── undershoot.right
├── [selection]
├── [progress[.pulse]]
╰── [window.popup]GtkEntry has a main node with the name entry. Depending on the properties of the entry, the style classes .read-only and .flat may appear. The style classes .warning and .error may also be used with entries.
When the entry shows icons, it adds subnodes with the name image and the style class .left or .right, depending on where the icon appears.
When the entry has a selection, it adds a subnode with the name selection.
When the entry shows progress, it adds a subnode with the name progress. The node has the style class .pulse when the shown progress is pulsing.
The CSS node for a context menu is added as a subnode below entry as well.
The undershoot nodes are used to draw the underflow indication when content is scrolled out of view. These nodes get the .left and .right style classes added depending on where the indication is drawn.
When touch is used and touch selection handles are shown, they are using CSS nodes with name cursor-handle. They get the .top or .bottom style class depending on where they are shown in relation to the selection. If there is just a single handle for the text cursor, it gets the style class .insertion-cursor.
GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassThe #GtkEntryBuffer class contains the actual text displayed in a #GtkEntry widget.
A single #GtkEntryBuffer object can be shared by multiple #GtkEntry widgets which will then share the same text content, but not the cursor position, visibility attributes, icon etc.
#GtkEntryBuffer may be derived from. Such a derived class might allow text to be stored in an alternate location, such as non-pageable memory, useful in the case of important passwords. Or a derived class could integrate with an application’s concept of undo/redo.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, uint position, const(char) * chars, uint nChars) insertedTextvoid function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, uint position, uint nChars) deletedTextconst(char) * function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, size_t * nBytes) getTextuint function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer) getLengthuint function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, uint position, const(char) * chars, uint nChars) insertTextuint function(GtkEntryBuffer * buffer, uint position, uint nChars) deleteTextvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8Class structure for #GtkEntry. All virtual functions have a default implementation. Derived classes may set the virtual function pointers for the signal handlers to null, but must keep @get_text_area_size and @get_frame_size non-null; either use the default implementation, or provide a custom one.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkEntry * entry, GtkWidget * popup) populatePopupClass handler for the #GtkEntry::populate-popup signal. If non-null, this will be called to add additional entries to the context menu when it is displayed.void function(GtkEntry * entry) activateClass handler for the #GtkEntry::activate signal. The default implementation calls [gtk.window.Window.activateDefault] on the entry’s top-level window.void function(GtkEntry * entry, GtkMovementStep step, int count, gboolean extendSelection) moveCursorClass handler for the #GtkEntry::move-cursor signal. The default implementation specifies the standard #GtkEntry cursor movement behavior.void function(GtkEntry * entry, const(char) * str) insertAtCursorClass handler for the #GtkEntry::insert-at-cursor signal. The default implementation inserts text at the cursor.void function(GtkEntry * entry, GtkDeleteType type, int count) deleteFromCursorClass handler for the #GtkEntry::delete-from-cursor signal. The default implementation deletes the selection or the specified number of characters or words.void function(GtkEntry * entry) backspaceClass handler for the #GtkEntry::backspace signal. The default implementation deletes the selection or a single character or word.void function(GtkEntry * entry) cutClipboardClass handler for the #GtkEntry::cut-clipboard signal. The default implementation cuts the selection, if one exists.void function(GtkEntry * entry) copyClipboardClass handler for the #GtkEntry::copy-clipboard signal. The default implementation copies the selection, if one exists.void function(GtkEntry * entry) pasteClipboardClass handler for the #GtkEntry::paste-clipboard signal. The default implementation pastes at the current cursor position or over the current selection if one exists.void function(GtkEntry * entry) toggleOverwriteClass handler for the #GtkEntry::toggle-overwrite signal. The default implementation toggles overwrite mode and blinks the cursor.void function(GtkEntry * entry, int * x, int * y, int * width, int * height) getTextAreaSizeCalculate the size of the text area, which is its allocated width and requested height, minus space for margins and borders. This virtual function must be non-null.void function(GtkEntry * entry, int * x, int * y, int * width, int * height) getFrameSizeCalculate the size of the text area frame, which is its allocated width and requested height, minus space for margins and borders, and taking baseline and text height into account. This virtual fun...void function(GtkEntry * entry) insertEmojivoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6#GtkEntryCompletion is an auxiliary object to be used in conjunction with #GtkEntry to provide the completion functionality. It implements the #GtkCellLayout interface, to allow the user to add extra cells to the #GtkTreeView with completion matches.
“Completion functionality” means that when the user modifies the text in the entry, #GtkEntryCompletion checks which rows in the model match the current content of the entry, and displays a list of matches. By default, the matching is done by comparing the entry text case-insensitively against the text column of the model (see [gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion.setTextColumn]), but this can be overridden with a custom match function (see [gtk.entry_completion.EntryCompletion.setMatchFunc]).
When the user selects a completion, the content of the entry is updated. By default, the content of the entry is replaced by the text column of the model, but this can be overridden by connecting to the #GtkEntryCompletion::match-selected signal and updating the entry in the signal handler. Note that you should return true from the signal handler to suppress the default behaviour.
To add completion functionality to an entry, use [gtk.entry.Entry.setCompletion].
In addition to regular completion matches, which will be inserted into the entry when they are selected, #GtkEntryCompletion also allows to display “actions” in the popup window. Their appearance is similar to menuitems, to differentiate them clearly from completion strings. When an action is selected, the #GtkEntryCompletion::action-activated signal is emitted.
GtkEntryCompletion uses a #GtkTreeModelFilter model to represent the subset of the entire model that is currently matching. While the GtkEntryCompletion signals #GtkEntryCompletion::match-selected and #GtkEntryCompletion::cursor-on-match take the original model and an iter pointing to that model as arguments, other callbacks and signals (such as #GtkCellLayoutDataFuncs or #GtkCellArea::apply-attributes) will generally take the filter model as argument. As long as you are only calling [gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.get], this will make no difference to you. If for some reason, you need the original model, use [gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter.getModel]. Don’t forget to use [gtk.tree_model_filter.TreeModelFilter.convertIterToChildIter] to obtain a matching iter.
GObjectClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkEntryCompletion * completion, GtkTreeModel * model, GtkTreeIter * iter) matchSelectedvoid function(GtkEntryCompletion * completion, int index) actionActivatedgboolean function(GtkEntryCompletion * completion, const(char) * prefix) insertPrefixgboolean function(GtkEntryCompletion * completion, GtkTreeModel * model, GtkTreeIter * iter) cursorOnMatchvoid function(GtkEntryCompletion * completion) noMatchesvoid function() GtkReserved0void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2The #GtkEventBox widget is a subclass of #GtkBin which also has its own window. It is useful since it allows you to catch events for widgets which do not have their own window.
GtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkEventController is a base, low-level implementation for event controllers. Those react to a series of #GdkEvents, and possibly trigger actions as a consequence of those.
#GtkEventControllerKey is an event controller meant for situations where you need access to key events.
This object was added in 3.24.
#GtkEventControllerMotion is an event controller meant for situations where you need to track the position of the pointer.
This object was added in 3.24.
#GtkEventControllerScroll is an event controller meant to handle scroll events from mice and touchpads. It is capable of handling both discrete and continuous scroll events, abstracting them both on the #GtkEventControllerScroll::scroll signal (deltas in the discrete case are multiples of 1).
In the case of continuous scroll events, #GtkEventControllerScroll encloses all #GtkEventControllerScroll::scroll events between two #GtkEventControllerScroll::scroll-begin and #GtkEventControllerScroll::scroll-end signals.
The behavior of the event controller can be modified by the flags given at creation time, or modified at a later point through [gtk.event_controller_scroll.EventControllerScroll.setFlags] (e.g. because the scrolling conditions of the widget changed).
The controller can be set up to emit motion for either/both vertical and horizontal scroll events through #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_VERTICAL, #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_HORIZONTAL and #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_BOTH. If any axis is disabled, the respective #GtkEventControllerScroll::scroll delta will be 0. Vertical scroll events will be translated to horizontal motion for the devices incapable of horizontal scrolling.
The event controller can also be forced to emit discrete events on all devices through #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_DISCRETE. This can be used to implement discrete actions triggered through scroll events (e.g. switching across combobox options).
The #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_KINETIC flag toggles the emission of the #GtkEventControllerScroll::decelerate signal, emitted at the end of scrolling with two X/Y velocity arguments that are consistent with the motion that was received.
This object was added in 3.24.
A #GtkExpander allows the user to hide or show its child by clicking on an expander triangle similar to the triangles used in a #GtkTreeView.
Normally you use an expander as you would use any other descendant of #GtkBin; you create the child widget and use [gtk.container.Container.add] to add it to the expander. When the expander is toggled, it will take care of showing and hiding the child automatically.
Special Usage
There are situations in which you may prefer to show and hide the expanded widget yourself, such as when you want to actually create the widget at expansion time. In this case, create a #GtkExpander but do not add a child to it. The expander widget has an #GtkExpander:expanded property which can be used to monitor its expansion state. You should watch this property with a signal connection as follows:
static void
expander_callback (GObject *object,
GParamSpec *param_spec,
gpointer user_data)
{
GtkExpander *expander;
expander = GTK_EXPANDER (object);
if (gtk_expander_get_expanded (expander))
{
// Show or create widgets
}
else
{
// Hide or destroy widgets
}
}
static void
create_expander (void)
{
GtkWidget *expander = gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic ("_More Options");
g_signal_connect (expander, "notify::expanded",
G_CALLBACK (expander_callback), NULL);
// ...
}GtkExpander as GtkBuildable
The GtkExpander implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. A normal content child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.
An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkExpander:
<object class="GtkExpander">
<child type="label">
<object class="GtkLabel" id="expander-label"/>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkEntry" id="expander-content"/>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
expander
├── title
│ ├── arrow
│ ╰── <label widget>
╰── <child>GtkExpander has three CSS nodes, the main node with the name expander, a subnode with name title and node below it with name arrow. The arrow of an expander that is showing its child gets the :checked pseudoclass added to it.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkExpander * expander) activateKeybinding signal is emitted when the user hits the Enter key.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkFileChooser is an interface that can be implemented by file selection widgets. In GTK+, the main objects that implement this interface are #GtkFileChooserWidget, #GtkFileChooserDialog, and #GtkFileChooserButton. You do not need to write an object that implements the #GtkFileChooser interface unless you are trying to adapt an existing file selector to expose a standard programming interface.
#GtkFileChooser allows for shortcuts to various places in the filesystem. In the default implementation these are displayed in the left pane. It may be a bit confusing at first that these shortcuts come from various sources and in various flavours, so lets explain the terminology here:
- Bookmarks: are created by the user, by dragging folders from the
right pane to the left pane, or by using the “Add”. Bookmarks can be renamed and deleted by the user.
- Shortcuts: can be provided by the application. For example, a Paint
program may want to add a shortcut for a Clipart folder. Shortcuts cannot be modified by the user.
- Volumes: are provided by the underlying filesystem abstraction. They are
the “roots” of the filesystem.
File Names and Encodings
When the user is finished selecting files in a #GtkFileChooser, your program can get the selected names either as filenames or as URIs. For URIs, the normal escaping rules are applied if the URI contains non-ASCII characters. However, filenames are always returned in the character set specified by the G_FILENAME_ENCODING environment variable. Please see the GLib documentation for more details about this variable.
This means that while you can pass the result of [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.getFilename] to [glib.global.open] or [glib.global.fopen], you may not be able to directly set it as the text of a #GtkLabel widget unless you convert it first to UTF-8, which all GTK+ widgets expect. You should use [glib.global.filenameToUtf8] to convert filenames into strings that can be passed to GTK+ widgets.
Adding a Preview Widget
You can add a custom preview widget to a file chooser and then get notification about when the preview needs to be updated. To install a preview widget, use [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setPreviewWidget]. Then, connect to the #GtkFileChooser::update-preview signal to get notified when you need to update the contents of the preview.
Your callback should use [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.getPreviewFilename] to see what needs previewing. Once you have generated the preview for the corresponding file, you must call [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setPreviewWidgetActive] with a boolean flag that indicates whether your callback could successfully generate a preview.
Example: Using a Preview Widget ## {#gtkfilechooser-preview}
{
GtkImage *preview;
...
preview = gtk_image_new ();
gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget (my_file_chooser, preview);
g_signal_connect (my_file_chooser, "update-preview",
G_CALLBACK (update_preview_cb), preview);
}
static void
update_preview_cb (GtkFileChooser *file_chooser, gpointer data)
{
GtkWidget *preview;
char *filename;
GdkPixbuf *pixbuf;
gboolean have_preview;
preview = GTK_WIDGET (data);
filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename (file_chooser);
pixbuf = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_size (filename, 128, 128, NULL);
have_preview = (pixbuf != NULL);
g_free (filename);
gtk_image_set_from_pixbuf (GTK_IMAGE (preview), pixbuf);
if (pixbuf)
g_object_unref (pixbuf);
gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active (file_chooser, have_preview);
}Adding Extra Widgets
You can add extra widgets to a file chooser to provide options that are not present in the default design. For example, you can add a toggle button to give the user the option to open a file in read-only mode. You can use [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setExtraWidget] to insert additional widgets in a file chooser.
An example for adding extra widgets:
GtkWidget *toggle;
...
toggle = gtk_check_button_new_with_label ("Open file read-only");
gtk_widget_show (toggle);
gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget (my_file_chooser, toggle);
}If you want to set more than one extra widget in the file chooser, you can a container such as a #GtkBox or a #GtkGrid and include your widgets in it. Then, set the container as the whole extra widget.
The #GtkFileChooserButton is a widget that lets the user select a file. It implements the #GtkFileChooser interface. Visually, it is a file name with a button to bring up a #GtkFileChooserDialog. The user can then use that dialog to change the file associated with that button. This widget does not support setting the #GtkFileChooser:select-multiple property to true.
Create a button to let the user select a file in /etc
{
GtkWidget *button;
button = gtk_file_chooser_button_new (_("Select a file"),
GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN);
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder (GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (button),
"/etc");
}The #GtkFileChooserButton supports the #GtkFileChooserActions [gtk.types.FileChooserAction.Open] and [gtk.types.FileChooserAction.SelectFolder].
The #GtkFileChooserButton will ellipsize the label, and will thusrequest little horizontal space. To give the button more space, you should call [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredSize], [gtk.file_chooser_button.FileChooserButton.setWidthChars], or pack the button in such a way that other interface elements give space to the widget.
CSS nodes
GtkFileChooserButton has a CSS node with name “filechooserbutton”, containing a subnode for the internal button with name “button” and style class “.file”.
GtkBoxClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkFileChooserButton * fc) fileSetSignal emitted when the user selects a file.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkFileChooserDialog is a dialog box suitable for use with “File/Open” or “File/Save as” commands. This widget works by putting a #GtkFileChooserWidget inside a #GtkDialog. It exposes the #GtkFileChooser interface, so you can use all of the #GtkFileChooser functions on the file chooser dialog as well as those for #GtkDialog.
Note that #GtkFileChooserDialog does not have any methods of its own. Instead, you should use the functions that work on a #GtkFileChooser.
If you want to integrate well with the platform you should use the #GtkFileChooserNative API, which will use a platform-specific dialog if available and fall back to GtkFileChooserDialog otherwise.
Typical usage ## {#gtkfilechooser-typical-usage}
In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use #GtkFileChooserDialog to select a file for opening:
GtkWidget *dialog;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;
gint res;
dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File",
parent_window,
action,
_("_Cancel"),
GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
_("_Open"),
GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
NULL);
res = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
{
char *filename;
GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);
filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (chooser);
open_file (filename);
g_free (filename);
}
gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);To use a dialog for saving, you can use this:
GtkWidget *dialog;
GtkFileChooser *chooser;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE;
gint res;
dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Save File",
parent_window,
action,
_("_Cancel"),
GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
_("_Save"),
GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
NULL);
chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);
gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation (chooser, TRUE);
if (user_edited_a_new_document)
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser,
_("Untitled document"));
else
gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser,
existing_filename);
res = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
{
char *filename;
filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (chooser);
save_to_file (filename);
g_free (filename);
}
gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);Setting up a file chooser dialog ## {#gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up}
There are various cases in which you may need to use a #GtkFileChooserDialog:
- To select a file for opening. Use #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
- To save a file for the first time. Use #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE,
and suggest a name such as “Untitled” with [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setCurrentName].
- To save a file under a different name. Use #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE,
and set the existing filename with [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setFilename].
- To choose a folder instead of a file. Use #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER.
Note that old versions of the file chooser’s documentation suggested using [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setCurrentFolder] in various situations, with the intention of letting the application suggest a reasonable default folder. This is no longer considered to be a good policy, as now the file chooser is able to make good suggestions on its own. In general, you should only cause the file chooser to show a specific folder when it is appropriate to use [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setFilename], i.e. when you are doing a Save As command and you already have a file saved somewhere.
Response Codes ## {#gtkfilechooserdialog-responses}
#GtkFileChooserDialog inherits from #GtkDialog, so buttons that go in its action area have response codes such as #GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT and #GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL. For example, you could call [gtk.file_chooser_dialog.FileChooserDialog.new_] as follows:
GtkWidget *dialog;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;
dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File",
parent_window,
action,
_("_Cancel"),
GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
_("_Open"),
GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
NULL);This will create buttons for “Cancel” and “Open” that use stock response identifiers from #GtkResponseType. For most dialog boxes you can use your own custom response codes rather than the ones in #GtkResponseType, but #GtkFileChooserDialog assumes that its “accept”-type action, e.g. an “Open” or “Save” button, will have one of the following response codes:
- #GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT
- #GTK_RESPONSE_OK
- #GTK_RESPONSE_YES
- #GTK_RESPONSE_APPLY
This is because #GtkFileChooserDialog must intercept responses and switch to folders if appropriate, rather than letting the dialog terminate — the implementation uses these known response codes to know which responses can be blocked if appropriate.
To summarize, make sure you use a [stock response code][gtkfilechooserdialog-responses] when you use #GtkFileChooserDialog to ensure proper operation.
GtkDialogClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkFileChooserNative is an abstraction of a dialog box suitable for use with “File/Open” or “File/Save as” commands. By default, this just uses a #GtkFileChooserDialog to implement the actual dialog. However, on certain platforms, such as Windows and macOS, the native platform file chooser is used instead. When the application is running in a sandboxed environment without direct filesystem access (such as Flatpak), #GtkFileChooserNative may call the proper APIs (portals) to let the user choose a file and make it available to the application.
While the API of #GtkFileChooserNative closely mirrors #GtkFileChooserDialog, the main difference is that there is no access to any #GtkWindow or #GtkWidget for the dialog. This is required, as there may not be one in the case of a platform native dialog. Showing, hiding and running the dialog is handled by the #GtkNativeDialog functions.
Typical usage ## {#gtkfilechoosernative-typical-usage}
In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use #GtkFileChooserDialog to select a file for opening:
GtkFileChooserNative *native;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;
gint res;
native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Open File",
parent_window,
action,
"_Open",
"_Cancel");
res = gtk_native_dialog_run (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));
if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
{
char *filename;
GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);
filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (chooser);
open_file (filename);
g_free (filename);
}
g_object_unref (native);To use a dialog for saving, you can use this:
GtkFileChooserNative *native;
GtkFileChooser *chooser;
GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE;
gint res;
native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Save File",
parent_window,
action,
"_Save",
"_Cancel");
chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);
gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation (chooser, TRUE);
if (user_edited_a_new_document)
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser,
_("Untitled document"));
else
gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser,
existing_filename);
res = gtk_native_dialog_run (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));
if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
{
char *filename;
filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (chooser);
save_to_file (filename);
g_free (filename);
}
g_object_unref (native);For more information on how to best set up a file dialog, see #GtkFileChooserDialog.
Response Codes ## {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-responses}
#GtkFileChooserNative inherits from #GtkNativeDialog, which means it will return #GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT if the user accepted, and #GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL if he pressed cancel. It can also return #GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT if the window was unexpectedly closed.
Differences from #GtkFileChooserDialog ## {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-differences}
There are a few things in the GtkFileChooser API that are not possible to use with #GtkFileChooserNative, as such use would prohibit the use of a native dialog.
There is no support for the signals that are emitted when the user navigates in the dialog, including:
- #GtkFileChooser::current-folder-changed
- #GtkFileChooser::selection-changed
- #GtkFileChooser::file-activated
- #GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite
You can also not use the methods that directly control user navigation:
- [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.unselectFilename]
- [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.selectAll]
- [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.unselectAll]
If you need any of the above you will have to use #GtkFileChooserDialog directly.
No operations that change the the dialog work while the dialog is visible. Set all the properties that are required before showing the dialog.
Win32 details ## {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-win32}
On windows the IFileDialog implementation (added in Windows Vista) is used. It supports many of the features that #GtkFileChooserDialog does, but there are some things it does not handle:
- Extra widgets added with [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setExtraWidget].
- Use of custom previews by connecting to #GtkFileChooser::update-preview.
- Any #GtkFileFilter added using a mimetype or custom filter.
If any of these features are used the regular #GtkFileChooserDialog will be used in place of the native one.
Portal details ## {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-portal}
When the org.freedesktop.portal.FileChooser portal is available on the session bus, it is used to bring up an out-of-process file chooser. Depending on the kind of session the application is running in, this may or may not be a GTK+ file chooser. In this situation, the following things are not supported and will be silently ignored:
- Extra widgets added with [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setExtraWidget].
- Use of custom previews by connecting to #GtkFileChooser::update-preview.
- Any #GtkFileFilter added with a custom filter.
macOS details ## {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-macos}
On macOS the NSSavePanel and NSOpenPanel classes are used to provide native file chooser dialogs. Some features provided by #GtkFileChooserDialog are not supported:
- Extra widgets added with [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.setExtraWidget], unless the
widget is an instance of GtkLabel, in which case the label text will be used to set the NSSavePanel message instance property.
- Use of custom previews by connecting to #GtkFileChooser::update-preview.
- Any #GtkFileFilter added with a custom filter.
- Shortcut folders.
GtkNativeDialogClass parentClass#GtkFileChooserWidget is a widget for choosing files. It exposes the #GtkFileChooser interface, and you should use the methods of this interface to interact with the widget.
CSS nodes
GtkFileChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name filechooser.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBoxClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A GtkFileFilter can be used to restrict the files being shown in a #GtkFileChooser. Files can be filtered based on their name (with [gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addPattern]), on their mime type (with [gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addMimeType]), or by a custom filter function (with [gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addCustom]).
Filtering by mime types handles aliasing and subclassing of mime types; e.g. a filter for text/plain also matches a file with mime type application/rtf, since application/rtf is a subclass of text/plain. Note that #GtkFileFilter allows wildcards for the subtype of a mime type, so you can e.g. filter for image/\*.
Normally, filters are used by adding them to a #GtkFileChooser, see [gtk.file_chooser.FileChooser.addFilter], but it is also possible to manually use a filter on a file with [gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.filter].
GtkFileFilter as GtkBuildable
The GtkFileFilter implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding rules using the <mime-types>, <patterns> and <applications> elements and listing the rules within. Specifying a <mime-type> or <pattern> has the same effect as as calling [gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addMimeType] or [gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addPattern].
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying GtkFileFilter rules:
<object class="GtkFileFilter">
<mime-types>
<mime-type>text/plain</mime-type>
<mime-type>image/ *</mime-type>
</mime-types>
<patterns>
<pattern>*.txt</pattern>
<pattern>*.png</pattern>
</patterns>
</object>A #GtkFileFilterInfo-struct is used to pass information about the tested file to [gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.filter].
GtkFileFilterFlags containsFlags indicating which of the following fields need are filledconst(char) * filenamethe filename of the file being testedconst(char) * urithe URI for the file being testedconst(char) * displayNamethe string that will be used to display the file in the file chooserconst(char) * mimeTypethe mime type of the fileThe #GtkFixed widget is a container which can place child widgets at fixed positions and with fixed sizes, given in pixels. #GtkFixed performs no automatic layout management.
For most applications, you should not use this container! It keeps you from having to learn about the other GTK+ containers, but it results in broken applications. With #GtkFixed, the following things will result in truncated text, overlapping widgets, and other display bugs:
- Themes, which may change widget sizes.
- Fonts other than the one you used to write the app will of course
change the size of widgets containing text; keep in mind that users may use a larger font because of difficulty reading the default, or they may be using a different OS that provides different fonts.
- Translation of text into other languages changes its size. Also,
display of non-English text will use a different font in many cases.
In addition, #GtkFixed does not pay attention to text direction and thus may produce unwanted results if your app is run under right-to-left languages such as Hebrew or Arabic. That is: normally GTK+ will order containers appropriately for the text direction, e.g. to put labels to the right of the thing they label when using an RTL language, but it can’t do that with #GtkFixed. So if you need to reorder widgets depending on the text direction, you would need to manually detect it and adjust child positions accordingly.
Finally, fixed positioning makes it kind of annoying to add/remove GUI elements, since you have to reposition all the other elements. This is a long-term maintenance problem for your application.
If you know none of these things are an issue for your application, and prefer the simplicity of #GtkFixed, by all means use the widget. But you should be aware of the tradeoffs.
See also #GtkLayout, which shares the ability to perform fixed positioning of child widgets and additionally adds custom drawing and scrollability.
GtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A GtkFlowBox positions child widgets in sequence according to its orientation.
For instance, with the horizontal orientation, the widgets will be arranged from left to right, starting a new row under the previous row when necessary. Reducing the width in this case will require more rows, so a larger height will be requested.
Likewise, with the vertical orientation, the widgets will be arranged from top to bottom, starting a new column to the right when necessary. Reducing the height will require more columns, so a larger width will be requested.
The size request of a GtkFlowBox alone may not be what you expect; if you need to be able to shrink it along both axes and dynamically reflow its children, you may have to wrap it in a #GtkScrolledWindow to enable that.
The children of a GtkFlowBox can be dynamically sorted and filtered.
Although a GtkFlowBox must have only #GtkFlowBoxChild children, you can add any kind of widget to it via [gtk.container.Container.add], and a GtkFlowBoxChild widget will automatically be inserted between the box and the widget.
Also see #GtkListBox.
GtkFlowBox was added in GTK+ 3.12.
CSS nodes
flowbox
├── flowboxchild
│ ╰── <child>
├── flowboxchild
│ ╰── <child>
┊
╰── [rubberband]GtkFlowBox uses a single CSS node with name flowbox. GtkFlowBoxChild uses a single CSS node with name flowboxchild. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
GtkContainer containerGtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBin parentInstanceGtkContainerAccessible parentGtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBinClass parentClassvoid function(GtkFlowBoxChild * child) activatevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2GtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function(GtkFlowBox * box, GtkFlowBoxChild * child) childActivatedvoid function(GtkFlowBox * box) selectedChildrenChangedvoid function(GtkFlowBox * box) activateCursorChildvoid function(GtkFlowBox * box) toggleCursorChildgboolean function(GtkFlowBox * box, GtkMovementStep step, int count) moveCursorvoid function(GtkFlowBox * box) selectAllvoid function(GtkFlowBox * box) unselectAllvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6The #GtkFontButton is a button which displays the currently selected font an allows to open a font chooser dialog to change the font. It is suitable widget for selecting a font in a preference dialog.
CSS nodes
GtkFontButton has a single CSS node with name button and style class .font.
GtkButtonClass parentClassvoid function(GtkFontButton * gfp) fontSetvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkFontChooser is an interface that can be implemented by widgets displaying the list of fonts. In GTK+, the main objects that implement this interface are #GtkFontChooserWidget, #GtkFontChooserDialog and #GtkFontButton. The GtkFontChooser interface has been introducted in GTK+ 3.2.
The #GtkFontChooserDialog widget is a dialog for selecting a font. It implements the #GtkFontChooser interface.
GtkFontChooserDialog as GtkBuildable
The GtkFontChooserDialog implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface exposes the buttons with the names “select_button” and “cancel_button”.
GtkDialogClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GTypeInterface baseIfacePangoFontFamily * function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser) getFontFamilyPangoFontFace * function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser) getFontFaceint function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser) getFontSizevoid function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser, GtkFontFilterFunc filter, void * userData, GDestroyNotify destroy) setFilterFuncvoid function(GtkFontChooser * chooser, const(char) * fontname) fontActivatedvoid function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser, PangoFontMap * fontmap) setFontMapPangoFontMap * function(GtkFontChooser * fontchooser) getFontMapvoid *[10] paddingThe #GtkFontChooserWidget widget lists the available fonts, styles and sizes, allowing the user to select a font. It is used in the #GtkFontChooserDialog widget to provide a dialog box for selecting fonts.
To set the font which is initially selected, use [gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.setFont] or [gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.setFontDesc].
To get the selected font use [gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.getFont] or [gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.getFontDesc].
To change the text which is shown in the preview area, use [gtk.font_chooser.FontChooser.setPreviewText].
CSS nodes
GtkFontChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name fontchooser.
GtkBoxClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8GtkBoxClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkDialogClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The frame widget is a bin that surrounds its child with a decorative frame and an optional label. If present, the label is drawn in a gap in the top side of the frame. The position of the label can be controlled with [gtk.frame.Frame.setLabelAlign].
GtkFrame as GtkBuildable
The GtkFrame implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface supports placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. A normal content child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.
An example of a UI definition fragment with [gtk.frame.Frame]:
<object class="GtkFrame">
<child type="label">
<object class="GtkLabel" id="frame-label"/>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkEntry" id="frame-content"/>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
frame
├── border[.flat]
├── <label widget>
╰── <child>GtkFrame has a main CSS node named “frame” and a subnode named “border”. The “border” node is used to draw the visible border. You can set the appearance of the border using CSS properties like “border-style” on the “border” node.
The border node can be given the style class “.flat”, which is used by themes to disable drawing of the border. To do this from code, call [gtk.frame.Frame.setShadowType] with [gtk.types.ShadowType.None] to add the “.flat” class or any other shadow type to remove it.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkFrame * frame, GtkAllocation * allocation) computeChildAllocationvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkGLArea is a widget that allows drawing with OpenGL.
#GtkGLArea sets up its own #GdkGLContext for the window it creates, and creates a custom GL framebuffer that the widget will do GL rendering onto. It also ensures that this framebuffer is the default GL rendering target when rendering.
In order to draw, you have to connect to the #GtkGLArea::render signal, or subclass #GtkGLArea and override the @GtkGLAreaClass.render() virtual function.
The #GtkGLArea widget ensures that the #GdkGLContext is associated with the widget's drawing area, and it is kept updated when the size and position of the drawing area changes.
Drawing with GtkGLArea
The simplest way to draw using OpenGL commands in a #GtkGLArea is to create a widget instance and connect to the #GtkGLArea::render signal:
// create a GtkGLArea instance
GtkWidget *gl_area = gtk_gl_area_new ();
// connect to the "render" signal
g_signal_connect (gl_area, "render", G_CALLBACK (render), NULL);The render() function will be called when the #GtkGLArea is ready for you to draw its content:
static gboolean
render (GtkGLArea *area, GdkGLContext *context)
{
// inside this function it's safe to use GL; the given
// #GdkGLContext has been made current to the drawable
// surface used by the #GtkGLArea and the viewport has
// already been set to be the size of the allocation
// we can start by clearing the buffer
glClearColor (0, 0, 0, 0);
glClear (GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT);
// draw your object
draw_an_object ();
// we completed our drawing; the draw commands will be
// flushed at the end of the signal emission chain, and
// the buffers will be drawn on the window
return TRUE;
}If you need to initialize OpenGL state, e.g. buffer objects or shaders, you should use the #GtkWidget::realize signal; you can use the #GtkWidget::unrealize signal to clean up. Since the #GdkGLContext creation and initialization may fail, you will need to check for errors, using [gtk.glarea.GLArea.getError]. An example of how to safely initialize the GL state is:
static void
on_realize (GtkGLarea *area)
{
// We need to make the context current if we want to
// call GL API
gtk_gl_area_make_current (area);
// If there were errors during the initialization or
// when trying to make the context current, this
// function will return a #GError for you to catch
if (gtk_gl_area_get_error (area) != NULL)
return;
// You can also use gtk_gl_area_set_error() in order
// to show eventual initialization errors on the
// GtkGLArea widget itself
GError *internal_error = NULL;
init_buffer_objects (&error);
if (error != NULL)
{
gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error);
g_error_free (error);
return;
}
init_shaders (&error);
if (error != NULL)
{
gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error);
g_error_free (error);
return;
}
}If you need to change the options for creating the #GdkGLContext you should use the #GtkGLArea::create-context signal.
GtkWidget parentInstanceThe [gtk.glarea_class.GLAreaClass] structure contains only private data.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkGLArea * area, GdkGLContext * context) renderclass closure for the #GtkGLArea::render signalvoid function(GtkGLArea * area, int width, int height) resizeclass closeure for the #GtkGLArea::resize signalGdkGLContext * function(GtkGLArea * area) createContextclass closure for the #GtkGLArea::create-context signalvoid *[6] Padding#GtkGesture is the base object for gesture recognition, although this object is quite generalized to serve as a base for multi-touch gestures, it is suitable to implement single-touch and pointer-based gestures (using the special null #GdkEventSequence value for these).
The number of touches that a #GtkGesture need to be recognized is controlled by the #GtkGesture:n-points property, if a gesture is keeping track of less or more than that number of sequences, it won't check wether the gesture is recognized.
As soon as the gesture has the expected number of touches, the gesture will run the #GtkGesture::check signal regularly on input events until the gesture is recognized, the criteria to consider a gesture as "recognized" is left to #GtkGesture subclasses.
A recognized gesture will then emit the following signals:
- #GtkGesture::begin when the gesture is recognized.
- A number of #GtkGesture::update, whenever an input event is processed.
- #GtkGesture::end when the gesture is no longer recognized.
Event propagation
In order to receive events, a gesture needs to either set a propagation phase through [gtk.event_controller.EventController.setPropagationPhase], or feed those manually through [gtk.event_controller.EventController.handleEvent].
In the capture phase, events are propagated from the toplevel down to the target widget, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget get a chance to interact with the event before it reaches the target.
After the capture phase, GTK+ emits the traditional #GtkWidget::button-press-event, #GtkWidget::button-release-event, #GtkWidget::touch-event, etc signals. Gestures with the [gtk.types.PropagationPhase.Target] phase are fed events from the default #GtkWidget::event handlers.
In the bubble phase, events are propagated up from the target widget to the toplevel, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget get a chance to interact with events that have not been handled yet.
States of a sequence # {#touch-sequence-states}
Whenever input interaction happens, a single event may trigger a cascade of #GtkGestures, both across the parents of the widget receiving the event and in parallel within an individual widget. It is a responsibility of the widgets using those gestures to set the state of touch sequences accordingly in order to enable cooperation of gestures around the #GdkEventSequences triggering those.
Within a widget, gestures can be grouped through [gtk.gesture.Gesture.group], grouped gestures synchronize the state of sequences, so calling [gtk.gesture.Gesture.setSequenceState] on one will effectively propagate the state throughout the group.
By default, all sequences start out in the #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_NONE state, sequences in this state trigger the gesture event handler, but event propagation will continue unstopped by gestures.
If a sequence enters into the #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED state, the gesture group will effectively ignore the sequence, letting events go unstopped through the gesture, but the "slot" will still remain occupied while the touch is active.
If a sequence enters in the #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED state, the gesture group will grab all interaction on the sequence, by:
- Setting the same sequence to #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED on every other gesture
group within the widget, and every gesture on parent widgets in the propagation chain.
- calling #GtkGesture::cancel on every gesture in widgets underneath in the
propagation chain.
- Stopping event propagation after the gesture group handles the event.
Note
#GDK_TOUCH_BEGIN/#GDK_BUTTON_PRESS (so those events are captured before reaching the event widget, this implies #GTK_PHASE_CAPTURE), one similar event will emulated if the sequence changes to #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED. This way event coherence is preserved before event propagation is unstopped again.
Sequence states can't be changed freely, see [gtk.gesture.Gesture.setSequenceState] to know about the possible lifetimes of a #GdkEventSequence.
Touchpad gestures
On the platforms that support it, #GtkGesture will handle transparently touchpad gesture events. The only precautions users of #GtkGesture should do to enable this support are:
- Enabling [gdk.types.EventMask.TouchpadGestureMask] on their #GdkWindows
- If the gesture has [gtk.types.PropagationPhase.None], ensuring events of type
[gdk.types.EventType.TouchpadSwipe] and [gdk.types.EventType.TouchpadPinch] are handled by the #GtkGesture
#GtkGestureDrag is a #GtkGesture implementation that recognizes drag operations. The drag operation itself can be tracked throught the #GtkGestureDrag::drag-begin, #GtkGestureDrag::drag-update and #GtkGestureDrag::drag-end signals, or the relevant coordinates be extracted through [gtk.gesture_drag.GestureDrag.getOffset] and [gtk.gesture_drag.GestureDrag.getStartPoint].
#GtkGestureLongPress is a #GtkGesture implementation able to recognize long presses, triggering the #GtkGestureLongPress::pressed after the timeout is exceeded.
If the touchpoint is lifted before the timeout passes, or if it drifts too far of the initial press point, the #GtkGestureLongPress::cancelled signal will be emitted.
#GtkGestureMultiPress is a #GtkGesture implementation able to recognize multiple clicks on a nearby zone, which can be listened for through the #GtkGestureMultiPress::pressed signal. Whenever time or distance between clicks exceed the GTK+ defaults, #GtkGestureMultiPress::stopped is emitted, and the click counter is reset.
Callers may also restrict the area that is considered valid for a >1 touch/button press through [gtk.gesture_multi_press.GestureMultiPress.setArea], so any click happening outside that area is considered to be a first click of its own.
#GtkGesturePan is a #GtkGesture implementation able to recognize pan gestures, those are drags that are locked to happen along one axis. The axis that a #GtkGesturePan handles is defined at construct time, and can be changed through [gtk.gesture_pan.GesturePan.setOrientation].
When the gesture starts to be recognized, #GtkGesturePan will attempt to determine as early as possible whether the sequence is moving in the expected direction, and denying the sequence if this does not happen.
Once a panning gesture along the expected axis is recognized, the #GtkGesturePan::pan signal will be emitted as input events are received, containing the offset in the given axis.
#GtkGestureRotate is a #GtkGesture implementation able to recognize 2-finger rotations, whenever the angle between both handled sequences changes, the #GtkGestureRotate::angle-changed signal is emitted.
#GtkGestureSingle is a subclass of #GtkGesture, optimized (although not restricted) for dealing with mouse and single-touch gestures. Under interaction, these gestures stick to the first interacting sequence, which is accessible through [gtk.gesture_single.GestureSingle.getCurrentSequence] while the gesture is being interacted with.
By default gestures react to both [gdk.types.BUTTON_PRIMARY] and touch events, [gtk.gesture_single.GestureSingle.setTouchOnly] can be used to change the touch behavior. Callers may also specify a different mouse button number to interact with through [gtk.gesture_single.GestureSingle.setButton], or react to any mouse button by setting 0. While the gesture is active, the button being currently pressed can be known through [gtk.gesture_single.GestureSingle.getCurrentButton].
#GtkGestureStylus is a #GtkGesture implementation specific to stylus input. The provided signals just provide the basic information
#GtkGestureSwipe is a #GtkGesture implementation able to recognize swipes, after a press/move/.../move/release sequence happens, the #GtkGestureSwipe::swipe signal will be emitted, providing the velocity and directionality of the sequence at the time it was lifted.
If the velocity is desired in intermediate points, [gtk.gesture_swipe.GestureSwipe.getVelocity] can be called on eg. a #GtkGesture::update handler.
All velocities are reported in pixels/sec units.
#GtkGestureZoom is a #GtkGesture implementation able to recognize pinch/zoom gestures, whenever the distance between both tracked sequences changes, the #GtkGestureZoom::scale-changed signal is emitted to report the scale factor.
GtkGradient is a boxed type that represents a gradient. It is the result of parsing a [gradient expression][gtkcssprovider-gradients]. To obtain the gradient represented by a GtkGradient, it has to be resolved with [gtk.gradient.Gradient.resolve], which replaces all symbolic color references by the colors they refer to (in a given context) and constructs a #cairo_pattern_t value.
It is not normally necessary to deal directly with #GtkGradients, since they are mostly used behind the scenes by #GtkStyleContext and #GtkCssProvider.
#GtkGradient is deprecated. It was used internally by GTK’s CSS engine to represent gradients. As its handling is not conforming to modern web standards, it is not used anymore. If you want to use gradients in your own code, please use Cairo directly.
GtkGrid is a container which arranges its child widgets in rows and columns, with arbitrary positions and horizontal/vertical spans.
Children are added using [gtk.grid.Grid.attach]. They can span multiple rows or columns. It is also possible to add a child next to an existing child, using [gtk.grid.Grid.attachNextTo]. The behaviour of GtkGrid when several children occupy the same grid cell is undefined.
GtkGrid can be used like a #GtkBox by just using [gtk.container.Container.add], which will place children next to each other in the direction determined by the #GtkOrientable:orientation property. However, if all you want is a single row or column, then #GtkBox is the preferred widget.
CSS nodes
GtkGrid uses a single CSS node with name grid.
GtkContainerClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8#GtkHBox is a container that organizes child widgets into a single row.
Use the #GtkBox packing interface to determine the arrangement, spacing, width, and alignment of #GtkHBox children.
All children are allocated the same height.
GtkHBox has been deprecated. You can use #GtkBox instead, which is a very quick and easy change. If you have derived your own classes from GtkHBox, you can simply change the inheritance to derive directly from #GtkBox. No further changes are needed, since the default value of the #GtkOrientable:orientation property is [gtk.types.Orientation.Horizontal].
If you have a grid-like layout composed of nested boxes, and you don’t need first-child or last-child styling, the recommendation is to switch to #GtkGrid. For more information about migrating to #GtkGrid, see [Migrating from other containers to GtkGrid][gtk-migrating-GtkGrid].
GtkBox boxGtkBoxClass parentClassGtkButtonBox buttonBoxGtkButtonBoxClass parentClassThe HPaned widget is a container widget with two children arranged horizontally. The division between the two panes is adjustable by the user by dragging a handle. See #GtkPaned for details.
GtkHPaned has been deprecated, use #GtkPaned instead.
GtkPaned panedGtkPanedClass parentClass#GtkHSV is the “color wheel” part of a complete color selector widget. It allows to select a color by determining its HSV components in an intuitive way. Moving the selection around the outer ring changes the hue, and moving the selection point inside the inner triangle changes value and saturation.
#GtkHSV has been deprecated together with #GtkColorSelection, where it was used.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function(GtkHSV * hsv) changedvoid function(GtkHSV * hsv, GtkDirectionType type) movevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkHScale widget is used to allow the user to select a value using a horizontal slider. To create one, use [gtk.hscale.HScale.newWithRange].
The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places shown can be set using the parent #GtkScale class’s functions.
GtkHScale has been deprecated, use #GtkScale instead.
GtkScale scaleGtkScaleClass parentClassThe #GtkHScrollbar widget is a widget arranged horizontally creating a scrollbar. See #GtkScrollbar for details on scrollbars. #GtkAdjustment pointers may be added to handle the adjustment of the scrollbar or it may be left null in which case one will be created for you. See #GtkScrollbar for a description of what the fields in an adjustment represent for a scrollbar.
GtkHScrollbar has been deprecated, use #GtkScrollbar instead.
GtkScrollbar scrollbarGtkScrollbarClass parentClassThe #GtkHSeparator widget is a horizontal separator, used to group the widgets within a window. It displays a horizontal line with a shadow to make it appear sunken into the interface.
The #GtkHSeparator widget is not used as a separator within menus.To create a separator in a menu create an empty #GtkSeparatorMenuItem widget using [gtk.separator_menu_item.SeparatorMenuItem.new_] and add it to the menu with [gtk.menu_shell.MenuShell.append].
GtkHSeparator has been deprecated, use #GtkSeparator instead.
GtkSeparator separatorGtkSeparatorClass parentClassThe #GtkHandleBox widget allows a portion of a window to be "torn off". It is a bin widget which displays its child and a handle that the user can drag to tear off a separate window (the “float window”) containing the child widget. A thin “ghost” is drawn in the original location of the handlebox. By dragging the separate window back to its original location, it can be reattached.
When reattaching, the ghost and float window, must be aligned along one of the edges, the “snap edge”. This either can be specified by the application programmer explicitly, or GTK+ will pick a reasonable default based on the handle position.
To make detaching and reattaching the handlebox as minimally confusing as possible to the user, it is important to set the snap edge so that the snap edge does not move when the handlebox is deattached. For instance, if the handlebox is packed at the bottom of a VBox, then when the handlebox is detached, the bottom edge of the handlebox's allocation will remain fixed as the height of the handlebox shrinks, so the snap edge should be set to [gtk.types.PositionType.Bottom].
#GtkHandleBox has been deprecated. It is very specialized, lacks featuresto make it useful and most importantly does not fit well into modern application design. Do not use it. There is no replacement.
GtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkHandleBox * handleBox, GtkWidget * child) childAttachedSignal emitted when the contents of the handlebox are reattached to the main window. Deprecated: 3.4.void function(GtkHandleBox * handleBox, GtkWidget * child) childDetachedSignal emitted when the contents of the handlebox are detached from the main window. Deprecated: 3.4.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkHeaderBar is similar to a horizontal #GtkBox. It allows children to be placed at the start or the end. In addition, it allows a title and subtitle to be displayed. The title will be centered with respect to the width of the box, even if the children at either side take up different amounts of space. The height of the titlebar will be set to provide sufficient space for the subtitle, even if none is currently set. If a subtitle is not needed, the space reservation can be turned off with [gtk.header_bar.HeaderBar.setHasSubtitle].
GtkHeaderBar can add typical window frame controls, such as minimize, maximize and close buttons, or the window icon.
For these reasons, GtkHeaderBar is the natural choice for use as the custom titlebar widget of a #GtkWindow (see [gtk.window.Window.setTitlebar]), as it gives features typical of titlebars while allowing the addition of child widgets.
GtkContainer containerGtkContainerAccessible parentGtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkIMContext defines the interface for GTK+ input methods. An input method is used by GTK+ text input widgets like #GtkEntry to map from key events to Unicode character strings.
The default input method can be set programmatically via the #GtkSettings:gtk-im-module GtkSettings property. Alternatively, you may set the GTK_IM_MODULE environment variable as documented in [Running GTK+ Applications][gtk-running].
The #GtkEntry #GtkEntry:im-module and #GtkTextView #GtkTextView:im-module properties may also be used to set input methods for specific widget instances. For instance, a certain entry widget might be expected to contain certain characters which would be easier to input with a certain input method.
An input method may consume multiple key events in sequence and finally output the composed result. This is called preediting, and an input method may provide feedback about this process by displaying the intermediate composition states as preedit text. For instance, the default GTK+ input method implements the input of arbitrary Unicode code points by holding down the Control and Shift keys and then typing “U” followed by the hexadecimal digits of the code point. When releasing the Control and Shift keys, preediting ends and the character is inserted as text. Ctrl+Shift+u20AC for example results in the € sign.
Additional input methods can be made available for use by GTK+ widgets as loadable modules. An input method module is a small shared library which implements a subclass of #GtkIMContext or #GtkIMContextSimple and exports these four functions:
void im_module_init(GTypeModule *module); This function should register the #GType of the #GtkIMContext subclass which implements the input method by means of [gobject.type_module.TypeModule.registerType]. Note that [gobject.global.typeRegisterStatic] cannot be used as the type needs to be registered dynamically.void im_module_exit(void); Here goes any cleanup code your input method might require on module unload.void im_module_list(const GtkIMContextInfo ***contexts, int *n_contexts)
{
*contexts = info_list;
*n_contexts = G_N_ELEMENTS (info_list);
} This function returns the list of input methods provided by the module. The example implementation above shows a common solution and simply returns a pointer to statically defined array of #GtkIMContextInfo items for each provided input method.GtkIMContext * im_module_create(const gchar *context_id); This function should return a pointer to a newly created instance of the #GtkIMContext subclass identified by @context_id. The context ID is the same as specified in the #GtkIMContextInfo array returned by im_module_list().After a new loadable input method module has been installed on the system, the configuration file gtk.immodules needs to be regenerated by [gtk-query-immodules-3.0][gtk-query-immodules-3.0], in order for the new input method to become available to GTK+ applications.
GObject parentInstanceGObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkIMContext * context) preeditStartDefault handler of the #GtkIMContext::preedit-start signal.void function(GtkIMContext * context) preeditEndDefault handler of the #GtkIMContext::preedit-end signal.void function(GtkIMContext * context) preeditChangedDefault handler of the #GtkIMContext::preedit-changed signal.void function(GtkIMContext * context, const(char) * str) commitDefault handler of the #GtkIMContext::commit signal.gboolean function(GtkIMContext * context) retrieveSurroundingDefault handler of the #GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding signal.gboolean function(GtkIMContext * context, int offset, int nChars) deleteSurroundingDefault handler of the #GtkIMContext::delete-surrounding signal.void function(GtkIMContext * context, GdkWindow * window) setClientWindowCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.setClientWindow] when the input window where the entered text will appear changes. Override this to keep track of the current input window, for instance for the ...void function(GtkIMContext * context, char * * str, PangoAttrList * * attrs, int * cursorPos) getPreeditStringCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.getPreeditString] to retrieve the text currently being preedited for display at the cursor position. Any input method which composes complex characters or any ot...gboolean function(GtkIMContext * context, GdkEventKey * event) filterKeypressCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.filterKeypress] on every key press or release event. Every non-trivial input method needs to override this in order to implement the mapping from key events to t...void function(GtkIMContext * context) focusInCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.focusIn] when the input widget has gained focus. May be overridden to keep track of the current focus.void function(GtkIMContext * context) focusOutCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.focusOut] when the input widget has lost focus. May be overridden to keep track of the current focus.void function(GtkIMContext * context) resetCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.reset] to signal a change such as a change in cursor position. An input method that implements preediting should override this method to clear the preedit state ...void function(GtkIMContext * context, GdkRectangle * area) setCursorLocationCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.setCursorLocation] to inform the input method of the current cursor location relative to the client window. May be overridden to implement the display of popup w...void function(GtkIMContext * context, gboolean usePreedit) setUsePreeditCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.setUsePreedit] to control the use of the preedit string. Override this to display feedback by some other means if turned off.void function(GtkIMContext * context, const(char) * text, int len, int cursorIndex) setSurroundingCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.setSurrounding] in response to signal #GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding to update the input method’s idea of the context around the cursor. It is not necessa...gboolean function(GtkIMContext * context, char * * text, int * cursorIndex) getSurroundingCalled via [gtk.imcontext.IMContext.getSurrounding] to update the context around the cursor location. It is not necessary to override this method even with input methods which implement context-dep...void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6Bookkeeping information about a loadable input method.
const(char) * contextIdThe unique identification string of the input method.const(char) * contextNameThe human-readable name of the input method.const(char) * domainTranslation domain to be used with dgettext()const(char) * domainDirnameName of locale directory for use with bindtextdomain()const(char) * defaultLocalesA colon-separated list of locales where this input method should be the default. The asterisk “*” sets the default for all locales.GtkIMContextSimple is a simple input method context supporting table-based input methods. It has a built-in table of compose sequences that is derived from the X11 Compose files.
GtkIMContextSimple reads additional compose sequences from the first of the following files that is found: ~/.config/gtk-3.0/Compose, ~/.XCompose, /usr/share/X11/locale/$locale/Compose (for locales that have a nontrivial Compose file). The syntax of these files is described in the Compose(5) manual page.
Unicode characters
GtkIMContextSimple also supports numeric entry of Unicode characters by typing Ctrl-Shift-u, followed by a hexadecimal Unicode codepoint. For example, Ctrl-Shift-u 1 2 3 Enter yields U+0123 LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH CEDILLA, i.e. ģ.
GtkIMContextClass parentClassGtkIMContextClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4An icon factory manages a collection of #GtkIconSet; a #GtkIconSet manages a set of variants of a particular icon (i.e. a #GtkIconSet contains variants for different sizes and widget states). Icons in an icon factory are named by a stock ID, which is a simple string identifying the icon. Each #GtkStyle has a list of #GtkIconFactory derived from the current theme; those icon factories are consulted first when searching for an icon. If the theme doesn’t set a particular icon, GTK+ looks for the icon in a list of default icon factories, maintained by [gtk.icon_factory.IconFactory.addDefault] and [gtk.icon_factory.IconFactory.removeDefault]. Applications with icons should add a default icon factory with their icons, which will allow themes to override the icons for the application.
To display an icon, always use [gtk.style.Style.lookupIconSet] on the widget that will display the icon, or the convenience function [gtk.widget.Widget.renderIcon]. These functions take the theme into account when looking up the icon to use for a given stock ID.
GtkIconFactory as GtkBuildable # {#GtkIconFactory-BUILDER-UI}
GtkIconFactory supports a custom <sources> element, which can contain multiple <source> elements. The following attributes are allowed:
- stock-id
The stock id of the source, a string. This attribute is mandatory
- filename
The filename of the source, a string. This attribute is optional
- icon-name
The icon name for the source, a string. This attribute is optional.
- size
Size of the icon, a #GtkIconSize enum value. This attribute is optional.
- direction
Direction of the source, a #GtkTextDirection enum value. This attribute is optional.
- state
State of the source, a #GtkStateType enum value. This attribute is optional.
A #GtkIconFactory UI definition fragment.
<object class="GtkIconFactory" id="iconfactory1">
<sources>
<source stock-id="apple-red" filename="apple-red.png"/>
</sources>
</object>
<object class="GtkWindow" id="window1">
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="apple_button">
<property name="label">apple-red</property>
<property name="use-stock">True</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>GObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Contains information found when looking up an icon in an icon theme.
#GtkIconTheme provides a facility for looking up icons by name and size. The main reason for using a name rather than simply providing a filename is to allow different icons to be used depending on what “icon theme” is selected by the user. The operation of icon themes on Linux and Unix follows the Icon Theme Specification There is a fallback icon theme, named hicolor, where applications should install their icons, but additional icon themes can be installed as operating system vendors and users choose.
Named icons are similar to the deprecated [Stock Items][gtkstock], and the distinction between the two may be a bit confusing. A few things to keep in mind:
- Stock images usually are used in conjunction with
[Stock Items][gtkstock], such as [gtk.types.STOCK_OK] or [gtk.types.STOCK_OPEN]. Named icons are easier to set up and therefore are more useful for new icons that an application wants to add, such as application icons or window icons.
- Stock images can only be loaded at the symbolic sizes defined
by the #GtkIconSize enumeration, or by custom sizes defined by [gtk.global.iconSizeRegister], while named icons are more flexible and any pixel size can be specified.
- Because stock images are closely tied to stock items, and thus
to actions in the user interface, stock images may come in multiple variants for different widget states or writing directions.
A good rule of thumb is that if there is a stock image for what you want to use, use it, otherwise use a named icon. It turns out that internally stock images are generally defined in terms of one or more named icons. (An example of the more than one case is icons that depend on writing direction; [gtk.types.STOCK_GO_FORWARD] uses the two themed icons “gtk-stock-go-forward-ltr” and “gtk-stock-go-forward-rtl”.)
In many cases, named themes are used indirectly, via #GtkImage or stock items, rather than directly, but looking up icons directly is also simple. The #GtkIconTheme object acts as a database of all the icons in the current theme. You can create new #GtkIconTheme objects, but it’s much more efficient to use the standard icon theme for the #GdkScreen so that the icon information is shared with other people looking up icons.
GError *error = NULL;
GtkIconTheme *icon_theme;
GdkPixbuf *pixbuf;
icon_theme = gtk_icon_theme_get_default ();
pixbuf = gtk_icon_theme_load_icon (icon_theme,
"my-icon-name", // icon name
48, // icon size
0, // flags
&error);
if (!pixbuf)
{
g_warning ("Couldn’t load icon: %s", error->message);
g_error_free (error);
}
else
{
// Use the pixbuf
g_object_unref (pixbuf);
}GObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkIconTheme * iconTheme) changedSignal emitted when the current icon theme is switched or GTK+ detects that a change has occurred in the contents of the current icon theme.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkIconView provides an alternative view on a #GtkTreeModel. It displays the model as a grid of icons with labels. Like #GtkTreeView, it allows to select one or multiple items (depending on the selection mode, see [gtk.icon_view.IconView.setSelectionMode]). In addition to selection with the arrow keys, #GtkIconView supports rubberband selection, which is controlled by dragging the pointer.
Note that if the tree model is backed by an actual tree store (as opposed to a flat list where the mapping to icons is obvious), #GtkIconView will only display the first level of the tree and ignore the tree’s branches.
CSS nodes
iconview.view
╰── [rubberband]GtkIconView has a single CSS node with name iconview and style class .view. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function(GtkIconView * iconView, GtkTreePath * path) itemActivatedvoid function(GtkIconView * iconView) selectionChangedvoid function(GtkIconView * iconView) selectAllvoid function(GtkIconView * iconView) unselectAllvoid function(GtkIconView * iconView) selectCursorItemvoid function(GtkIconView * iconView) toggleCursorItemgboolean function(GtkIconView * iconView, GtkMovementStep step, int count) moveCursorgboolean function(GtkIconView * iconView) activateCursorItemvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkImage widget displays an image. Various kinds of object can be displayed as an image; most typically, you would load a #GdkPixbuf ("pixel buffer") from a file, and then display that. There’s a convenience function to do this, [gtk.image.Image.newFromFile], used as follows:
GtkWidget *image;
image = gtk_image_new_from_file ("myfile.png"); If the file isn’t loaded successfully, the image will contain a “broken image” icon similar to that used in many web browsers. If you want to handle errors in loading the file yourself, for example by displaying an error message, then load the image with [gdkpixbuf.pixbuf.Pixbuf.newFromFile], then create the #GtkImage with [gtk.image.Image.newFromPixbuf].The image file may contain an animation, if so the #GtkImage will display an animation (#GdkPixbufAnimation) instead of a static image.
#GtkImage is a subclass of #GtkMisc, which implies that you can align it (center, left, right) and add padding to it, using #GtkMisc methods.
#GtkImage is a “no window” widget (has no #GdkWindow of its own), so by default does not receive events. If you want to receive events on the image, such as button clicks, place the image inside a #GtkEventBox, then connect to the event signals on the event box.
Handling button press events on a #GtkImage.
static gboolean
button_press_callback (GtkWidget *event_box,
GdkEventButton *event,
gpointer data)
{
g_print ("Event box clicked at coordinates %f,%f\n",
event->x, event->y);
// Returning TRUE means we handled the event, so the signal
// emission should be stopped (don’t call any further callbacks
// that may be connected). Return FALSE to continue invoking callbacks.
return TRUE;
}
static GtkWidget*
create_image (void)
{
GtkWidget *image;
GtkWidget *event_box;
image = gtk_image_new_from_file ("myfile.png");
event_box = gtk_event_box_new ();
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (event_box), image);
g_signal_connect (G_OBJECT (event_box),
"button_press_event",
G_CALLBACK (button_press_callback),
image);
return image;
}When handling events on the event box, keep in mind that coordinates in the image may be different from event box coordinates due to the alignment and padding settings on the image (see #GtkMisc). The simplest way to solve this is to set the alignment to 0.0 (left/top), and set the padding to zero. Then the origin of the image will be the same as the origin of the event box.
Sometimes an application will want to avoid depending on external data files, such as image files. GTK+ comes with a program to avoid this, called “gdk-pixbuf-csource”. This library allows you to convert an image into a C variable declaration, which can then be loaded into a #GdkPixbuf using [gdkpixbuf.pixbuf.Pixbuf.newFromInline].
CSS nodes
GtkImage has a single CSS node with the name image. The style classes may appear on image CSS nodes: .icon-dropshadow, .lowres-icon.
GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassGtkRendererCellAccessibleClass parentClassGtkMiscClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A GtkImageMenuItem is a menu item which has an icon next to the text label.
This is functionally equivalent to:
GtkWidget *box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 6);
GtkWidget *icon = gtk_image_new_from_icon_name ("folder-music-symbolic", GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU);
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new ("Music");
GtkWidget *menu_item = gtk_menu_item_new ();
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), icon);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), label);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (menu_item), box);
gtk_widget_show_all (menu_item);Note that the user may disable display of menu icons using the #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images setting, so make sure to still fill in the text label. If you want to ensure that your menu items show an icon you are strongly encouraged to use a #GtkMenuItem with a #GtkImage instead.
#GtkImageMenuItem has been deprecated since GTK+ 3.10. If you want to display an icon in a menu item, you should use #GtkMenuItem and pack a #GtkBox with a #GtkImage and a #GtkLabel instead. You should also consider using #GtkBuilder and the XML #GMenu description for creating menus, by following the [GMenu guide][https://developer.gnome.org/GMenu/]. You should consider using icons in menu items only sparingly, and for "objects" (or "nouns") elements only, like bookmarks, files, and links; "actions" (or "verbs") should not have icons.
Furthermore, if you would like to display keyboard accelerator, you must pack the accel label into the box using [gtk.box.Box.packEnd] and align the label, otherwise the accelerator will not display correctly. The following code snippet adds a keyboard accelerator to the menu item, with a key binding of Ctrl+M:
GtkWidget *box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 6);
GtkWidget *icon = gtk_image_new_from_icon_name ("folder-music-symbolic", GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU);
GtkWidget *label = gtk_accel_label_new ("Music");
GtkWidget *menu_item = gtk_menu_item_new ();
GtkAccelGroup *accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new ();
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), icon);
gtk_label_set_use_underline (GTK_LABEL (label), TRUE);
gtk_label_set_xalign (GTK_LABEL (label), 0.0);
gtk_widget_add_accelerator (menu_item, "activate", accel_group,
GDK_KEY_m, GDK_CONTROL_MASK, GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE);
gtk_accel_label_set_accel_widget (GTK_ACCEL_LABEL (label), menu_item);
gtk_box_pack_end (GTK_BOX (box), label, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (menu_item), box);
gtk_widget_show_all (menu_item);GtkMenuItemClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkInfoBar is a widget that can be used to show messages to the user without showing a dialog. It is often temporarily shown at the top or bottom of a document. In contrast to #GtkDialog, which has a action area at the bottom, #GtkInfoBar has an action area at the side.
The API of #GtkInfoBar is very similar to #GtkDialog, allowing you to add buttons to the action area with [gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.addButton] or [gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.newWithButtons]. The sensitivity of action widgets can be controlled with [gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.setResponseSensitive]. To add widgets to the main content area of a #GtkInfoBar, use [gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.getContentArea] and add your widgets to the container.
Similar to #GtkMessageDialog, the contents of a #GtkInfoBar can by classified as error message, warning, informational message, etc, by using [gtk.info_bar.InfoBar.setMessageType]. GTK+ may use the message type to determine how the message is displayed.
A simple example for using a #GtkInfoBar:
GtkWidget *widget, *message_label, *content_area;
GtkWidget *grid;
GtkInfoBar *bar;
// set up info bar
widget = gtk_info_bar_new ();
bar = GTK_INFO_BAR (widget);
grid = gtk_grid_new ();
gtk_widget_set_no_show_all (widget, TRUE);
message_label = gtk_label_new ("");
content_area = gtk_info_bar_get_content_area (bar);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (content_area),
message_label);
gtk_info_bar_add_button (bar,
_("_OK"),
GTK_RESPONSE_OK);
g_signal_connect (bar,
"response",
G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_hide),
NULL);
gtk_grid_attach (GTK_GRID (grid),
widget,
0, 2, 1, 1);
// ...
// show an error message
gtk_label_set_text (GTK_LABEL (message_label), "An error occurred!");
gtk_info_bar_set_message_type (bar,
GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR);
gtk_widget_show (bar);GtkInfoBar as GtkBuildable
The GtkInfoBar implementation of the GtkBuildable interface exposes the content area and action area as internal children with the names “content_area” and “action_area”.
GtkInfoBar supports a custom <action-widgets> element, which can contain multiple <action-widget> elements. The “response” attribute specifies a numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget (which should be a child of the dialogs @action_area).
CSS nodes
GtkInfoBar has a single CSS node with name infobar. The node may get one of the style classes .info, .warning, .error or .question, depending on the message type.
GtkBoxClass parentClassvoid function(GtkInfoBar * infoBar, int responseId) responsevoid function(GtkInfoBar * infoBar) closevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkInvisible widget is used internally in GTK+, and is probably not very useful for application developers.
It is used for reliable pointer grabs and selection handling in the code for drag-and-drop.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkLabel widget displays a small amount of text. As the name implies, most labels are used to label another widget such as a #GtkButton, a #GtkMenuItem, or a #GtkComboBox.
CSS nodes
label
├── [selection]
├── [link]
┊
╰── [link]GtkLabel has a single CSS node with the name label. A wide variety of style classes may be applied to labels, such as .title, .subtitle, .dim-label, etc. In the #GtkShortcutsWindow, labels are used wth the .keycap style class.
If the label has a selection, it gets a subnode with name selection.
If the label has links, there is one subnode per link. These subnodes carry the link or visited state depending on whether they have been visited.
GtkLabel as GtkBuildable
The GtkLabel implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <attributes> element, which supports any number of <attribute> elements. The <attribute> element has attributes named “name“, “value“, “start“ and “end“ and allows you to specify #PangoAttribute values for this label.
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying Pango attributes:
<object class="GtkLabel">
<attributes>
<attribute name="weight" value="PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD"/>
<attribute name="background" value="red" start="5" end="10"/>
</attributes>
</object>The start and end attributes specify the range of characters to which the Pango attribute applies. If start and end are not specified, the attribute is applied to the whole text. Note that specifying ranges does not make much sense with translatable attributes. Use markup embedded in the translatable content instead.
Mnemonics
Labels may contain “mnemonics”. Mnemonics are underlined characters in the label, used for keyboard navigation. Mnemonics are created by providing a string with an underscore before the mnemonic character, such as "_File", to the functions [gtk.label.Label.newWithMnemonic] or [gtk.label.Label.setTextWithMnemonic].
Mnemonics automatically activate any activatable widget the label is inside, such as a #GtkButton; if the label is not inside the mnemonic’s target widget, you have to tell the label about the target using [gtk.label.Label.setMnemonicWidget]. Here’s a simple example where the label is inside a button:
// Pressing Alt+H will activate this button
GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new ();
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (button), label);There’s a convenience function to create buttons with a mnemonic label already inside:
// Pressing Alt+H will activate this button
GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");To create a mnemonic for a widget alongside the label, such as a #GtkEntry, you have to point the label at the entry with [gtk.label.Label.setMnemonicWidget]:
// Pressing Alt+H will focus the entry
GtkWidget *entry = gtk_entry_new ();
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");
gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget (GTK_LABEL (label), entry);Markup (styled text)
To make it easy to format text in a label (changing colors, fonts, etc.), label text can be provided in a simple [markup format][PangoMarkupFormat].
Here’s how to create a label with a small font:
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), "<small>Small text</small>");(See [complete documentation][PangoMarkupFormat] of available tags in the Pango manual.)
The markup passed to [gtk.label.Label.setMarkup] must be valid; for example, literal <, > and & characters must be escaped as <, >, and &. If you pass text obtained from the user, file, or a network to [gtk.label.Label.setMarkup], you’ll want to escape it with [glib.global.markupEscapeText] or [glib.global.markupPrintfEscaped].
Markup strings are just a convenient way to set the #PangoAttrList on a label; [gtk.label.Label.setAttributes] may be a simpler way to set attributes in some cases. Be careful though; #PangoAttrList tends to cause internationalization problems, unless you’re applying attributes to the entire string (i.e. unless you set the range of each attribute to [0, G_MAXINT)). The reason is that specifying the start_index and end_index for a #PangoAttribute requires knowledge of the exact string being displayed, so translations will cause problems.
Selectable labels
Labels can be made selectable with [gtk.label.Label.setSelectable]. Selectable labels allow the user to copy the label contents to the clipboard. Only labels that contain useful-to-copy information — such as error messages — should be made selectable.
Text layout # {#label-text-layout}
A label can contain any number of paragraphs, but will have performance problems if it contains more than a small number. Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separators understood by Pango.
Labels can automatically wrap text if you call [gtk.label.Label.setLineWrap].
[gtk.label.Label.setJustify] sets how the lines in a label align with one another. If you want to set how the label as a whole aligns in its available space, see the #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties.
The #GtkLabel:width-chars and #GtkLabel:max-width-chars properties can be used to control the size allocation of ellipsized or wrapped labels. For ellipsizing labels, if either is specified (and less than the actual text size), it is used as the minimum width, and the actual text size is used as the natural width of the label. For wrapping labels, width-chars is used as the minimum width, if specified, and max-width-chars is used as the natural width. Even if max-width-chars specified, wrapping labels will be rewrapped to use all of the available width.
Note that the interpretation of #GtkLabel:width-chars and #GtkLabel:max-width-chars has changed a bit with the introduction of [width-for-height geometry management.][geometry-management]
Links
Since 2.18, GTK+ supports markup for clickable hyperlinks in addition to regular Pango markup. The markup for links is borrowed from HTML, using the <a> with “href“ and “title“ attributes. GTK+ renders links similar to the way they appear in web browsers, with colored, underlined text. The “title“ attribute is displayed as a tooltip on the link.
An example looks like this:
const gchar *text =
"Go to the"
"<a href=\"http://www.gtk.org title=\"<i>Our</i> website\">"
"GTK+ website</a> for more...";
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), text);It is possible to implement custom handling for links and their tooltips with the #GtkLabel::activate-link signal and the [gtk.label.Label.getCurrentUri] function.
GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassGtkMiscClass parentClassvoid function(GtkLabel * label, GtkMovementStep step, int count, gboolean extendSelection) moveCursorvoid function(GtkLabel * label) copyClipboardgboolean function(GtkLabel * label, const(char) * uri) activateLinkvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8#GtkLayout is similar to #GtkDrawingArea in that it’s a “blank slate” and doesn’t do anything except paint a blank background by default. It’s different in that it supports scrolling natively due to implementing #GtkScrollable, and can contain child widgets since it’s a #GtkContainer.
If you just want to draw, a #GtkDrawingArea is a better choice since it has lower overhead. If you just need to position child widgets at specific points, then #GtkFixed provides that functionality on its own.
When handling expose events on a #GtkLayout, you must draw to the #GdkWindow returned by [gtk.layout.Layout.getBinWindow], rather than to the one returned by [gtk.widget.Widget.getWindow] as you would for a #GtkDrawingArea.
GtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkLevelBar is a bar widget that can be used as a level indicator. Typical use cases are displaying the strength of a password, or showing the charge level of a battery.
Use [gtk.level_bar.LevelBar.setValue] to set the current value, and [gtk.level_bar.LevelBar.addOffsetValue] to set the value offsets at which the bar will be considered in a different state. GTK will add a few offsets by default on the level bar: #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW, #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_HIGH and #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_FULL, with values 0.25, 0.75 and 1.0 respectively.
Note that it is your responsibility to update preexisting offsets when changing the minimum or maximum value. GTK+ will simply clamp them to the new range.
Adding a custom offset on the bar
static GtkWidget *
create_level_bar (void)
{
GtkWidget *widget;
GtkLevelBar *bar;
widget = gtk_level_bar_new ();
bar = GTK_LEVEL_BAR (widget);
// This changes the value of the default low offset
gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar,
GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW,
0.10);
// This adds a new offset to the bar; the application will
// be able to change its color CSS like this:
//
// levelbar block.my-offset {
// background-color: magenta;
// border-style: solid;
// border-color: black;
// border-style: 1px;
// }
gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar, "my-offset", 0.60);
return widget;
}The default interval of values is between zero and one, but it’s possible to modify the interval using [gtk.level_bar.LevelBar.setMinValue] and [gtk.level_bar.LevelBar.setMaxValue]. The value will be always drawn in proportion to the admissible interval, i.e. a value of 15 with a specified interval between 10 and 20 is equivalent to a value of 0.5 with an interval between 0 and 1. When #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_MODE_DISCRETE is used, the bar level is rendered as a finite number of separated blocks instead of a single one. The number of blocks that will be rendered is equal to the number of units specified by the admissible interval.
For instance, to build a bar rendered with five blocks, it’s sufficient to set the minimum value to 0 and the maximum value to 5 after changing the indicator mode to discrete.
GtkLevelBar was introduced in GTK+ 3.6.
GtkLevelBar as GtkBuildable
The GtkLevelBar implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <offsets> element, which can contain any number of <offset> elements, each of which must have "name" and "value" attributes.
CSS nodes
levelbar[.discrete]
╰── trough
├── block.filled.level-name
┊
├── block.empty
┊GtkLevelBar has a main CSS node with name levelbar and one of the style classes .discrete or .continuous and a subnode with name trough. Below the trough node are a number of nodes with name block and style class .filled or .empty. In continuous mode, there is exactly one node of each, in discrete mode, the number of filled and unfilled nodes corresponds to blocks that are drawn. The block.filled nodes also get a style class .level-name corresponding to the level for the current value.
In horizontal orientation, the nodes are always arranged from left to right, regardless of text direction.
GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassGtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function(GtkLevelBar * self, const(char) * name) offsetChangedvoid *[16] paddingA GtkLinkButton is a #GtkButton with a hyperlink, similar to the one used by web browsers, which triggers an action when clicked. It is useful to show quick links to resources.
A link button is created by calling either [gtk.link_button.LinkButton.new_] or [gtk.link_button.LinkButton.newWithLabel]. If using the former, the URI you pass to the constructor is used as a label for the widget.
The URI bound to a GtkLinkButton can be set specifically using [gtk.link_button.LinkButton.setUri], and retrieved using [gtk.link_button.LinkButton.getUri].
By default, GtkLinkButton calls [gtk.global.showUriOnWindow] when the button is clicked. This behaviour can be overridden by connecting to the #GtkLinkButton::activate-link signal and returning true from the signal handler.
CSS nodes
GtkLinkButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain #GtkButton, it gets the .link style class.
GtkButtonAccessibleClass parentClassThe #GtkLinkButtonClass contains only private data.
GtkButtonClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkLinkButton * button) activateLinkclass handler for the #GtkLinkButton::activate-link signalvoid function() GtkPadding1void function() GtkPadding2void function() GtkPadding3void function() GtkPadding4A GtkListBox is a vertical container that contains GtkListBoxRow children. These rows can be dynamically sorted and filtered, and headers can be added dynamically depending on the row content. It also allows keyboard and mouse navigation and selection like a typical list.
Using GtkListBox is often an alternative to #GtkTreeView, especially when the list contents has a more complicated layout than what is allowed by a #GtkCellRenderer, or when the contents is interactive (i.e. has a button in it).
Although a #GtkListBox must have only #GtkListBoxRow children you can add any kind of widget to it via [gtk.container.Container.add], and a #GtkListBoxRow widget will automatically be inserted between the list and the widget.
#GtkListBoxRows can be marked as activatable or selectable. If a row is activatable, #GtkListBox::row-activated will be emitted for it when the user tries to activate it. If it is selectable, the row will be marked as selected when the user tries to select it.
The GtkListBox widget was added in GTK+ 3.10.
GtkListBox as GtkBuildable
The GtkListBox implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface supports setting a child as the placeholder by specifying “placeholder” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. See [gtk.list_box.ListBox.setPlaceholder] for info.
CSS nodes
list
╰── row[.activatable]GtkListBox uses a single CSS node named list. Each GtkListBoxRow uses a single CSS node named row. The row nodes get the .activatable style class added when appropriate.
GtkContainer parentInstanceGtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkListBox * box, GtkListBoxRow * row) rowSelectedClass handler for the #GtkListBox::row-selected signalvoid function(GtkListBox * box, GtkListBoxRow * row) rowActivatedClass handler for the #GtkListBox::row-activated signalvoid function(GtkListBox * box) activateCursorRowClass handler for the #GtkListBox::activate-cursor-row signalvoid function(GtkListBox * box) toggleCursorRowClass handler for the #GtkListBox::toggle-cursor-row signalvoid function(GtkListBox * box, GtkMovementStep step, int count) moveCursorClass handler for the #GtkListBox::move-cursor signalvoid function(GtkListBox * box) selectedRowsChangedClass handler for the #GtkListBox::selected-rows-changed signalvoid function(GtkListBox * box) selectAllClass handler for the #GtkListBox::select-all signalvoid function(GtkListBox * box) unselectAllClass handler for the #GtkListBox::unselect-all signalvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3GtkBin parentInstanceGtkContainerAccessible parentGtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkListBoxRow * row) activatevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2The #GtkListStore object is a list model for use with a #GtkTreeView widget. It implements the #GtkTreeModel interface, and consequentialy, can use all of the methods available there. It also implements the #GtkTreeSortable interface so it can be sorted by the view. Finally, it also implements the tree [drag and drop][gtk3-GtkTreeView-drag-and-drop] interfaces.
The #GtkListStore can accept most GObject types as a column type, though it can’t accept all custom types. Internally, it will keep a copy of data passed in (such as a string or a boxed pointer). Columns that accept #GObjects are handled a little differently. The #GtkListStore will keep a reference to the object instead of copying the value. As a result, if the object is modified, it is up to the application writer to call [gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.rowChanged] to emit the #GtkTreeModel::row_changed signal. This most commonly affects lists with #GdkPixbufs stored.
An example for creating a simple list store:
enum {
COLUMN_STRING,
COLUMN_INT,
COLUMN_BOOLEAN,
N_COLUMNS
};
{
GtkListStore *list_store;
GtkTreePath *path;
GtkTreeIter iter;
gint i;
list_store = gtk_list_store_new (N_COLUMNS,
G_TYPE_STRING,
G_TYPE_INT,
G_TYPE_BOOLEAN);
for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
{
gchar *some_data;
some_data = get_some_data (i);
// Add a new row to the model
gtk_list_store_append (list_store, &iter);
gtk_list_store_set (list_store, &iter,
COLUMN_STRING, some_data,
COLUMN_INT, i,
COLUMN_BOOLEAN, FALSE,
-1);
// As the store will keep a copy of the string internally,
// we free some_data.
g_free (some_data);
}
// Modify a particular row
path = gtk_tree_path_new_from_string ("4");
gtk_tree_model_get_iter (GTK_TREE_MODEL (list_store),
&iter,
path);
gtk_tree_path_free (path);
gtk_list_store_set (list_store, &iter,
COLUMN_BOOLEAN, TRUE,
-1);
}Performance Considerations
Internally, the #GtkListStore was implemented with a linked list with a tail pointer prior to GTK+ 2.6. As a result, it was fast at data insertion and deletion, and not fast at random data access. The #GtkListStore sets the #GTK_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST flag, which means that #GtkTreeIters can be cached while the row exists. Thus, if access to a particular row is needed often and your code is expected to run on older versions of GTK+, it is worth keeping the iter around.
Atomic Operations
It is important to note that only the methods [gtk.list_store.ListStore.insertWithValues] and [gtk.list_store.ListStore.insertWithValuesv] are atomic, in the sense that the row is being appended to the store and the values filled in in a single operation with regard to #GtkTreeModel signaling. In contrast, using e.g. [gtk.list_store.ListStore.append] and then [gtk.list_store.ListStore.set] will first create a row, which triggers the #GtkTreeModel::row-inserted signal on #GtkListStore. The row, however, is still empty, and any signal handler connecting to #GtkTreeModel::row-inserted on this particular store should be prepared for the situation that the row might be empty. This is especially important if you are wrapping the #GtkListStore inside a #GtkTreeModelFilter and are using a #GtkTreeModelFilterVisibleFunc. Using any of the non-atomic operations to append rows to the #GtkListStore will cause the #GtkTreeModelFilterVisibleFunc to be visited with an empty row first; the function must be prepared for that.
GtkListStore as GtkBuildable
The GtkListStore implementation of the GtkBuildable interface allows to specify the model columns with a <columns> element that may contain multiple <column> elements, each specifying one model column. The “type” attribute specifies the data type for the column.
Additionally, it is possible to specify content for the list store in the UI definition, with the <data> element. It can contain multiple <row> elements, each specifying to content for one row of the list model. Inside a <row>, the <col> elements specify the content for individual cells.
Note that it is probably more common to define your models in the code, and one might consider it a layering violation to specify the content of a list store in a UI definition, data, not presentation, and common wisdom is to separate the two, as far as possible.
An example of a UI Definition fragment for a list store:
<object class="GtkListStore">
<columns>
<column type="gchararray"/>
<column type="gchararray"/>
<column type="gint"/>
</columns>
<data>
<row>
<col id="0">John</col>
<col id="1">Doe</col>
<col id="2">25</col>
</row>
<row>
<col id="0">Johan</col>
<col id="1">Dahlin</col>
<col id="2">50</col>
</row>
</data>
</object>GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkLockButton is a widget that can be used in control panels or preference dialogs to allow users to obtain and revoke authorizations needed to operate the controls. The required authorization is represented by a #GPermission object. Concrete implementations of #GPermission may use PolicyKit or some other authorization framework. To obtain a PolicyKit-based #GPermission, use polkit_permission_new().
If the user is not currently allowed to perform the action, but can obtain the permission, the widget looks like this:

and the user can click the button to request the permission. Depending on the platform, this may pop up an authentication dialog or ask the user to authenticate in some other way. Once the user has obtained the permission, the widget changes to this:

and the permission can be dropped again by clicking the button. If the user is not able to obtain the permission at all, the widget looks like this:

If the user has the permission and cannot drop it, the button is hidden.
The text (and tooltips) that are shown in the various cases can be adjusted with the #GtkLockButton:text-lock, #GtkLockButton:text-unlock, #GtkLockButton:tooltip-lock, #GtkLockButton:tooltip-unlock and #GtkLockButton:tooltip-not-authorized properties.
GtkButtonAccessibleClass parentClassGtkButtonClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() reserved0void function() reserved1void function() reserved2void function() reserved3void function() reserved4void function() reserved5void function() reserved6void function() reserved7A #GtkMenu is a #GtkMenuShell that implements a drop down menu consisting of a list of #GtkMenuItem objects which can be navigated and activated by the user to perform application functions.
A #GtkMenu is most commonly dropped down by activating a #GtkMenuItem in a #GtkMenuBar or popped up by activating a #GtkMenuItem in another #GtkMenu.
A #GtkMenu can also be popped up by activating a #GtkComboBox. Other composite widgets such as the #GtkNotebook can pop up a #GtkMenu as well.
Applications can display a #GtkMenu as a popup menu by calling the [gtk.menu.Menu.popup] function. The example below shows how an application can pop up a menu when the 3rd mouse button is pressed.
Connecting the popup signal handler.
// connect our handler which will popup the menu
g_signal_connect_swapped (window, "button_press_event",
G_CALLBACK (my_popup_handler), menu);Signal handler which displays a popup menu.
static gint
my_popup_handler (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event)
{
GtkMenu *menu;
GdkEventButton *event_button;
g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_MENU (widget), FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
// The "widget" is the menu that was supplied when
// g_signal_connect_swapped() was called.
menu = GTK_MENU (widget);
if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS)
{
event_button = (GdkEventButton *) event;
if (event_button->button == GDK_BUTTON_SECONDARY)
{
gtk_menu_popup (menu, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL,
event_button->button, event_button->time);
return TRUE;
}
}
return FALSE;
}CSS nodes
menu
├── arrow.top
├── <child>
┊
├── <child>
╰── arrow.bottomThe main CSS node of GtkMenu has name menu, and there are two subnodes with name arrow, for scrolling menu arrows. These subnodes get the .top and .bottom style classes.
GtkMenuShellAccessibleClass parentClassThe #GtkMenuBar is a subclass of #GtkMenuShell which contains one or more #GtkMenuItems. The result is a standard menu bar which can hold many menu items.
CSS nodes
GtkMenuBar has a single CSS node with name menubar.
GtkMenuShellClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkMenuButton widget is used to display a popup when clicked on. This popup can be provided either as a #GtkMenu, a #GtkPopover or an abstract #GMenuModel.
The #GtkMenuButton widget can hold any valid child widget. That is, it can hold almost any other standard #GtkWidget. The most commonly used child is #GtkImage. If no widget is explicitely added to the #GtkMenuButton, a #GtkImage is automatically created, using an arrow image oriented according to #GtkMenuButton:direction or the generic “open-menu-symbolic” icon if the direction is not set.
The positioning of the popup is determined by the #GtkMenuButton:direction property of the menu button.
For menus, the #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties of the menu are also taken into account. For example, when the direction is [gtk.types.ArrowType.Down] and the horizontal alignment is [gtk.types.Align.Start], the menu will be positioned below the button, with the starting edge (depending on the text direction) of the menu aligned with the starting edge of the button. If there is not enough space below the button, the menu is popped up above the button instead. If the alignment would move part of the menu offscreen, it is “pushed in”.
Direction = Down
- halign = start

- halign = center

- halign = end

Direction = Up
- halign = start

- halign = center

- halign = end

Direction = Left
- valign = start

- valign = center

- valign = end

Direction = Right
- valign = start

- valign = center

- valign = end

CSS nodes
GtkMenuButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain #GtkButton, it gets the .popup style class.
GtkToggleButtonAccessibleClass parentClassGtkToggleButtonClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkMenuShellClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkMenuItem widget and the derived widgets are the only valid children for menus. Their function is to correctly handle highlighting, alignment, events and submenus.
As a GtkMenuItem derives from #GtkBin it can hold any valid child widget, although only a few are really useful.
By default, a GtkMenuItem sets a #GtkAccelLabel as its child. GtkMenuItem has direct functions to set the label and its mnemonic. For more advanced label settings, you can fetch the child widget from the GtkBin.
An example for setting markup and accelerator on a MenuItem:
GtkWidget *menu_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label ("Example Menu Item");
GtkWidget *child = gtk_bin_get_child (GTK_BIN (menu_item));
gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (child), "<i>new label</i> with <b>markup</b>");
gtk_accel_label_set_accel (GTK_ACCEL_LABEL (child), GDK_KEY_1, 0);GtkMenuItem as GtkBuildable
The GtkMenuItem implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface supports adding a submenu by specifying “submenu” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
An example of UI definition fragment with submenus:
<object class="GtkMenuItem">
<child type="submenu">
<object class="GtkMenu"/>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
menuitem
├── <child>
╰── [arrow.right]GtkMenuItem has a single CSS node with name menuitem. If the menuitem has a submenu, it gets another CSS node with name arrow, which has the .left or .right style class.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.uint hideOnActivateIf true, then we should always hide the menu when the [gtk.menu_item.MenuItem] is activated. Otherwise, it is up to the caller.void function(GtkMenuItem * menuItem) activateSignal emitted when the item is activated.void function(GtkMenuItem * menuItem) activateItemSignal emitted when the item is activated, but also if the menu item has a submenu.void function(GtkMenuItem * menuItem, int * requisition) toggleSizeRequestvoid function(GtkMenuItem * menuItem, int allocation) toggleSizeAllocatevoid function(GtkMenuItem * menuItem, const(char) * label) setLabelSets @text on the #GtkMenuItem labelconst(char) * function(GtkMenuItem * menuItem) getLabelGets @text from the #GtkMenuItem labelvoid function(GtkMenuItem * menuItem) selectSignal emitted when the item is selected.void function(GtkMenuItem * menuItem) deselectSignal emitted when the item is deselected.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkMenuShell is the abstract base class used to derive the #GtkMenu and #GtkMenuBar subclasses.
A #GtkMenuShell is a container of #GtkMenuItem objects arranged in a list which can be navigated, selected, and activated by the user to perform application functions. A #GtkMenuItem can have a submenu associated with it, allowing for nested hierarchical menus.
Terminology
A menu item can be “selected”, this means that it is displayed in the prelight state, and if it has a submenu, that submenu will be popped up.
A menu is “active” when it is visible onscreen and the user is selecting from it. A menubar is not active until the user clicks on one of its menuitems. When a menu is active, passing the mouse over a submenu will pop it up.
There is also is a concept of the current menu and a current menu item. The current menu item is the selected menu item that is furthest down in the hierarchy. (Every active menu shell does not necessarily contain a selected menu item, but if it does, then the parent menu shell must also contain a selected menu item.) The current menu is the menu that contains the current menu item. It will always have a GTK grab and receive all key presses.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassuint submenuPlacementvoid function(GtkMenuShell * menuShell) deactivatevoid function(GtkMenuShell * menuShell) selectionDonevoid function(GtkMenuShell * menuShell, GtkMenuDirectionType direction) moveCurrentvoid function(GtkMenuShell * menuShell, gboolean forceHide) activateCurrentvoid function(GtkMenuShell * menuShell) cancelvoid function(GtkMenuShell * menuShell, GtkWidget * menuItem) selectItemvoid function(GtkMenuShell * menuShell, GtkWidget * child, int position) insertint function(GtkMenuShell * menuShell) getPopupDelaygboolean function(GtkMenuShell * menuShell, int distance) moveSelectedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkMenuToolButton is a #GtkToolItem that contains a button and a small additional button with an arrow. When clicked, the arrow button pops up a dropdown menu.
Use [gtk.menu_tool_button.MenuToolButton.new_] to create a new #GtkMenuToolButton.
GtkMenuToolButton as GtkBuildable
The GtkMenuToolButton implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding a menu by specifying “menu” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
An example for a UI definition fragment with menus:
<object class="GtkMenuToolButton">
<child type="menu">
<object class="GtkMenu"/>
</child>
</object>GtkToolButtonClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkMenuToolButton * button) showMenuSignal emitted before the menu is shown.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkMessageDialog presents a dialog with some message text. It’s simply a convenience widget; you could construct the equivalent of #GtkMessageDialog from #GtkDialog without too much effort, but #GtkMessageDialog saves typing.
One difference from #GtkDialog is that #GtkMessageDialog sets the #GtkWindow:skip-taskbar-hint property to true, so that the dialog is hidden from the taskbar by default.
The easiest way to do a modal message dialog is to use [gtk.dialog.Dialog.run], though you can also pass in the [gtk.types.DialogFlags.Modal] flag, [gtk.dialog.Dialog.run] automatically makes the dialog modal and waits for the user to respond to it. [gtk.dialog.Dialog.run] returns when any dialog button is clicked.
An example for using a modal dialog:
GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window,
flags,
GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
"Error reading “%s”: %s",
filename,
g_strerror (errno));
gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);You might do a non-modal #GtkMessageDialog as follows:
An example for a non-modal dialog:
GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window,
flags,
GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
"Error reading “%s”: %s",
filename,
g_strerror (errno));
// Destroy the dialog when the user responds to it
// (e.g. clicks a button)
g_signal_connect_swapped (dialog, "response",
G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy),
dialog);GtkMessageDialog as GtkBuildable
The GtkMessageDialog implementation of the GtkBuildable interface exposes the message area as an internal child with the name “message_area”.
GtkDialogClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkMisc widget is an abstract widget which is not useful itself, but is used to derive subclasses which have alignment and padding attributes.
The horizontal and vertical padding attributes allows extra space to be added around the widget.
The horizontal and vertical alignment attributes enable the widget to be positioned within its allocated area. Note that if the widget is added to a container in such a way that it expands automatically to fill its allocated area, the alignment settings will not alter the widget's position.
Note that the desired effect can in most cases be achieved by using the #GtkWidget:halign, #GtkWidget:valign and #GtkWidget:margin properties on the child widget, so GtkMisc should not be used in new code. To reflect this fact, all #GtkMisc API has been deprecated.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkModelButton is a button class that can use a #GAction as its model. In contrast to #GtkToggleButton or #GtkRadioButton, which can also be backed by a #GAction via the #GtkActionable:action-name property, GtkModelButton will adapt its appearance according to the kind of action it is backed by, and appear either as a plain, check or radio button.
Model buttons are used when popovers from a menu model with [gtk.popover.Popover.newFromModel]; they can also be used manually in a #GtkPopoverMenu.
When the action is specified via the #GtkActionable:action-name and #GtkActionable:action-target properties, the role of the button (i.e. whether it is a plain, check or radio button) is determined by the type of the action and doesn't have to be explicitly specified with the #GtkModelButton:role property.
The content of the button is specified by the #GtkModelButton:text and #GtkModelButton:icon properties.
The appearance of model buttons can be influenced with the #GtkModelButton:centered and #GtkModelButton:iconic properties.
Model buttons have built-in support for submenus in #GtkPopoverMenu. To make a GtkModelButton that opens a submenu when activated, set the #GtkModelButton:menu-name property. To make a button that goes back to the parent menu, you should set the #GtkModelButton:inverted property to place the submenu indicator at the opposite side.
Example
<object class="GtkPopoverMenu">
<child>
<object class="GtkBox">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="margin">10</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkModelButton">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="action-name">view.cut</property>
<property name="text" translatable="yes">Cut</property>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkModelButton">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="action-name">view.copy</property>
<property name="text" translatable="yes">Copy</property>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkModelButton">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="action-name">view.paste</property>
<property name="text" translatable="yes">Paste</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
modelbutton
├── <child>
╰── checkmodelbutton
├── <child>
╰── radiomodelbutton
├── <child>
╰── arrowGtkModelButton has a main CSS node with name modelbutton, and a subnode, which will have the name check, radio or arrow, depending on the role of the button and whether it has a menu name set.
The subnode is positioned before or after the content nodes and gets the .left or .right style class, depending on where it is located.
button.model
├── <child>
╰── checkIconic model buttons (see #GtkModelButton:iconic) change the name of their main node to button and add a .model style class to it. The indicator subnode is invisible in this case.
This should not be accessed directly. Use the accessor functions below.
GMountOperationClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Virtual table for the D-Bus interface <link linkend="gdbus-interface-org-Gtk-MountOperationHandler.top_of_page">org.Gtk.MountOperationHandler</link>.
GTypeInterface parentIfaceThe parent interface.gboolean function(_GtkMountOperationHandler * object, GDBusMethodInvocation * invocation, const(char) * argId, const(char) * argMessage, const(char) * argIconName, const(char) * argDefaultUser, const(char) * argDefaultDomain, uint argFlags) handleAskPasswordHandler for the #GtkMountOperationHandler::handle-ask-password signal.gboolean function(_GtkMountOperationHandler * object, GDBusMethodInvocation * invocation, const(char) * argId, const(char) * argMessage, const(char) * argIconName, const(char *) * argChoices) handleAskQuestionHandler for the #GtkMountOperationHandler::handle-ask-question signal.gboolean function(_GtkMountOperationHandler * object, GDBusMethodInvocation * invocation) handleCloseHandler for the #GtkMountOperationHandler::handle-close signal.gboolean function(_GtkMountOperationHandler * object, GDBusMethodInvocation * invocation, const(char) * argId, const(char) * argMessage, const(char) * argIconName, GVariant * argApplicationPids, const(char *) * argChoices) handleShowProcessesHandler for the #GtkMountOperationHandler::handle-show-processes signal.The #_GtkMountOperationHandlerProxy structure contains only private data and should only be accessed using the provided API.
The #_GtkMountOperationHandlerSkeleton structure contains only private data and should only be accessed using the provided API.
Native dialogs are platform dialogs that don't use #GtkDialog or #GtkWindow. They are used in order to integrate better with a platform, by looking the same as other native applications and supporting platform specific features.
The #GtkDialog functions cannot be used on such objects, but we need a similar API in order to drive them. The #GtkNativeDialog object is an API that allows you to do this. It allows you to set various common properties on the dialog, as well as show and hide it and get a #GtkNativeDialog::response signal when the user finished with the dialog.
There is also a [gtk.native_dialog.NativeDialog.run] helper that makes it easy to run any native dialog in a modal way with a recursive mainloop, similar to [gtk.dialog.Dialog.run].
GObject parentInstanceGObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkNativeDialog * self, int responseId) responsevoid function(GtkNativeDialog * self) showvoid function(GtkNativeDialog * self) hidevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkNotebook widget is a #GtkContainer whose children are pages that can be switched between using tab labels along one edge.
There are many configuration options for GtkNotebook. Among other things, you can choose on which edge the tabs appear (see [gtk.notebook.Notebook.setTabPos]), whether, if there are too many tabs to fit the notebook should be made bigger or scrolling arrows added (see [gtk.notebook.Notebook.setScrollable]), and whether there will be a popup menu allowing the users to switch pages. (see [gtk.notebook.Notebook.popupEnable], [gtk.notebook.Notebook.popupDisable])
GtkNotebook as GtkBuildable
The GtkNotebook implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface supports placing children into tabs by specifying “tab” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. Note that the content of the tab must be created before the tab can be filled. A tab child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.
To add a child widget in the notebooks action area, specify "action-start" or “action-end” as the “type” attribute of the <child> element.
An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkNotebook:
<object class="GtkNotebook">
<child>
<object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-content">
<property name="label">Content</property>
</object>
</child>
<child type="tab">
<object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-tab">
<property name="label">Tab</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
notebook
├── header.top
│ ├── [<action widget>]
│ ├── tabs
│ │ ├── [arrow]
│ │ ├── tab
│ │ │ ╰── <tab label>
┊ ┊ ┊
│ │ ├── tab[.reorderable-page]
│ │ │ ╰── <tab label>
│ │ ╰── [arrow]
│ ╰── [<action widget>]
│
╰── stack
├── <child>
┊
╰── <child>GtkNotebook has a main CSS node with name notebook, a subnode with name header and below that a subnode with name tabs which contains one subnode per tab with name tab.
If action widgets are present, their CSS nodes are placed next to the tabs node. If the notebook is scrollable, CSS nodes with name arrow are placed as first and last child of the tabs node.
The main node gets the .frame style class when the notebook has a border (see [gtk.notebook.Notebook.setShowBorder]).
The header node gets one of the style class .top, .bottom, .left or .right, depending on where the tabs are placed. For reorderable pages, the tab node gets the .reorderable-page class.
A tab node gets the .dnd style class while it is moved with drag-and-drop.
The nodes are always arranged from left-to-right, regarldess of text direction.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function(GtkNotebook * notebook, GtkWidget * page, uint pageNum) switchPagegboolean function(GtkNotebook * notebook, gboolean moveFocus) selectPagegboolean function(GtkNotebook * notebook, GtkNotebookTab type) focusTabgboolean function(GtkNotebook * notebook, int offset) changeCurrentPagevoid function(GtkNotebook * notebook, GtkDirectionType direction) moveFocusOutgboolean function(GtkNotebook * notebook, GtkDirectionType direction, gboolean moveToLast) reorderTabint function(GtkNotebook * notebook, GtkWidget * child, GtkWidget * tabLabel, GtkWidget * menuLabel, int position) insertPageGtkNotebook * function(GtkNotebook * notebook, GtkWidget * page, int x, int y) createWindowvoid function(GtkNotebook * notebook, GtkWidget * child, uint pageNum) pageReorderedvoid function(GtkNotebook * notebook, GtkWidget * child, uint pageNum) pageRemovedvoid function(GtkNotebook * notebook, GtkWidget * child, uint pageNum) pageAddedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8AtkObjectClass parentClassGtkNumerableIcon is a subclass of #GEmblemedIcon that can show a number or short string as an emblem. The number can be overlayed on top of another emblem, if desired.
It supports theming by taking font and color information from a provided #GtkStyleContext; see [gtk.numerable_icon.NumerableIcon.setStyleContext].
Typical numerable icons:  
GtkOffscreenWindow is strictly intended to be used for obtaining snapshots of widgets that are not part of a normal widget hierarchy. Since #GtkOffscreenWindow is a toplevel widget you cannot obtain snapshots of a full window with it since you cannot pack a toplevel widget in another toplevel.
The idea is to take a widget and manually set the state of it, add it to a GtkOffscreenWindow and then retrieve the snapshot as a #cairo_surface_t or #GdkPixbuf.
GtkOffscreenWindow derives from #GtkWindow only as an implementation detail. Applications should not use any API specific to #GtkWindow to operate on this object. It should be treated as a #GtkBin that has no parent widget.
When contained offscreen widgets are redrawn, GtkOffscreenWindow will emit a #GtkWidget::damage-event signal.
GtkWindow parentObjectGtkWindowClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkOrientable interface is implemented by all widgets that can be oriented horizontally or vertically. Historically, such widgets have been realized as subclasses of a common base class (e.g #GtkBox/#GtkHBox/#GtkVBox or #GtkScale/#GtkHScale/#GtkVScale). #GtkOrientable is more flexible in that it allows the orientation to be changed at runtime, allowing the widgets to “flip”.
#GtkOrientable was introduced in GTK+ 2.16.
GTypeInterface baseIfaceGtkOverlay is a container which contains a single main child, on top of which it can place “overlay” widgets. The position of each overlay widget is determined by its #GtkWidget:halign and #GtkWidget:valign properties. E.g. a widget with both alignments set to [gtk.types.Align.Start] will be placed at the top left corner of the GtkOverlay container, whereas an overlay with halign set to [gtk.types.Align.Center] and valign set to [gtk.types.Align.End] will be placed a the bottom edge of the GtkOverlay, horizontally centered. The position can be adjusted by setting the margin properties of the child to non-zero values.
More complicated placement of overlays is possible by connecting to the #GtkOverlay::get-child-position signal.
An overlay’s minimum and natural sizes are those of its main child. The sizes of overlay children are not considered when measuring these preferred sizes.
GtkOverlay as GtkBuildable
The GtkOverlay implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports placing a child as an overlay by specifying “overlay” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
CSS nodes
GtkOverlay has a single CSS node with the name “overlay”. Overlay children whose alignments cause them to be positioned at an edge get the style classes “.left”, “.right”, “.top”, and/or “.bottom” according to their position.
GtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.gboolean function(GtkOverlay * overlay, GtkWidget * widget, GtkAllocation * allocation) getChildPositionSignal emitted to determine the position and size of any overlay child widgets.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8Struct defining a pad action entry.
GtkPadActionType typethe type of pad feature that will trigger this action entry.int indexthe 0-indexed button/ring/strip number that will trigger this action entry.int modethe mode that will trigger this action entry, or -1 for all modes.char * labelHuman readable description of this action entry, this string should be deemed user-visible.char * actionNameaction name that will be activated in the #GActionGroup.#GtkPadController is an event controller for the pads found in drawing tablets (The collection of buttons and tactile sensors often found around the stylus-sensitive area).
These buttons and sensors have no implicit meaning, and by default they perform no action, this event controller is provided to map those to #GAction objects, thus letting the application give those a more semantic meaning.
Buttons and sensors are not constrained to triggering a single action, some [gdk.types.InputSource.TabletPad] devices feature multiple "modes", all these input elements have one current mode, which may determine the final action being triggered. Pad devices often divide buttons and sensors into groups, all elements in a group share the same current mode, but different groups may have different modes. See [gdk.device_pad.DevicePad.getNGroups] and [gdk.device_pad.DevicePad.getGroupNModes].
Each of the actions that a given button/strip/ring performs for a given mode is defined by #GtkPadActionEntry, it contains an action name that will be looked up in the given #GActionGroup and activated whenever the specified input element and mode are triggered.
A simple example of #GtkPadController usage, assigning button 1 in all modes and pad devices to an "invert-selection" action:
GtkPadActionEntry *pad_actions[] = {
{ GTK_PAD_ACTION_BUTTON, 1, -1, "Invert selection", "pad-actions.invert-selection" },
…
};
…
action_group = g_simple_action_group_new ();
action = g_simple_action_new ("pad-actions.invert-selection", NULL);
g_signal_connect (action, "activate", on_invert_selection_activated, NULL);
g_action_map_add_action (G_ACTION_MAP (action_group), action);
…
pad_controller = gtk_pad_controller_new (window, action_group, NULL);The actions belonging to rings/strips will be activated with a parameter of type G_VARIANT_TYPE_DOUBLE bearing the value of the given axis, it is required that those are made stateful and accepting this #GVariantType.
See also [gtk.print_settings.PrintSettings.setPageRanges].
int startstart of page range.int endend of page range.A GtkPageSetup object stores the page size, orientation and margins. The idea is that you can get one of these from the page setup dialog and then pass it to the #GtkPrintOperation when printing. The benefit of splitting this out of the #GtkPrintSettings is that these affect the actual layout of the page, and thus need to be set long before user prints.
Margins ## {#print-margins}
The margins specified in this object are the “print margins”, i.e. the parts of the page that the printer cannot print on. These are different from the layout margins that a word processor uses; they are typically used to determine the minimal size for the layout margins.
To obtain a #GtkPageSetup use [gtk.page_setup.PageSetup.new_] to get the defaults, or use [gtk.global.printRunPageSetupDialog] to show the page setup dialog and receive the resulting page setup.
A page setup dialog
static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL;
static GtkPageSetup *page_setup = NULL;
static void
do_page_setup (void)
{
GtkPageSetup *new_page_setup;
if (settings == NULL)
settings = gtk_print_settings_new ();
new_page_setup = gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog (GTK_WINDOW (main_window),
page_setup, settings);
if (page_setup)
g_object_unref (page_setup);
page_setup = new_page_setup;
}Printing support was added in GTK+ 2.10.
#GtkPaned has two panes, arranged either horizontally or vertically. The division between the two panes is adjustable by the user by dragging a handle.
Child widgets are added to the panes of the widget with [gtk.paned.Paned.pack1] and [gtk.paned.Paned.pack2]. The division between the two children is set by default from the size requests of the children, but it can be adjusted by the user.
A paned widget draws a separator between the two child widgets and a small handle that the user can drag to adjust the division. It does not draw any relief around the children or around the separator. (The space in which the separator is called the gutter.) Often, it is useful to put each child inside a #GtkFrame with the shadow type set to [gtk.types.ShadowType.In] so that the gutter appears as a ridge. No separator is drawn if one of the children is missing.
Each child has two options that can be set, @resize and @shrink. If @resize is true, then when the #GtkPaned is resized, that child will expand or shrink along with the paned widget. If @shrink is true, then that child can be made smaller than its requisition by the user. Setting @shrink to false allows the application to set a minimum size. If @resize is false for both children, then this is treated as if @resize is true for both children.
The application can set the position of the slider as if it were set by the user, by calling [gtk.paned.Paned.setPosition].
CSS nodes
paned
├── <child>
├── separator[.wide]
╰── <child>GtkPaned has a main CSS node with name paned, and a subnode for the separator with name separator. The subnode gets a .wide style class when the paned is supposed to be wide.
In horizontal orientation, the nodes of the children are always arranged from left to right. So :first-child will always select the leftmost child, regardless of text direction.
Creating a paned widget with minimum sizes.
GtkWidget *hpaned = gtk_paned_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
GtkWidget *frame1 = gtk_frame_new (NULL);
GtkWidget *frame2 = gtk_frame_new (NULL);
gtk_frame_set_shadow_type (GTK_FRAME (frame1), GTK_SHADOW_IN);
gtk_frame_set_shadow_type (GTK_FRAME (frame2), GTK_SHADOW_IN);
gtk_widget_set_size_request (hpaned, 200, -1);
gtk_paned_pack1 (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame1, TRUE, FALSE);
gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame1, 50, -1);
gtk_paned_pack2 (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame2, FALSE, FALSE);
gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame2, 50, -1);GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkPaned * paned, gboolean reverse) cycleChildFocusgboolean function(GtkPaned * paned) toggleHandleFocusgboolean function(GtkPaned * paned, GtkScrollType scroll) moveHandlegboolean function(GtkPaned * paned, gboolean reverse) cycleHandleFocusgboolean function(GtkPaned * paned) acceptPositiongboolean function(GtkPaned * paned) cancelPositionvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkPaperSize handles paper sizes. It uses the standard called
PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG: Standard for Media Standardized Namesto name the paper sizes (and to get the data for the page sizes). In addition to standard paper sizes, GtkPaperSize allows to construct custom paper sizes with arbitrary dimensions.
The #GtkPaperSize object stores not only the dimensions (width and height) of a paper size and its name, it also provides default [print margins][print-margins].
Printing support has been added in GTK+ 2.10.
#GtkPlacesSidebar is a widget that displays a list of frequently-used places in the file system: the user’s home directory, the user’s bookmarks, and volumes and drives. This widget is used as a sidebar in #GtkFileChooser and may be used by file managers and similar programs.
The places sidebar displays drives and volumes, and will automatically mount or unmount them when the user selects them.
Applications can hook to various signals in the places sidebar to customize its behavior. For example, they can add extra commands to the context menu of the sidebar.
While bookmarks are completely in control of the user, the places sidebar also allows individual applications to provide extra shortcut folders that are unique to each application. For example, a Paint program may want to add a shortcut for a Clipart folder. You can do this with [gtk.places_sidebar.PlacesSidebar.addShortcut].
To make use of the places sidebar, an application at least needs to connect to the #GtkPlacesSidebar::open-location signal. This is emitted when the user selects in the sidebar a location to open. The application should also call [gtk.places_sidebar.PlacesSidebar.setLocation] when it changes the currently-viewed location.
CSS nodes
GtkPlacesSidebar uses a single CSS node with name placessidebar and style class .sidebar.
Among the children of the places sidebar, the following style classes can be used:
- .sidebar-new-bookmark-row for the 'Add new bookmark' row
- .sidebar-placeholder-row for a row that is a placeholder
- .has-open-popup when a popup is open for a row
Together with #GtkSocket, #GtkPlug provides the ability to embed widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that is transparent to the user. One process creates a #GtkSocket widget and passes the ID of that widget’s window to the other process, which then creates a #GtkPlug with that window ID. Any widgets contained in the #GtkPlug then will appear inside the first application’s window.
The communication between a #GtkSocket and a #GtkPlug follows the
XEmbed Protocol.This protocol has also been implemented in other toolkits, e.g. Qt, allowing the same level of integration when embedding a Qt widget in GTK+ or vice versa.
The #GtkPlug and #GtkSocket widgets are only available when GTK+ is compiled for the X11 platform and GDK_WINDOWING_X11 is defined. They can only be used on a #GdkX11Display. To use #GtkPlug and #GtkSocket, you need to include the gtk/gtkx.h header.
GtkWindowAccessibleClass parentClassGtkWindowClass parentClassvoid function(GtkPlug * plug) embeddedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkPopover is a bubble-like context window, primarily meant to provide context-dependent information or options. Popovers are attached to a widget, passed at construction time on [gtk.popover.Popover.new_], or updated afterwards through [gtk.popover.Popover.setRelativeTo], by default they will point to the whole widget area, although this behavior can be changed through [gtk.popover.Popover.setPointingTo].
The position of a popover relative to the widget it is attached to can also be changed through [gtk.popover.Popover.setPosition].
By default, #GtkPopover performs a GTK+ grab, in order to ensure input events get redirected to it while it is shown, and also so the popover is dismissed in the expected situations (clicks outside the popover, or the Esc key being pressed). If no such modal behavior is desired on a popover, [gtk.popover.Popover.setModal] may be called on it to tweak its behavior.
GtkPopover as menu replacement
GtkPopover is often used to replace menus. To facilitate this, it supports being populated from a #GMenuModel, using [gtk.popover.Popover.newFromModel]. In addition to all the regular menu model features, this function supports rendering sections in the model in a more compact form, as a row of icon buttons instead of menu items.
To use this rendering, set the ”display-hint” attribute of the section to ”horizontal-buttons” and set the icons of your items with the ”verb-icon” attribute.
<section>
<attribute name="display-hint">horizontal-buttons</attribute>
<item>
<attribute name="label">Cut</attribute>
<attribute name="action">app.cut</attribute>
<attribute name="verb-icon">edit-cut-symbolic</attribute>
</item>
<item>
<attribute name="label">Copy</attribute>
<attribute name="action">app.copy</attribute>
<attribute name="verb-icon">edit-copy-symbolic</attribute>
</item>
<item>
<attribute name="label">Paste</attribute>
<attribute name="action">app.paste</attribute>
<attribute name="verb-icon">edit-paste-symbolic</attribute>
</item>
</section>CSS nodes
GtkPopover has a single css node called popover. It always gets the .background style class and it gets the .menu style class if it is menu-like (e.g. #GtkPopoverMenu or created using [gtk.popover.Popover.newFromModel].
Particular uses of GtkPopover, such as touch selection popups or magnifiers in #GtkEntry or #GtkTextView get style classes like .touch-selection or .magnifier to differentiate from plain popovers.
GtkContainerAccessible parentGtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkPopoverMenu is a subclass of #GtkPopover that treats its children like menus and allows switching between them. It is meant to be used primarily together with #GtkModelButton, but any widget can be used, such as #GtkSpinButton or #GtkScale. In this respect, GtkPopoverMenu is more flexible than popovers that are created from a #GMenuModel with [gtk.popover.Popover.newFromModel].
To add a child as a submenu, set the #GtkPopoverMenu:submenu child property to the name of the submenu. To let the user open this submenu, add a #GtkModelButton whose #GtkModelButton:menu-name property is set to the name you've given to the submenu.
By convention, the first child of a submenu should be a #GtkModelButton to switch back to the parent menu. Such a button should use the #GtkModelButton:inverted and #GtkModelButton:centered properties to achieve a title-like appearance and place the submenu indicator at the opposite side. To switch back to the main menu, use "main" as the menu name.
Example
<object class="GtkPopoverMenu">
<child>
<object class="GtkBox">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="margin">10</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkModelButton">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="action-name">win.frob</property>
<property name="text" translatable="yes">Frob</property>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkModelButton">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="menu-name">more</property>
<property name="text" translatable="yes">More</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkBox">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="margin">10</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkModelButton">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="action-name">win.foo</property>
<property name="text" translatable="yes">Foo</property>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkModelButton">
<property name="visible">True</property>
<property name="action-name">win.bar</property>
<property name="text" translatable="yes">Bar</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>
<packing>
<property name="submenu">more</property>
</packing>
</child>
</object>Just like normal popovers created using gtk_popover_new_from_model, #GtkPopoverMenu instances have a single css node called "popover" and get the .menu style class.
A GtkPrintContext encapsulates context information that is required when drawing pages for printing, such as the cairo context and important parameters like page size and resolution. It also lets you easily create #PangoLayout and #PangoContext objects that match the font metrics of the cairo surface.
GtkPrintContext objects gets passed to the #GtkPrintOperation::begin-print, #GtkPrintOperation::end-print, #GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup and #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page signals on the #GtkPrintOperation.
Using GtkPrintContext in a #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page callback
static void
draw_page (GtkPrintOperation *operation,
GtkPrintContext *context,
int page_nr)
{
cairo_t *cr;
PangoLayout *layout;
PangoFontDescription *desc;
cr = gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context (context);
// Draw a red rectangle, as wide as the paper (inside the margins)
cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 1.0, 0, 0);
cairo_rectangle (cr, 0, 0, gtk_print_context_get_width (context), 50);
cairo_fill (cr);
// Draw some lines
cairo_move_to (cr, 20, 10);
cairo_line_to (cr, 40, 20);
cairo_arc (cr, 60, 60, 20, 0, M_PI);
cairo_line_to (cr, 80, 20);
cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0, 0);
cairo_set_line_width (cr, 5);
cairo_set_line_cap (cr, CAIRO_LINE_CAP_ROUND);
cairo_set_line_join (cr, CAIRO_LINE_JOIN_ROUND);
cairo_stroke (cr);
// Draw some text
layout = gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout (context);
pango_layout_set_text (layout, "Hello World! Printing is easy", -1);
desc = pango_font_description_from_string ("sans 28");
pango_layout_set_font_description (layout, desc);
pango_font_description_free (desc);
cairo_move_to (cr, 30, 20);
pango_cairo_layout_path (cr, layout);
// Font Outline
cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0.93, 1.0, 0.47);
cairo_set_line_width (cr, 0.5);
cairo_stroke_preserve (cr);
// Font Fill
cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0.0, 1.0);
cairo_fill (cr);
g_object_unref (layout);
}Printing support was added in GTK+ 2.10.
GtkPrintOperation is the high-level, portable printing API. It looks a bit different than other GTK+ dialogs such as the #GtkFileChooser, since some platforms don’t expose enough infrastructure to implement a good print dialog. On such platforms, GtkPrintOperation uses the native print dialog. On platforms which do not provide a native print dialog, GTK+ uses its own, see #GtkPrintUnixDialog.
The typical way to use the high-level printing API is to create a GtkPrintOperation object with [gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.new_] when the user selects to print. Then you set some properties on it, e.g. the page size, any #GtkPrintSettings from previous print operations, the number of pages, the current page, etc.
Then you start the print operation by calling [gtk.print_operation.PrintOperation.run]. It will then show a dialog, let the user select a printer and options. When the user finished the dialog various signals will be emitted on the #GtkPrintOperation, the main one being #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page, which you are supposed to catch and render the page on the provided #GtkPrintContext using Cairo.
The high-level printing API
static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL;
static void
do_print (void)
{
GtkPrintOperation *print;
GtkPrintOperationResult res;
print = gtk_print_operation_new ();
if (settings != NULL)
gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
g_signal_connect (print, "begin_print", G_CALLBACK (begin_print), NULL);
g_signal_connect (print, "draw_page", G_CALLBACK (draw_page), NULL);
res = gtk_print_operation_run (print, GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
GTK_WINDOW (main_window), NULL);
if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
{
if (settings != NULL)
g_object_unref (settings);
settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
}
g_object_unref (print);
}By default GtkPrintOperation uses an external application to do print preview. To implement a custom print preview, an application must connect to the preview signal. The functions [gtk.print_operation_preview.PrintOperationPreview.renderPage], [gtk.print_operation_preview.PrintOperationPreview.endPreview] and [gtk.print_operation_preview.PrintOperationPreview.isSelected] are useful when implementing a print preview.
GObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintOperationResult result) doneSignal emitted when the print operation run has finished doing everything required for printing.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context) beginPrintSignal emitted after the user has finished changing print settings in the dialog, before the actual rendering starts.gboolean function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context) paginateSignal emitted after the “begin-print” signal, but before the actual rendering starts.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context, int pageNr, GtkPageSetup * setup) requestPageSetupEmitted once for every page that is printed, to give the application a chance to modify the page setup.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context, int pageNr) drawPageSignal emitted for every page that is printed.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintContext * context) endPrintSignal emitted after all pages have been rendered.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation) statusChangedEmitted at between the various phases of the print operation.GtkWidget * function(GtkPrintOperation * operation) createCustomWidgetSignal emitted when displaying the print dialog.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkWidget * widget) customWidgetApplySignal emitted right before “begin-print” if you added a custom widget in the “create-custom-widget” handler.gboolean function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, GtkPrintContext * context, GtkWindow * parent) previewSignal emitted when a preview is requested from the native dialog.void function(GtkPrintOperation * operation, GtkWidget * widget, GtkPageSetup * setup, GtkPrintSettings * settings) updateCustomWidgetEmitted after change of selected printer.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, GtkPrintContext * context) readyvoid function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, GtkPrintContext * context, GtkPageSetup * pageSetup) gotPageSizevoid function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, int pageNr) renderPagegboolean function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview, int pageNr) isSelectedvoid function(GtkPrintOperationPreview * preview) endPreviewvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8A GtkPrintSettings object represents the settings of a print dialog in a system-independent way. The main use for this object is that once you’ve printed you can get a settings object that represents the settings the user chose, and the next time you print you can pass that object in so that the user doesn’t have to re-set all his settings.
Its also possible to enumerate the settings so that you can easily save the settings for the next time your app runs, or even store them in a document. The predefined keys try to use shared values as much as possible so that moving such a document between systems still works.
Printing support was added in GTK+ 2.10.
The #GtkProgressBar is typically used to display the progress of a long running operation. It provides a visual clue that processing is underway. The GtkProgressBar can be used in two different modes: percentage mode and activity mode.
When an application can determine how much work needs to take place (e.g. read a fixed number of bytes from a file) and can monitor its progress, it can use the GtkProgressBar in percentage mode and the user sees a growing bar indicating the percentage of the work that has been completed. In this mode, the application is required to call [gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar.setFraction] periodically to update the progress bar.
When an application has no accurate way of knowing the amount of work to do, it can use the #GtkProgressBar in activity mode, which shows activity by a block moving back and forth within the progress area. In this mode, the application is required to call [gtk.progress_bar.ProgressBar.pulse] periodically to update the progress bar.
There is quite a bit of flexibility provided to control the appearance of the #GtkProgressBar. Functions are provided to control the orientation of the bar, optional text can be displayed along with the bar, and the step size used in activity mode can be set.
CSS nodes
progressbar[.osd]
├── [text]
╰── trough[.empty][.full]
╰── progress[.pulse]GtkProgressBar has a main CSS node with name progressbar and subnodes with names text and trough, of which the latter has a subnode named progress. The text subnode is only present if text is shown. The progress subnode has the style class .pulse when in activity mode. It gets the style classes .left, .right, .top or .bottom added when the progress 'touches' the corresponding end of the GtkProgressBar. The .osd class on the progressbar node is for use in overlays like the one Epiphany has for page loading progress.
GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassGtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkRadioAction is similar to #GtkRadioMenuItem. A number of radio actions can be linked together so that only one may be active at any one time.
GtkToggleActionClass parentClassvoid function(GtkRadioAction * action, GtkRadioAction * current) changedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkRadioActionEntry structs are used with [gtk.action_group.ActionGroup.addRadioActions] to construct groups of radio actions.
const(char) * nameThe name of the action.const(char) * stockIdThe stock id for the action, or the name of an icon from the icon theme.const(char) * labelThe label for the action. This field should typically be marked for translation, see [gtk.action_group.ActionGroup.setTranslationDomain].const(char) * acceleratorThe accelerator for the action, in the format understood by [gtk.global.acceleratorParse].const(char) * tooltipThe tooltip for the action. This field should typically be marked for translation, see [gtk.action_group.ActionGroup.setTranslationDomain].int valueThe value to set on the radio action. See [gtk.radio_action.RadioAction.getCurrentValue].A single radio button performs the same basic function as a #GtkCheckButton, as its position in the object hierarchy reflects. It is only when multiple radio buttons are grouped together that they become a different user interface component in their own right.
Every radio button is a member of some group of radio buttons. When one is selected, all other radio buttons in the same group are deselected. A #GtkRadioButton is one way of giving the user a choice from many options.
Radio button widgets are created with [gtk.radio_button.RadioButton.new_], passing null as the argument if this is the first radio button in a group. In subsequent calls, the group you wish to add this button to should be passed as an argument. Optionally, [gtk.radio_button.RadioButton.newWithLabel] can be used if you want a text label on the radio button.
Alternatively, when adding widgets to an existing group of radio buttons, use [gtk.radio_button.RadioButton.newFromWidget] with a #GtkRadioButton that already has a group assigned to it. The convenience function [gtk.radio_button.RadioButton.newWithLabelFromWidget] is also provided.
To retrieve the group a #GtkRadioButton is assigned to, use [gtk.radio_button.RadioButton.getGroup].
To remove a #GtkRadioButton from one group and make it part of a new one, use [gtk.radio_button.RadioButton.setGroup].
The group list does not need to be freed, as each #GtkRadioButton will remove itself and its list item when it is destroyed.
CSS nodes
radiobutton
├── radio
╰── <child>A GtkRadioButton with indicator (see [gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.setMode]) has a main CSS node with name radiobutton and a subnode with name radio.
button.radio
├── radio
╰── <child>A GtkRadioButton without indicator changes the name of its main node to button and adds a .radio style class to it. The subnode is invisible in this case.
How to create a group of two radio buttons.
void create_radio_buttons (void) {
GtkWidget *window, *radio1, *radio2, *box, *entry;
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 2);
gtk_box_set_homogeneous (GTK_BOX (box), TRUE);
// Create a radio button with a GtkEntry widget
radio1 = gtk_radio_button_new (NULL);
entry = gtk_entry_new ();
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (radio1), entry);
// Create a radio button with a label
radio2 = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label_from_widget (GTK_RADIO_BUTTON (radio1),
"I’m the second radio button.");
// Pack them into a box, then show all the widgets
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), radio1);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), radio2);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box);
gtk_widget_show_all (window);
return;
}When an unselected button in the group is clicked the clicked button receives the #GtkToggleButton::toggled signal, as does the previously selected button. Inside the #GtkToggleButton::toggled handler, [gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.getActive] can be used to determine if the button has been selected or deselected.
GtkToggleButtonAccessibleClass parentClassGtkCheckButtonClass parentClassvoid function(GtkRadioButton * radioButton) groupChangedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A radio menu item is a check menu item that belongs to a group. At each instant exactly one of the radio menu items from a group is selected.
The group list does not need to be freed, as each #GtkRadioMenuItem will remove itself and its list item when it is destroyed.
The correct way to create a group of radio menu items is approximatively this:
How to create a group of radio menu items.
GSList *group = NULL;
GtkWidget *item;
gint i;
for (i = 0; i < 5; i++)
{
item = gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label (group, "This is an example");
group = gtk_radio_menu_item_get_group (GTK_RADIO_MENU_ITEM (item));
if (i == 1)
gtk_check_menu_item_set_active (GTK_CHECK_MENU_ITEM (item), TRUE);
}CSS nodes
menuitem
├── radio.left
╰── <child>GtkRadioMenuItem has a main CSS node with name menuitem, and a subnode with name radio, which gets the .left or .right style class.
GtkCheckMenuItemAccessibleClass parentClassGtkCheckMenuItemClass parentClassvoid function(GtkRadioMenuItem * radioMenuItem) groupChangedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkRadioToolButton is a #GtkToolItem that contains a radio button, that is, a button that is part of a group of toggle buttons where only one button can be active at a time.
Use [gtk.radio_tool_button.RadioToolButton.new_] to create a new GtkRadioToolButton. Use [gtk.radio_tool_button.RadioToolButton.newFromWidget] to create a new GtkRadioToolButton that is part of the same group as an existing GtkRadioToolButton.
CSS nodes
GtkRadioToolButton has a single CSS node with name toolbutton.
GtkToggleToolButton parentGtkToggleToolButtonClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkRange is the common base class for widgets which visualize an adjustment, e.g #GtkScale or #GtkScrollbar.
Apart from signals for monitoring the parameters of the adjustment, #GtkRange provides properties and methods for influencing the sensitivity of the “steppers”. It also provides properties and methods for setting a “fill level” on range widgets. See [gtk.range.Range.setFillLevel].
GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassGtkWidgetClass parentClasschar * sliderDetailchar * stepperDetailvoid function(GtkRange * range) valueChangedvoid function(GtkRange * range, double newValue) adjustBoundsvoid function(GtkRange * range, GtkScrollType scroll) moveSlidergboolean function(GtkRange * range, GtkScrollType scroll, double newValue) changeValuevoid function(GtkRange * range, GtkOrientation orientation, int * minimum, int * natural) getRangeSizeRequestvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3The #GtkRcStyle-struct is used to represent a set of information about the appearance of a widget. This can later be composited together with other #GtkRcStyle-struct<!-- -->s to form a #GtkStyle.
GObject parentInstancechar * nameNamechar *[5] bgPixmapNamePixmap namePangoFontDescription * fontDescA #PangoFontDescriptionGtkRcFlags[5] colorFlags#GtkRcFlagsGdkColor[5] fgForeground colorsGdkColor[5] bgBackground colorsGdkColor[5] textText colorsGdkColor[5] baseBase colorsint xthicknessX thicknessint ythicknessY thicknessGArray * rcPropertiesGSList * rcStyleListsGSList * iconFactoriesuint engineSpecifiedGObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.GtkRcStyle * function(GtkRcStyle * rcStyle) createRcStyleuint function(GtkRcStyle * rcStyle, GtkSettings * settings, GScanner * scanner) parsevoid function(GtkRcStyle * dest, GtkRcStyle * src) mergeGtkStyle * function(GtkRcStyle * rcStyle) createStylevoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkRecentAction represents a list of recently used files, which can be shown by widgets such as #GtkRecentChooserDialog or #GtkRecentChooserMenu.
To construct a submenu showing recently used files, use a #GtkRecentAction as the action for a <menuitem>. To construct a menu toolbutton showing the recently used files in the popup menu, use a #GtkRecentAction as the action for a <toolitem> element.
GtkActionClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkRecentChooser is an interface that can be implemented by widgets displaying the list of recently used files. In GTK+, the main objects that implement this interface are #GtkRecentChooserWidget, #GtkRecentChooserDialog and #GtkRecentChooserMenu.
Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
#GtkRecentChooserDialog is a dialog box suitable for displaying the recently used documents. This widgets works by putting a #GtkRecentChooserWidget inside a #GtkDialog. It exposes the #GtkRecentChooserIface interface, so you can use all the #GtkRecentChooser functions on the recent chooser dialog as well as those for #GtkDialog.
Note that #GtkRecentChooserDialog does not have any methods of its own. Instead, you should use the functions that work on a #GtkRecentChooser.
Typical usage ## {#gtkrecentchooser-typical-usage}
In the simplest of cases, you can use the following code to use a #GtkRecentChooserDialog to select a recently used file:
GtkWidget *dialog;
gint res;
dialog = gtk_recent_chooser_dialog_new ("Recent Documents",
parent_window,
_("_Cancel"),
GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
_("_Open"),
GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
NULL);
res = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
{
GtkRecentInfo *info;
GtkRecentChooser *chooser = GTK_RECENT_CHOOSER (dialog);
info = gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_item (chooser);
open_file (gtk_recent_info_get_uri (info));
gtk_recent_info_unref (info);
}
gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
GtkDialogClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GTypeInterface baseIfacegboolean function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser, const(char) * uri, GError * * _err) setCurrentUriSets uri as the current URI for chooser.char * function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser) getCurrentUriGets the URI currently selected by chooser.gboolean function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser, const(char) * uri, GError * * _err) selectUriSelects uri inside chooser.void function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser, const(char) * uri) unselectUriUnselects uri inside chooser.void function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser) selectAllSelects all the items inside chooser, if the chooser supports multiple selection.void function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser) unselectAllUnselects all the items inside chooser.GList * function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser) getItemsGets the list of recently used resources in form of #GtkRecentInfo objects.GtkRecentManager * function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser) getRecentManagerGets the #GtkRecentManager used by chooser.void function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser, GtkRecentFilter * filter) addFilterAdds filter to the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by chooser.void function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser, GtkRecentFilter * filter) removeFilterRemoves filter from the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by chooser.GSList * function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser) listFiltersGets the #GtkRecentFilter objects held by chooser.void function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser, GtkRecentSortFunc sortFunc, void * sortData, GDestroyNotify dataDestroy) setSortFuncSets the comparison function used when sorting to be sort_func.void function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser) itemActivatedSignal emitted when the user “activates” a recent item in the recent chooser.void function(GtkRecentChooser * chooser) selectionChangedSignal emitted when there is a change in the set of selected recently used resources.#GtkRecentChooserMenu is a widget suitable for displaying recently used files inside a menu. It can be used to set a sub-menu of a #GtkMenuItem using [gtk.menu_item.MenuItem.setSubmenu], or as the menu of a #GtkMenuToolButton.
Note that #GtkRecentChooserMenu does not have any methods of its own. Instead, you should use the functions that work on a #GtkRecentChooser.
Note also that #GtkRecentChooserMenu does not support multiple filters, as it has no way to let the user choose between them as the #GtkRecentChooserWidget and #GtkRecentChooserDialog widgets do. Thus using [gtk.recent_chooser.RecentChooser.addFilter] on a #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget will yield the same effects as using [gtk.recent_chooser.RecentChooser.setFilter], replacing any currently set filter with the supplied filter; [gtk.recent_chooser.RecentChooser.removeFilter] will remove any currently set #GtkRecentFilter object and will unset the current filter; [gtk.recent_chooser.RecentChooser.listFilters] will return a list containing a single #GtkRecentFilter object.
Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
GtkMenuClass parentClassvoid function() gtkRecent1void function() gtkRecent2void function() gtkRecent3void function() gtkRecent4#GtkRecentChooserWidget is a widget suitable for selecting recently used files. It is the main building block of a #GtkRecentChooserDialog. Most applications will only need to use the latter; you can use #GtkRecentChooserWidget as part of a larger window if you have special needs.
Note that #GtkRecentChooserWidget does not have any methods of its own. Instead, you should use the functions that work on a #GtkRecentChooser.
Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
GtkBoxClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Meta-data to be passed to [gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager.addFull] when registering a recently used resource.
char * displayNamea UTF-8 encoded string, containing the name of the recently used resource to be displayed, or null;char * descriptiona UTF-8 encoded string, containing a short description of the resource, or null;char * mimeTypethe MIME type of the resource;char * appNamethe name of the application that is registering this recently used resource;char * appExeccommand line used to launch this resource; may contain the “\`f`” and “\`u`” escape characters which will be expanded to the resource file path and URI respectively when the command line is...char * * groupsa vector of strings containing groups names;gboolean isPrivatewhether this resource should be displayed only by the applications that have registered it or not.A #GtkRecentFilter can be used to restrict the files being shown in a #GtkRecentChooser. Files can be filtered based on their name (with [gtk.recent_filter.RecentFilter.addPattern]), on their mime type (with [gtk.file_filter.FileFilter.addMimeType]), on the application that has registered them (with [gtk.recent_filter.RecentFilter.addApplication]), or by a custom filter function (with [gtk.recent_filter.RecentFilter.addCustom]).
Filtering by mime type handles aliasing and subclassing of mime types; e.g. a filter for text/plain also matches a file with mime type application/rtf, since application/rtf is a subclass of text/plain. Note that #GtkRecentFilter allows wildcards for the subtype of a mime type, so you can e.g. filter for image/\*.
Normally, filters are used by adding them to a #GtkRecentChooser, see [gtk.recent_chooser.RecentChooser.addFilter], but it is also possible to manually use a filter on a file with [gtk.recent_filter.RecentFilter.filter].
Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
GtkRecentFilter as GtkBuildable
The GtkRecentFilter implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding rules using the <mime-types>, <patterns> and <applications> elements and listing the rules within. Specifying a <mime-type>, <pattern> or <application> has the same effect as calling [gtk.recent_filter.RecentFilter.addMimeType], [gtk.recent_filter.RecentFilter.addPattern] or [gtk.recent_filter.RecentFilter.addApplication].
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying [gtk.recent_filter.RecentFilter] rules:
<object class="GtkRecentFilter">
<mime-types>
<mime-type>text/plain</mime-type>
<mime-type>image/png</mime-type>
</mime-types>
<patterns>
<pattern>*.txt</pattern>
<pattern>*.png</pattern>
</patterns>
<applications>
<application>gimp</application>
<application>gedit</application>
<application>glade</application>
</applications>
</object>A GtkRecentFilterInfo struct is used to pass information about the tested file to [gtk.recent_filter.RecentFilter.filter].
GtkRecentFilterFlags contains#GtkRecentFilterFlags to indicate which fields are set.const(char) * uriThe URI of the file being tested.const(char) * displayNameThe string that will be used to display the file in the recent chooser.const(char) * mimeTypeMIME type of the file.const(char *) * applicationsThe list of applications that have registered the file.const(char *) * groupsThe groups to which the file belongs to.int ageThe number of days elapsed since the file has been registered.#GtkRecentInfo-struct contains private data only, and should be accessed using the provided API.
#GtkRecentInfo constains all the meta-data associated with an entry in the recently used files list.
#GtkRecentManager provides a facility for adding, removing and looking up recently used files. Each recently used file is identified by its URI, and has meta-data associated to it, like the names and command lines of the applications that have registered it, the number of time each application has registered the same file, the mime type of the file and whether the file should be displayed only by the applications that have registered it.
The recently used files list is per user.
The #GtkRecentManager acts like a database of all the recently used files. You can create new #GtkRecentManager objects, but it is more efficient to use the default manager created by GTK+.
Adding a new recently used file is as simple as:
GtkRecentManager *manager;
manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default ();
gtk_recent_manager_add_item (manager, file_uri);The #GtkRecentManager will try to gather all the needed information from the file itself through GIO.
Looking up the meta-data associated with a recently used file given its URI requires calling [gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager.lookupItem]:
GtkRecentManager *manager;
GtkRecentInfo *info;
GError *error = NULL;
manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default ();
info = gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item (manager, file_uri, &error);
if (error)
{
g_warning ("Could not find the file: %s", error->message);
g_error_free (error);
}
else
{
// Use the info object
gtk_recent_info_unref (info);
}In order to retrieve the list of recently used files, you can use [gtk.recent_manager.RecentManager.getItems], which returns a list of #GtkRecentInfo-structs.
A #GtkRecentManager is the model used to populate the contents of one, or more #GtkRecentChooser implementations.
Note that the maximum age of the recently used files list is controllable through the #GtkSettings:gtk-recent-files-max-age property.
Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
#GtkRecentManagerClass contains only private data.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkRecentManager * manager) changedvoid function() GtkRecent1void function() GtkRecent2void function() GtkRecent3void function() GtkRecent4GtkCellAccessibleClass parentClassRepresents a request of a screen object in a given orientation. These are primarily used in container implementations when allocating a natural size for children calling. See [gtk.global.distributeNaturalAllocation].
void * dataA client pointerint minimumSizeThe minimum size needed for allocation in a given orientationint naturalSizeThe natural size for allocation in a given orientationA #GtkRequisition-struct represents the desired size of a widget. See [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management] for more information.
int widththe widget’s desired widthint heightthe widget’s desired heightThe GtkRevealer widget is a container which animates the transition of its child from invisible to visible.
The style of transition can be controlled with [gtk.revealer.Revealer.setTransitionType].
These animations respect the #GtkSettings:gtk-enable-animations setting.
CSS nodes
GtkRevealer has a single CSS node with name revealer.
The GtkRevealer widget was added in GTK+ 3.10.
GtkBin parentInstanceGtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.A GtkScale is a slider control used to select a numeric value. To use it, you’ll probably want to investigate the methods on its base class, #GtkRange, in addition to the methods for GtkScale itself. To set the value of a scale, you would normally use [gtk.range.Range.setValue]. To detect changes to the value, you would normally use the #GtkRange::value-changed signal.
Note that using the same upper and lower bounds for the #GtkScale (through the #GtkRange methods) will hide the slider itself. This is useful for applications that want to show an undeterminate value on the scale, without changing the layout of the application (such as movie or music players).
GtkScale as GtkBuildable
GtkScale supports a custom <marks> element, which can contain multiple <mark> elements. The “value” and “position” attributes have the same meaning as [gtk.scale.Scale.addMark] parameters of the same name. If the element is not empty, its content is taken as the markup to show at the mark. It can be translated with the usual ”translatable” and “context” attributes.
CSS nodes
scale[.fine-tune][.marks-before][.marks-after]
├── marks.top
│ ├── mark
│ ┊ ├── [label]
│ ┊ ╰── indicator
┊ ┊
│ ╰── mark
├── [value]
├── contents
│ ╰── trough
│ ├── slider
│ ├── [highlight]
│ ╰── [fill]
╰── marks.bottom
├── mark
┊ ├── indicator
┊ ╰── [label]
╰── markGtkScale has a main CSS node with name scale and a subnode for its contents, with subnodes named trough and slider.
The main node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scale is in 'fine-tuning' mode.
If the scale has an origin (see [gtk.scale.Scale.setHasOrigin]), there is a subnode with name highlight below the trough node that is used for rendering the highlighted part of the trough.
If the scale is showing a fill level (see [gtk.range.Range.setShowFillLevel]), there is a subnode with name fill below the trough node that is used for rendering the filled in part of the trough.
If marks are present, there is a marks subnode before or after the contents node, below which each mark gets a node with name mark. The marks nodes get either the .top or .bottom style class.
The mark node has a subnode named indicator. If the mark has text, it also has a subnode named label. When the mark is either above or left of the scale, the label subnode is the first when present. Otherwise, the indicator subnode is the first.
The main CSS node gets the 'marks-before' and/or 'marks-after' style classes added depending on what marks are present.
If the scale is displaying the value (see #GtkScale:draw-value), there is subnode with name value.
GtkRangeAccessibleClass parentClass#GtkScaleButton provides a button which pops up a scale widget. This kind of widget is commonly used for volume controls in multimedia applications, and GTK+ provides a #GtkVolumeButton subclass that is tailored for this use case.
CSS nodes
GtkScaleButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain #GtkButton, it gets the .scale style class.
The popup widget that contains the scale has a .scale-popup style class.
GtkButtonAccessibleClass parentClassGtkButtonClass parentClassvoid function(GtkScaleButton * button, double value) valueChangedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkRangeClass parentClasschar * function(GtkScale * scale, double value) formatValuevoid function(GtkScale * scale) drawValuevoid function(GtkScale * scale, int * x, int * y) getLayoutOffsetsvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkScrollable is an interface that is implemented by widgets with native scrolling ability.
To implement this interface you should override the #GtkScrollable:hadjustment and #GtkScrollable:vadjustment properties.
Creating a scrollable widget
All scrollable widgets should do the following.
- When a parent widget sets the scrollable child widget’s adjustments,
the widget should populate the adjustments’ #GtkAdjustment:lower, #GtkAdjustment:upper, #GtkAdjustment:step-increment, #GtkAdjustment:page-increment and #GtkAdjustment:page-size properties and connect to the #GtkAdjustment::value-changed signal.
- Because its preferred size is the size for a fully expanded widget,
the scrollable widget must be able to cope with underallocations. This means that it must accept any value passed to its #GtkWidgetClass.size_allocate() function.
- When the parent allocates space to the scrollable child widget,
the widget should update the adjustments’ properties with new values.
- When any of the adjustments emits the #GtkAdjustment::value-changed signal,
the scrollable widget should scroll its contents.
GTypeInterface baseIfacegboolean function(GtkScrollable * scrollable, GtkBorder * border) getBorderThe #GtkScrollbar widget is a horizontal or vertical scrollbar, depending on the value of the #GtkOrientable:orientation property.
Its position and movement are controlled by the adjustment that is passed to or created by [gtk.scrollbar.Scrollbar.new_]. See #GtkAdjustment for more details. The #GtkAdjustment:value field sets the position of the thumb and must be between #GtkAdjustment:lower and #GtkAdjustment:upper - #GtkAdjustment:page-size. The #GtkAdjustment:page-size represents the size of the visible scrollable area. The fields #GtkAdjustment:step-increment and #GtkAdjustment:page-increment fields are added to or subtracted from the #GtkAdjustment:value when the user asks to move by a step (using e.g. the cursor arrow keys or, if present, the stepper buttons) or by a page (using e.g. the Page Down/Up keys).
CSS nodes
scrollbar[.fine-tune]
╰── contents
├── [button.up]
├── [button.down]
├── trough
│ ╰── slider
├── [button.up]
╰── [button.down]GtkScrollbar has a main CSS node with name scrollbar and a subnode for its contents, with subnodes named trough and slider.
The main node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scrollbar is in 'fine-tuning' mode.
If steppers are enabled, they are represented by up to four additional subnodes with name button. These get the style classes .up and .down to indicate in which direction they are moving.
Other style classes that may be added to scrollbars inside #GtkScrolledWindow include the positional classes (.left, .right, .top, .bottom) and style classes related to overlay scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering).
GtkRange rangeGtkRangeClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkScrolledWindow is a container that accepts a single child widget and makes that child scrollable using either internally added scrollbars or externally associated adjustments.
Widgets with native scrolling support, i.e. those whose classes implement the #GtkScrollable interface, are added directly. For other types of widget, the class #GtkViewport acts as an adaptor, giving scrollability to other widgets. GtkScrolledWindow’s implementation of [gtk.container.Container.add] intelligently accounts for whether or not the added child is a #GtkScrollable. If it isn’t, #GtkScrolledWindow wraps the child in a #GtkViewport and adds that for you. Therefore, you can just add any child widget and not worry about the details.
If [gtk.container.Container.add] has added a #GtkViewport for you, you can remove both your added child widget from the #GtkViewport, and the #GtkViewport from the GtkScrolledWindow, like this:
GtkWidget *scrolled_window = gtk_scrolled_window_new (NULL, NULL);
GtkWidget *child_widget = gtk_button_new ();
// GtkButton is not a GtkScrollable, so GtkScrolledWindow will automatically
// add a GtkViewport.
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window),
child_widget);
// Either of these will result in child_widget being unparented:
gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window),
child_widget);
// or
gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window),
gtk_bin_get_child (GTK_BIN (scrolled_window)));Unless #GtkScrolledWindow:policy is GTK_POLICY_NEVER or GTK_POLICY_EXTERNAL, GtkScrolledWindow adds internal #GtkScrollbar widgets around its child. The scroll position of the child, and if applicable the scrollbars, is controlled by the #GtkScrolledWindow:hadjustment and #GtkScrolledWindow:vadjustment that are associated with the GtkScrolledWindow. See the docs on #GtkScrollbar for the details, but note that the “step_increment” and “page_increment” fields are only effective if the policy causes scrollbars to be present.
If a GtkScrolledWindow doesn’t behave quite as you would like, or doesn’t have exactly the right layout, it’s very possible to set up your own scrolling with #GtkScrollbar and for example a #GtkGrid.
Touch support
GtkScrolledWindow has built-in support for touch devices. When a touchscreen is used, swiping will move the scrolled window, and will expose 'kinetic' behavior. This can be turned off with the #GtkScrolledWindow:kinetic-scrolling property if it is undesired.
GtkScrolledWindow also displays visual 'overshoot' indication when the content is pulled beyond the end, and this situation can be captured with the #GtkScrolledWindow::edge-overshot signal.
If no mouse device is present, the scrollbars will overlayed as narrow, auto-hiding indicators over the content. If traditional scrollbars are desired although no mouse is present, this behaviour can be turned off with the #GtkScrolledWindow:overlay-scrolling property.
CSS nodes
GtkScrolledWindow has a main CSS node with name scrolledwindow.
It uses subnodes with names overshoot and undershoot to draw the overflow and underflow indications. These nodes get the .left, .right, .top or .bottom style class added depending on where the indication is drawn.
GtkScrolledWindow also sets the positional style classes (.left, .right, .top, .bottom) and style classes related to overlay scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering) on its scrollbars.
If both scrollbars are visible, the area where they meet is drawn with a subnode named junction.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.int scrollbarSpacinggboolean function(GtkScrolledWindow * scrolledWindow, GtkScrollType scroll, gboolean horizontal) scrollChildKeybinding signal which gets emitted when a keybinding that scrolls is pressed.void function(GtkScrolledWindow * scrolledWindow, GtkDirectionType direction) moveFocusOutKeybinding signal which gets emitted when focus is moved away from the scrolled window by a keybinding.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkSearchBar is a container made to have a search entry (possibly with additional connex widgets, such as drop-down menus, or buttons) built-in. The search bar would appear when a search is started through typing on the keyboard, or the application’s search mode is toggled on.
For keyboard presses to start a search, events will need to be forwarded from the top-level window that contains the search bar. See [gtk.search_bar.SearchBar.handleEvent] for example code. Common shortcuts such as Ctrl+F should be handled as an application action, or through the menu items.
You will also need to tell the search bar about which entry you are using as your search entry using [gtk.search_bar.SearchBar.connectEntry]. The following example shows you how to create a more complex search entry.
CSS nodes
GtkSearchBar has a single CSS node with name searchbar.
Creating a search bar
A simple exampleGtkBin parentGtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkSearchEntry is a subclass of #GtkEntry that has been tailored for use as a search entry.
It will show an inactive symbolic “find” icon when the search entry is empty, and a symbolic “clear” icon when there is text. Clicking on the “clear” icon will empty the search entry.
Note that the search/clear icon is shown using a secondary icon, and thus does not work if you are using the secondary icon position for some other purpose.
To make filtering appear more reactive, it is a good idea to not react to every change in the entry text immediately, but only after a short delay. To support this, #GtkSearchEntry emits the #GtkSearchEntry::search-changed signal which can be used instead of the #GtkEditable::changed signal.
The #GtkSearchEntry::previous-match, #GtkSearchEntry::next-match and #GtkSearchEntry::stop-search signals can be used to implement moving between search results and ending the search.
Often, GtkSearchEntry will be fed events by means of being placed inside a #GtkSearchBar. If that is not the case, you can use [gtk.search_entry.SearchEntry.handleEvent] to pass events.
GtkEntry parentGtkEntryClass parentClassvoid function(GtkSearchEntry * entry) searchChangedvoid function(GtkSearchEntry * entry) nextMatchvoid function(GtkSearchEntry * entry) previousMatchvoid function(GtkSearchEntry * entry) stopSearchGtkSeparator is a horizontal or vertical separator widget, depending on the value of the #GtkOrientable:orientation property, used to group the widgets within a window. It displays a line with a shadow to make it appear sunken into the interface.
CSS nodes
GtkSeparator has a single CSS node with name separator. The node gets one of the .horizontal or .vertical style classes.
GtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkSeparatorMenuItem is a separator used to group items within a menu. It displays a horizontal line with a shadow to make it appear sunken into the interface.
CSS nodes
GtkSeparatorMenuItem has a single CSS node with name separator.
GtkMenuItem menuItemGtkMenuItemClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkSeparatorToolItem is a #GtkToolItem that separates groups of other #GtkToolItems. Depending on the theme, a #GtkSeparatorToolItem will often look like a vertical line on horizontally docked toolbars.
If the #GtkToolbar child property “expand” is true and the property #GtkSeparatorToolItem:draw is false, a #GtkSeparatorToolItem will act as a “spring” that forces other items to the ends of the toolbar.
Use [gtk.separator_tool_item.SeparatorToolItem.new_] to create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem.
CSS nodes
GtkSeparatorToolItem has a single CSS node with name separator.
GtkToolItemClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkSettings provide a mechanism to share global settings between applications.
On the X window system, this sharing is realized by an
XSettingsmanager that is usually part of the desktop environment, along with utilities that let the user change these settings. In the absence of an Xsettings manager, GTK+ reads default values for settings from settings.ini files in /etc/gtk-3.0, $XDG_CONFIG_DIRS/gtk-3.0 and $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-3.0. These files must be valid key files (see #GKeyFile), and have a section called Settings. Themes can also provide default values for settings by installing a settings.ini file next to their gtk.css file.
Applications can override system-wide settings by setting the property of the GtkSettings object with [gobject.object.ObjectWrap.set]. This should be restricted to special cases though; GtkSettings are not meant as an application configuration facility. When doing so, you need to be aware that settings that are specific to individual widgets may not be available before the widget type has been realized at least once. The following example demonstrates a way to do this:
gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
// make sure the type is realized
g_type_class_unref (g_type_class_ref (GTK_TYPE_IMAGE_MENU_ITEM));
g_object_set (gtk_settings_get_default (), "gtk-enable-animations", FALSE, NULL);There is one GtkSettings instance per screen. It can be obtained with [gtk.settings.Settings.getForScreen], but in many cases, it is more convenient to use [gtk.widget.Widget.getSettings]. [gtk.settings.Settings.getDefault] returns the GtkSettings instance for the default screen.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4char * originOrigin should be something like “filename:linenumber” for rc files, or e.g. “XProperty” for other sources.GValue valueValid types are LONG, DOUBLE and STRING corresponding to the token parsed, or a GSTRING holding an unparsed statement#GtkShortcutLabel is a widget that represents a single keyboard shortcut or gesture in the user interface.
A GtkShortcutsGroup represents a group of related keyboard shortcuts or gestures. The group has a title. It may optionally be associated with a view of the application, which can be used to show only relevant shortcuts depending on the application context.
This widget is only meant to be used with #GtkShortcutsWindow.
A GtkShortcutsSection collects all the keyboard shortcuts and gestures for a major application mode. If your application needs multiple sections, you should give each section a unique #GtkShortcutsSection:section-name and a #GtkShortcutsSection:title that can be shown in the section selector of the GtkShortcutsWindow.
The #GtkShortcutsSection:max-height property can be used to influence how the groups in the section are distributed over pages and columns.
This widget is only meant to be used with #GtkShortcutsWindow.
A GtkShortcutsShortcut represents a single keyboard shortcut or gesture with a short text. This widget is only meant to be used with #GtkShortcutsWindow.
A GtkShortcutsWindow shows brief information about the keyboard shortcuts and gestures of an application. The shortcuts can be grouped, and you can have multiple sections in this window, corresponding to the major modes of your application.
Additionally, the shortcuts can be filtered by the current view, to avoid showing information that is not relevant in the current application context.
The recommended way to construct a GtkShortcutsWindow is with GtkBuilder, by populating a #GtkShortcutsWindow with one or more #GtkShortcutsSection objects, which contain #GtkShortcutsGroups that in turn contain objects of class #GtkShortcutsShortcut.
A simple example:

This example has as single section. As you can see, the shortcut groups are arranged in columns, and spread across several pages if there are too many to find on a single page.
The .ui file for this example can be found here.
An example with multiple views:

This example shows a #GtkShortcutsWindow that has been configured to show only the shortcuts relevant to the "stopwatch" view.
The .ui file for this example can be found here.
An example with multiple sections:

This example shows a #GtkShortcutsWindow with two sections, "Editor Shortcuts" and "Terminal Shortcuts".
The .ui file for this example can be found here.
GtkWindow windowGtkWindowClass parentClassvoid function(GtkShortcutsWindow * self) closevoid function(GtkShortcutsWindow * self) search#GtkSizeGroup provides a mechanism for grouping a number of widgets together so they all request the same amount of space. This is typically useful when you want a column of widgets to have the same size, but you can’t use a #GtkGrid widget.
In detail, the size requested for each widget in a #GtkSizeGroup is the maximum of the sizes that would have been requested for each widget in the size group if they were not in the size group. The mode of the size group (see [gtk.size_group.SizeGroup.setMode]) determines whether this applies to the horizontal size, the vertical size, or both sizes.
Note that size groups only affect the amount of space requested, not the size that the widgets finally receive. If you want the widgets in a #GtkSizeGroup to actually be the same size, you need to pack them in such a way that they get the size they request and not more. For example, if you are packing your widgets into a table, you would not include the [gtk.types.AttachOptions.Fill] flag.
#GtkSizeGroup objects are referenced by each widget in the size group, so once you have added all widgets to a #GtkSizeGroup, you can drop the initial reference to the size group with [gobject.object.ObjectWrap.unref]. If the widgets in the size group are subsequently destroyed, then they will be removed from the size group and drop their references on the size group; when all widgets have been removed, the size group will be freed.
Widgets can be part of multiple size groups; GTK+ will compute the horizontal size of a widget from the horizontal requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type [gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Horizontal] or [gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Both], and the vertical size from the vertical requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type [gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Vertical] or [gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Both].
Note that only non-contextual sizes of every widget are ever consulted by size groups (since size groups have no knowledge of what size a widget will be allocated in one dimension, it cannot derive how much height a widget will receive for a given width). When grouping widgets that trade height for width in mode [gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Vertical] or [gtk.types.SizeGroupMode.Both]: the height for the minimum width will be the requested height for all widgets in the group. The same is of course true when horizontally grouping width for height widgets.
Widgets that trade height-for-width should set a reasonably large minimum width by way of #GtkLabel:width-chars for instance. Widgets with static sizes as well as widgets that grow (such as ellipsizing text) need no such considerations.
GtkSizeGroup as GtkBuildable
Size groups can be specified in a UI definition by placing an <object> element with class="GtkSizeGroup" somewhere in the UI definition. The widgets that belong to the size group are specified by a <widgets> element that may contain multiple <widget> elements, one for each member of the size group. The ”name” attribute gives the id of the widget.
An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkSizeGroup:
<object class="GtkSizeGroup">
<property name="mode">GTK_SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTAL</property>
<widgets>
<widget name="radio1"/>
<widget name="radio2"/>
</widgets>
</object>GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Together with #GtkPlug, #GtkSocket provides the ability to embed widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that is transparent to the user. One process creates a #GtkSocket widget and passes that widget’s window ID to the other process, which then creates a #GtkPlug with that window ID. Any widgets contained in the #GtkPlug then will appear inside the first application’s window.
The socket’s window ID is obtained by using [gtk.socket.Socket.getId]. Before using this function, the socket must have been realized, and for hence, have been added to its parent.
Obtaining the window ID of a socket.
GtkWidget *socket = gtk_socket_new ();
gtk_widget_show (socket);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (parent), socket);
// The following call is only necessary if one of
// the ancestors of the socket is not yet visible.
gtk_widget_realize (socket);
g_print ("The ID of the sockets window is %#x\n",
gtk_socket_get_id (socket));Note that if you pass the window ID of the socket to another process that will create a plug in the socket, you must make sure that the socket widget is not destroyed until that plug is created. Violating this rule will cause unpredictable consequences, the most likely consequence being that the plug will appear as a separate toplevel window. You can check if the plug has been created by using [gtk.socket.Socket.getPlugWindow]. If it returns a non-null value, then the plug has been successfully created inside of the socket.
When GTK+ is notified that the embedded window has been destroyed, then it will destroy the socket as well. You should always, therefore, be prepared for your sockets to be destroyed at any time when the main event loop is running. To prevent this from happening, you can connect to the #GtkSocket::plug-removed signal.
The communication between a #GtkSocket and a #GtkPlug follows the
XEmbed Protocol.This protocol has also been implemented in other toolkits, e.g. Qt, allowing the same level of integration when embedding a Qt widget in GTK or vice versa.
The #GtkPlug and #GtkSocket widgets are only available when GTK+ is compiled for the X11 platform and GDK_WINDOWING_X11 is defined. They can only be used on a #GdkX11Display. To use #GtkPlug and #GtkSocket, you need to include the gtk/gtkx.h header.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function(GtkSocket * socket) plugAddedgboolean function(GtkSocket * socket) plugRemovedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkSpinButton is an ideal way to allow the user to set the value of some attribute. Rather than having to directly type a number into a #GtkEntry, GtkSpinButton allows the user to click on one of two arrows to increment or decrement the displayed value. A value can still be typed in, with the bonus that it can be checked to ensure it is in a given range.
The main properties of a GtkSpinButton are through an adjustment. See the #GtkAdjustment section for more details about an adjustment's properties. Note that GtkSpinButton will by default make its entry large enough to accomodate the lower and upper bounds of the adjustment, which can lead to surprising results. Best practice is to set both the #GtkEntry:width-chars and #GtkEntry:max-width-chars poperties to the desired number of characters to display in the entry.
CSS nodes
spinbutton.horizontal
├── undershoot.left
├── undershoot.right
├── entry
│ ╰── ...
├── button.down
╰── button.upspinbutton.vertical
├── undershoot.left
├── undershoot.right
├── button.up
├── entry
│ ╰── ...
╰── button.downGtkSpinButtons main CSS node has the name spinbutton. It creates subnodes for the entry and the two buttons, with these names. The button nodes have the style classes .up and .down. The GtkEntry subnodes (if present) are put below the entry node. The orientation of the spin button is reflected in the .vertical or .horizontal style class on the main node.
Using a GtkSpinButton to get an integer
// Provides a function to retrieve an integer value from a GtkSpinButton
// and creates a spin button to model percentage values.
gint
grab_int_value (GtkSpinButton *button,
gpointer user_data)
{
return gtk_spin_button_get_value_as_int (button);
}
void
create_integer_spin_button (void)
{
GtkWidget *window, *button;
GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (50.0, 0.0, 100.0, 1.0, 5.0, 0.0);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_container_set_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 5);
// creates the spinbutton, with no decimal places
button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 1.0, 0);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
gtk_widget_show_all (window);
}Using a GtkSpinButton to get a floating point value
// Provides a function to retrieve a floating point value from a
// GtkSpinButton, and creates a high precision spin button.
gfloat
grab_float_value (GtkSpinButton *button,
gpointer user_data)
{
return gtk_spin_button_get_value (button);
}
void
create_floating_spin_button (void)
{
GtkWidget *window, *button;
GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (2.500, 0.0, 5.0, 0.001, 0.1, 0.0);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_container_set_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 5);
// creates the spinbutton, with three decimal places
button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 0.001, 3);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
gtk_widget_show_all (window);
}GtkEntryAccessibleClass parentClassGtkEntryClass parentClassint function(GtkSpinButton * spinButton, double * newValue) inputint function(GtkSpinButton * spinButton) outputvoid function(GtkSpinButton * spinButton) valueChangedvoid function(GtkSpinButton * spinButton, GtkScrollType scroll) changeValuevoid function(GtkSpinButton * spinButton) wrappedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A GtkSpinner widget displays an icon-size spinning animation. It is often used as an alternative to a #GtkProgressBar for displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.
To start the animation, use [gtk.spinner.Spinner.start], to stop it use [gtk.spinner.Spinner.stop].
CSS nodes
GtkSpinner has a single CSS node with the name spinner. When the animation is active, the :checked pseudoclass is added to this node.
GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassGtkWidgetClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The GtkStack widget is a container which only shows one of its children at a time. In contrast to GtkNotebook, GtkStack does not provide a means for users to change the visible child. Instead, the #GtkStackSwitcher widget can be used with GtkStack to provide this functionality.
Transitions between pages can be animated as slides or fades. This can be controlled with [gtk.stack.Stack.setTransitionType]. These animations respect the #GtkSettings:gtk-enable-animations setting.
The GtkStack widget was added in GTK+ 3.10.
CSS nodes
GtkStack has a single CSS node named stack.
GtkContainer parentInstanceGtkContainerAccessible parentGtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassA GtkStackSidebar enables you to quickly and easily provide a consistent "sidebar" object for your user interface.
In order to use a GtkStackSidebar, you simply use a GtkStack to organize your UI flow, and add the sidebar to your sidebar area. You can use [gtk.stack_sidebar.StackSidebar.setStack] to connect the #GtkStackSidebar to the #GtkStack.
CSS nodes
GtkStackSidebar has a single CSS node with name stacksidebar and style class .sidebar.
When circumstances require it, GtkStackSidebar adds the .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the stack pages.
GtkBin parentGtkBinClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The GtkStackSwitcher widget acts as a controller for a #GtkStack; it shows a row of buttons to switch between the various pages of the associated stack widget.
All the content for the buttons comes from the child properties of the #GtkStack; the button visibility in a #GtkStackSwitcher widget is controlled by the visibility of the child in the #GtkStack.
It is possible to associate multiple #GtkStackSwitcher widgets with the same #GtkStack widget.
The GtkStackSwitcher widget was added in 3.10.
CSS nodes
GtkStackSwitcher has a single CSS node named stackswitcher and style class .stack-switcher.
When circumstances require it, GtkStackSwitcher adds the .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the stack pages.
GtkBox widgetGtkBoxClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The “system tray” or notification area is normally used for transient icons that indicate some special state. For example, a system tray icon might appear to tell the user that they have new mail, or have an incoming instant message, or something along those lines. The basic idea is that creating an icon in the notification area is less annoying than popping up a dialog.
A #GtkStatusIcon object can be used to display an icon in a “system tray”. The icon can have a tooltip, and the user can interact with it by activating it or popping up a context menu.
It is very important to notice that status icons depend on the existence of a notification area being available to the user; you should not use status icons as the only way to convey critical information regarding your application, as the notification area may not exist on the user's environment, or may have been removed. You should always check that a status icon has been embedded into a notification area by using [gtk.status_icon.StatusIcon.isEmbedded], and gracefully recover if the function returns false.
On X11, the implementation follows the
FreeDesktop System Tray Specification.Implementations of the “tray” side of this specification can be found e.g. in the GNOME 2 and KDE panel applications.
Note that a GtkStatusIcon is not a widget, but just a #GObject. Making it a widget would be impractical, since the system tray on Windows doesn’t allow to embed arbitrary widgets.
GtkStatusIcon has been deprecated in 3.14. You should consider using notifications or more modern platform-specific APIs instead. GLib provides the #GNotification API which works well with #GtkApplication on multiple platforms and environments, and should be the preferred mechanism to notify the users of transient status updates. See this HowDoI for code examples.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkStatusIcon * statusIcon) activatevoid function(GtkStatusIcon * statusIcon, uint button, uint activateTime) popupMenugboolean function(GtkStatusIcon * statusIcon, int size) sizeChangedgboolean function(GtkStatusIcon * statusIcon, GdkEventButton * event) buttonPressEventgboolean function(GtkStatusIcon * statusIcon, GdkEventButton * event) buttonReleaseEventgboolean function(GtkStatusIcon * statusIcon, GdkEventScroll * event) scrollEventgboolean function(GtkStatusIcon * statusIcon, int x, int y, gboolean keyboardMode, GtkTooltip * tooltip) queryTooltipvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkStatusbar is usually placed along the bottom of an application's main #GtkWindow. It may provide a regular commentary of the application's status (as is usually the case in a web browser, for example), or may be used to simply output a message when the status changes, (when an upload is complete in an FTP client, for example).
Status bars in GTK+ maintain a stack of messages. The message at the top of the each bar’s stack is the one that will currently be displayed.
Any messages added to a statusbar’s stack must specify a context id that is used to uniquely identify the source of a message. This context id can be generated by [gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.getContextId], given a message and the statusbar that it will be added to. Note that messages are stored in a stack, and when choosing which message to display, the stack structure is adhered to, regardless of the context identifier of a message.
One could say that a statusbar maintains one stack of messages for display purposes, but allows multiple message producers to maintain sub-stacks of the messages they produced (via context ids).
Status bars are created using [gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.new_].
Messages are added to the bar’s stack with [gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.push].
The message at the top of the stack can be removed using [gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.pop]. A message can be removed from anywhere in the stack if its message id was recorded at the time it was added. This is done using [gtk.statusbar.Statusbar.remove].
CSS node
GtkStatusbar has a single CSS node with name statusbar.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBoxClass parentClassvoid * reservedvoid function(GtkStatusbar * statusbar, uint contextId, const(char) * text) textPushedvoid function(GtkStatusbar * statusbar, uint contextId, const(char) * text) textPoppedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4char * stockIdIdentifier.char * labelUser visible label.GdkModifierType modifierModifier type for keyboard acceleratoruint keyvalKeyboard acceleratorchar * translationDomainTranslation domain of the menu or toolbar itemA #GtkStyle object encapsulates the information that provides the look and feel for a widget.
In GTK+ 3.0, GtkStyle has been deprecated and replaced by#GtkStyleContext.
Each #GtkWidget has an associated #GtkStyle object that is used when rendering that widget. Also, a #GtkStyle holds information for the five possible widget states though not every widget supports all five states; see #GtkStateType.
Usually the #GtkStyle for a widget is the same as the default style that is set by GTK+ and modified the theme engine.
Usually applications should not need to use or modify the #GtkStyle of their widgets.
GObject parentInstanceGdkColor[5] fgSet of foreground #GdkColorGdkColor[5] bgSet of background #GdkColorGdkColor[5] lightSet of light #GdkColorGdkColor[5] darkSet of dark #GdkColorGdkColor[5] midSet of mid #GdkColorGdkColor[5] textSet of text #GdkColorGdkColor[5] baseSet of base #GdkColorGdkColor[5] textAaColor halfway between text/baseGdkColor black#GdkColor to use for blackGdkColor white#GdkColor to use for whitePangoFontDescription * fontDesc#PangoFontDescriptionint xthicknessThickness in X directionint ythicknessThickness in Y directioncairo_pattern_t *[5] backgroundSet of background #cairopatterntint attachCountGdkVisual * visualPangoFontDescription * privateFontDescGtkRcStyle * rcStyleGSList * stylesGArray * propertyCacheGSList * iconFactoriesGObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkStyle * style) realizevoid function(GtkStyle * style) unrealizevoid function(GtkStyle * style, GtkRcStyle * rcStyle) initFromRcvoid function(GtkStyle * style, GdkWindow * window, GtkStateType stateType) setBackgroundGdkPixbuf * function(GtkStyle * style, const(GtkIconSource) * source, GtkTextDirection direction, GtkStateType state, GtkIconSize size, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail) renderIconvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x1, int x2, int y) drawHlinevoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int y1, int y2, int x) drawVlinevoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawShadowvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, GtkArrowType arrowType, gboolean fill, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawArrowvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawDiamondvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawBoxvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawFlatBoxvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawCheckvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawOptionvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawTabvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, GtkPositionType gapSide, int gapX, int gapWidth) drawShadowGapvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, GtkPositionType gapSide, int gapX, int gapWidth) drawBoxGapvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, GtkPositionType gapSide) drawExtensionvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawFocusvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, GtkOrientation orientation) drawSlidervoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkShadowType shadowType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, int width, int height, GtkOrientation orientation) drawHandlevoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, GtkExpanderStyle expanderStyle) drawExpandervoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, gboolean useText, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, int x, int y, PangoLayout * layout) drawLayoutvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, GdkWindowEdge edge, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawResizeGripvoid function(GtkStyle * style, cairo_t * cr, GtkStateType stateType, GtkWidget * widget, const(char) * detail, uint step, int x, int y, int width, int height) drawSpinnervoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8void function() GtkReserved9void function() GtkReserved10void function() GtkReserved11#GtkStyleContext is an object that stores styling information affecting a widget defined by #GtkWidgetPath.
In order to construct the final style information, #GtkStyleContext queries information from all attached #GtkStyleProviders. Style providers can be either attached explicitly to the context through [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProvider], or to the screen through [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProviderForScreen]. The resulting style is a combination of all providers’ information in priority order.
For GTK+ widgets, any #GtkStyleContext returned by [gtk.widget.Widget.getStyleContext] will already have a #GtkWidgetPath, a #GdkScreen and RTL/LTR information set. The style context will also be updated automatically if any of these settings change on the widget.
If you are using the theming layer standalone, you will need to set a widget path and a screen yourself to the created style context through [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.setPath] and possibly [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.setScreen]. See the “Foreign drawing“ example in gtk3-demo.
Style Classes # {#gtkstylecontext-classes}
Widgets can add style classes to their context, which can be used to associate different styles by class. The documentation for individual widgets lists which style classes it uses itself, and which style classes may be added by applications to affect their appearance.
GTK+ defines macros for a number of style classes.
Style Regions
Widgets can also add regions with flags to their context. This feature is deprecated and will be removed in a future GTK+ update. Please use style classes instead.
GTK+ defines macros for a number of style regions.
Custom styling in UI libraries and applications
If you are developing a library with custom #GtkWidgets that render differently than standard components, you may need to add a #GtkStyleProvider yourself with the [gtk.types.STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK] priority, either a #GtkCssProvider or a custom object implementing the #GtkStyleProvider interface. This way themes may still attempt to style your UI elements in a different way if needed so.
If you are using custom styling on an applications, you probably want then to make your style information prevail to the theme’s, so you must use a #GtkStyleProvider with the [gtk.types.STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION] priority, keep in mind that the user settings in XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-3.0/gtk.css will still take precedence over your changes, as it uses the [gtk.types.STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER] priority.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkStyleContext * context) changedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkStyleProperties provides the storage for style information that is used by #GtkStyleContext and other #GtkStyleProvider implementations.
Before style properties can be stored in GtkStyleProperties, they must be registered with [gtk.style_properties.StyleProperties.registerProperty].
Unless you are writing a #GtkStyleProvider implementation, you are unlikely to use this API directly, as [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.get] and its variants are the preferred way to access styling information from widget implementations and theming engine implementations should use the APIs provided by #GtkThemingEngine instead.
#GtkStyleProperties has been deprecated in GTK 3.16. The CSS machinery does not use it anymore and all users of this object have been deprecated.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkStyleProvider is an interface used to provide style information to a #GtkStyleContext. See [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProvider] and [gtk.style_context.StyleContext.addProviderForScreen].
GTypeInterface gIfaceGtkStyleProperties * function(GtkStyleProvider * provider, GtkWidgetPath * path) getStyleGets a set of style information that applies to a widget path.gboolean function(GtkStyleProvider * provider, GtkWidgetPath * path, GtkStateFlags state, GParamSpec * pspec, GValue * value) getStylePropertyGets the value of a widget style property that applies to a widget path.GtkIconFactory * function(GtkStyleProvider * provider, GtkWidgetPath * path) getIconFactoryGets the icon factory that applies to a widget path.#GtkSwitch is a widget that has two states: on or off. The user can control which state should be active by clicking the empty area, or by dragging the handle.
GtkSwitch can also handle situations where the underlying state changes with a delay. See #GtkSwitch::state-set for details.
CSS nodes
switch
╰── sliderGtkSwitch has two css nodes, the main node with the name switch and a subnode named slider. Neither of them is using any style classes.
GtkWidgetAccessibleClass parentClassGtkWidgetClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkSwitch * sw) activateAn action signal and emitting it causes the switch to animate.gboolean function(GtkSwitch * sw, gboolean state) stateSetClass handler for the ::state-set signal.void function() SwitchPadding1void function() SwitchPadding2void function() SwitchPadding3void function() SwitchPadding4void function() SwitchPadding5GtkSymbolicColor is a boxed type that represents a symbolic color. It is the result of parsing a [color expression][gtkcssprovider-symbolic-colors]. To obtain the color represented by a GtkSymbolicColor, it has to be resolved with [gtk.symbolic_color.SymbolicColor.resolve], which replaces all symbolic color references by the colors they refer to (in a given context) and evaluates mix, shade and other expressions, resulting in a #GdkRGBA value.
It is not normally necessary to deal directly with #GtkSymbolicColors, since they are mostly used behind the scenes by #GtkStyleContext and #GtkCssProvider.
#GtkSymbolicColor is deprecated. Symbolic colors are considered an implementation detail of GTK+.
The #GtkTable functions allow the programmer to arrange widgets in rows and columns, making it easy to align many widgets next to each other, horizontally and vertically.
Tables are created with a call to [gtk.table.Table.new_], the size of which can later be changed with [gtk.table.Table.resize].
Widgets can be added to a table using [gtk.table.Table.attach] or the more convenient (but slightly less flexible) [gtk.table.Table.attachDefaults].
To alter the space next to a specific row, use [gtk.table.Table.setRowSpacing], and for a column, [gtk.table.Table.setColSpacing]. The gaps between all rows or columns can be changed by calling [gtk.table.Table.setRowSpacings] or [gtk.table.Table.setColSpacings] respectively. Note that spacing is added between the children, while padding added by [gtk.table.Table.attach] is added on either side of the widget it belongs to.
[gtk.table.Table.setHomogeneous], can be used to set whether all cells in the table will resize themselves to the size of the largest widget in the table.
#GtkTable has been deprecated. Use #GtkGrid instead. It provides the samecapabilities as GtkTable for arranging widgets in a rectangular grid, but does support height-for-width geometry management.
GtkWidget * widgetushort leftAttachushort rightAttachushort topAttachushort bottomAttachushort xpaddingushort ypaddinguint xexpanduint yexpanduint xshrinkuint yshrinkuint xfilluint yfillGtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4ushort requisitionushort allocationushort spacinguint needExpanduint needShrinkuint expanduint shrinkuint emptyA #GtkTargetEntry represents a single type of data than can be supplied for by a widget for a selection or for supplied or received during drag-and-drop.
char * targeta string representation of the target typeuint flags#GtkTargetFlags for DNDuint infoan application-assigned integer ID which will get passed as a parameter to e.g the #GtkWidget::selection-get signal. It allows the application to identify the target type without extensive string c...A #GtkTargetList-struct is a reference counted list of #GtkTargetPair and should be treated as opaque.
A #GtkTargetPair is used to represent the same information as a table of #GtkTargetEntry, but in an efficient form.
GdkAtom target#GdkAtom representation of the target typeuint flags#GtkTargetFlags for DNDuint infoan application-assigned integer ID which will get passed as a parameter to e.g the #GtkWidget::selection-get signal. It allows the application to identify the target type without extensive string c...A #GtkTearoffMenuItem is a special #GtkMenuItem which is used to tear off and reattach its menu.
When its menu is shown normally, the #GtkTearoffMenuItem is drawn as a dotted line indicating that the menu can be torn off. Activating it causes its menu to be torn off and displayed in its own window as a tearoff menu.
When its menu is shown as a tearoff menu, the #GtkTearoffMenuItem is drawn as a dotted line which has a left pointing arrow graphic indicating that the tearoff menu can be reattached. Activating it will erase the tearoff menu window.
#GtkTearoffMenuItem is deprecated and should not be used in newlywritten code. Menus are not meant to be torn around.
GtkMenuItemClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GdkColor bgColorBackground #GdkColor.GdkColor fgColorForeground #GdkColor.int riseSuper/subscript rise, can be negative.uint underline#PangoUnderlineuint strikethroughStrikethrough styleuint drawBgWhether to use background-related values; this is irrelevant for the values struct when in a tag, but is used for the composite values struct; it’s true if any of the tags being composited had ba...uint insideSelectionThis are only used when we are actually laying out and rendering a paragraph; not when a #GtkTextAppearance is part of a #GtkTextAttributes.uint isTextThis are only used when we are actually laying out and rendering a paragraph; not when a #GtkTextAppearance is part of a #GtkTextAttributes.Using #GtkTextAttributes directly should rarely be necessary. It’s primarily useful with [gtk.text_iter.TextIter.getAttributes]. As with most GTK+ structs, the fields in this struct should only be read, never modified directly.
uint refcountGtkTextAppearance appearance#GtkTextAppearance for text.GtkJustification justification#GtkJustification for text.GtkTextDirection direction#GtkTextDirection for text.PangoFontDescription * font#PangoFontDescription for text.double fontScaleFont scale factor.int leftMarginWidth of the left margin in pixels.int rightMarginWidth of the right margin in pixels.int indentAmount to indent the paragraph, in pixels.int pixelsAboveLinesPixels of blank space above paragraphs.int pixelsBelowLinesPixels of blank space below paragraphs.int pixelsInsideWrapPixels of blank space between wrapped lines in a paragraph.PangoTabArray * tabsCustom #PangoTabArray for this text.GtkWrapMode wrapMode#GtkWrapMode for text.PangoLanguage * language#PangoLanguage for text.GdkColor * pgBgColoruint invisibleHide the text.uint bgFullHeightBackground is fit to full line height rather than baseline +/- ascent/descent (font height).uint editableCan edit this text.uint noFallbackWhether to disable font fallback.GdkRGBA * pgBgRgbaint letterSpacingExtra space to insert between graphemes, in Pango unitsYou may wish to begin by reading the
text widget conceptual overviewwhich gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
GObjectClass parentClassThe object class structure needs to be the first.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextIter * pos, const(char) * newText, int newTextLength) insertTextThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::insert-text signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextIter * iter, GdkPixbuf * pixbuf) insertPixbufThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::insert-pixbuf signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextIter * iter, GtkTextChildAnchor * anchor) insertChildAnchorThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::insert-child-anchor signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextIter * start, GtkTextIter * end) deleteRangeThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::delete-range signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) changedThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::changed signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) modifiedChangedThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::modified-changed signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, const(GtkTextIter) * location, GtkTextMark * mark) markSetThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::mark-set signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextMark * mark) markDeletedThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::mark-deleted signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextTag * tag, const(GtkTextIter) * start, const(GtkTextIter) * end) applyTagThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::apply-tag signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkTextTag * tag, const(GtkTextIter) * start, const(GtkTextIter) * end) removeTagThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::remove-tag signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) beginUserActionThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::begin-user-action signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer) endUserActionThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::end-user-action signal.void function(GtkTextBuffer * buffer, GtkClipboard * clipboard) pasteDoneThe class handler for the #GtkTextBuffer::paste-done signal.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkRendererCellAccessibleClass parentClassA #GtkTextChildAnchor is a spot in the buffer where child widgets can be “anchored” (inserted inline, as if they were characters). The anchor can have multiple widgets anchored, to allow for multiple views.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4You may wish to begin by reading the
text widget conceptual overviewwhich gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
void * dummy1void * dummy2int dummy3int dummy4int dummy5int dummy6int dummy7int dummy8void * dummy9void * dummy10int dummy11int dummy12int dummy13void * dummy14You may wish to begin by reading the
text widget conceptual overviewwhich gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
A #GtkTextMark is like a bookmark in a text buffer; it preserves a position in the text. You can convert the mark to an iterator using [gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.getIterAtMark]. Unlike iterators, marks remain valid across buffer mutations, because their behavior is defined when text is inserted or deleted. When text containing a mark is deleted, the mark remains in the position originally occupied by the deleted text. When text is inserted at a mark, a mark with “left gravity” will be moved to the beginning of the newly-inserted text, and a mark with “right gravity” will be moved to the end.
Note that “left” and “right” here refer to logical direction (left is the toward the start of the buffer); in some languages such as Hebrew the logically-leftmost text is not actually on the left when displayed.
Marks are reference counted, but the reference count only controls the validity of the memory; marks can be deleted from the buffer at any time with [gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.deleteMark]. Once deleted from the buffer, a mark is essentially useless.
Marks optionally have names; these can be convenient to avoid passing the #GtkTextMark object around.
Marks are typically created using the [gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.createMark] function.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4You may wish to begin by reading the
text widget conceptual overviewwhich gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
Tags should be in the #GtkTextTagTable for a given #GtkTextBuffer before using them with that buffer.
[gtk.text_buffer.TextBuffer.createTag] is the best way to create tags. See “gtk3-demo” for numerous examples.
For each property of #GtkTextTag, there is a “set” property, e.g. “font-set” corresponds to “font”. These “set” properties reflect whether a property has been set or not. They are maintained by GTK+ and you should not set them independently.
GObjectClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkTextTag * tag, GObject * eventObject, GdkEvent * event, const(GtkTextIter) * iter) eventvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4You may wish to begin by reading the
text widget conceptual overviewwhich gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
GtkTextTagTables as GtkBuildable
The GtkTextTagTable implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports adding tags by specifying “tag” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying tags:
<object class="GtkTextTagTable">
<child type="tag">
<object class="GtkTextTag"/>
</child>
</object>GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkTextTagTable * table, GtkTextTag * tag, gboolean sizeChanged) tagChangedvoid function(GtkTextTagTable * table, GtkTextTag * tag) tagAddedvoid function(GtkTextTagTable * table, GtkTextTag * tag) tagRemovedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4You may wish to begin by reading the
text widget conceptual overviewwhich gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
CSS nodes
textview.view
├── border.top
├── border.left
├── text
│ ╰── [selection]
├── border.right
├── border.bottom
╰── [window.popup]GtkTextView has a main css node with name textview and style class .view, and subnodes for each of the border windows, and the main text area, with names border and text, respectively. The border nodes each get one of the style classes .left, .right, .top or .bottom.
A node representing the selection will appear below the text node.
If a context menu is opened, the window node will appear as a subnode of the main node.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassThe object class structure needs to be the firstvoid function(GtkTextView * textView, GtkWidget * popup) populatePopupThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::populate-popup signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView, GtkMovementStep step, int count, gboolean extendSelection) moveCursorThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::move-cursor keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) setAnchorThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::set-anchor keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView, const(char) * str) insertAtCursorThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::insert-at-cursor keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView, GtkDeleteType type, int count) deleteFromCursorThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::delete-from-cursor keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) backspaceThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::backspace keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) cutClipboardThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::cut-clipboard keybinding signalvoid function(GtkTextView * textView) copyClipboardThe class handler for the #GtkTextview::copy-clipboard keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) pasteClipboardThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::paste-clipboard keybinding signal.void function(GtkTextView * textView) toggleOverwriteThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::toggle-overwrite keybinding signal.GtkTextBuffer * function(GtkTextView * textView) createBufferThe createbuffer vfunc is called to create a #GtkTextBuffer for the text view. The default implementation is to just call [gtk.textbuffer.TextBuffer.new_]. Since: 3.10void function(GtkTextView * textView, GtkTextViewLayer layer, cairo_t * cr) drawLayerThe draw_layer vfunc is called before and after the text view is drawing its own text. Applications can override this vfunc in a subclass to draw customized content underneath or above the text. In...gboolean function(GtkTextView * textView, GtkTextExtendSelection granularity, const(GtkTextIter) * location, GtkTextIter * start, GtkTextIter * end) extendSelectionThe class handler for the #GtkTextView::extend-selection signal. Since 3.16void function(GtkTextView * textView) insertEmojivoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkThemingEngine was the object used for rendering themed content in GTK+ widgets. It used to allow overriding GTK+'s default implementation of rendering functions by allowing engines to be loaded as modules.
#GtkThemingEngine has been deprecated in GTK+ 3.14 and will be ignored for rendering. The advancements in CSS theming are good enough to allow themers to achieve their goals without the need to modify source code.
Base class for theming engines.
GObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x0, double y0, double x1, double y1) renderLineRenders a line between two points.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height) renderBackgroundRenders the background area of a widget region.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height) renderFrameRenders the frame around a widget area.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height, GtkPositionType gapSide, double xy0Gap, double xy1Gap) renderFrameGapRenders the frame around a widget area with a gap in it.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height, GtkPositionType gapSide) renderExtensionRenders a extension to a box, usually a notebook tab.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height) renderCheckRenders a checkmark, as in #GtkCheckButton.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height) renderOptionRenders an option, as in #GtkRadioButton.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double angle, double x, double y, double size) renderArrowRenders an arrow pointing to a certain direction.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height) renderExpanderRenders an element what will expose/expand part of the UI, as in #GtkExpander.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height) renderFocusRenders the focus indicator.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, PangoLayout * layout) renderLayoutRenders a #PangoLayoutvoid function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height, GtkOrientation orientation) renderSliderRenders a slider control, as in #GtkScale.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height) renderHandleRenders a handle to drag UI elements, as in #GtkPaned.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, double x, double y, double width, double height) renderActivityRenders an area displaying activity, such as in #GtkSpinner, or #GtkProgressBar.GdkPixbuf * function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, const(GtkIconSource) * source, GtkIconSize size) renderIconPixbufRenders an icon as a #GdkPixbuf.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, GdkPixbuf * pixbuf, double x, double y) renderIconRenders an icon given as a #GdkPixbuf.void function(GtkThemingEngine * engine, cairo_t * cr, cairo_surface_t * surface, double x, double y) renderIconSurfaceRenders an icon given as a #cairosurfacet.void *[14] paddingA #GtkToggleAction corresponds roughly to a #GtkCheckMenuItem. It has an “active” state specifying whether the action has been checked or not.
GtkActionClass parentClassvoid function(GtkToggleAction * action) toggledvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkToggleActionEntry structs are used with [gtk.action_group.ActionGroup.addToggleActions] to construct toggle actions.
const(char) * nameThe name of the action.const(char) * stockIdThe stock id for the action, or the name of an icon from the icon theme.const(char) * labelThe label for the action. This field should typically be marked for translation, see [gtk.action_group.ActionGroup.setTranslationDomain].const(char) * acceleratorThe accelerator for the action, in the format understood by [gtk.global.acceleratorParse].const(char) * tooltipThe tooltip for the action. This field should typically be marked for translation, see [gtk.action_group.ActionGroup.setTranslationDomain].GCallback callbackThe function to call when the action is activated.gboolean isActiveThe initial state of the toggle action.A #GtkToggleButton is a #GtkButton which will remain “pressed-in” when clicked. Clicking again will cause the toggle button to return to its normal state.
A toggle button is created by calling either [gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.new_] or [gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.newWithLabel]. If using the former, it is advisable to pack a widget, (such as a #GtkLabel and/or a #GtkImage), into the toggle button’s container. (See #GtkButton for more information).
The state of a #GtkToggleButton can be set specifically using [gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.setActive], and retrieved using [gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.getActive].
To simply switch the state of a toggle button, use [gtk.toggle_button.ToggleButton.toggled].
CSS nodes
GtkToggleButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plain #GtkButton, it gets the .toggle style class.
Creating two #GtkToggleButton widgets.
static void output_state (GtkToggleButton *source, gpointer user_data) {
printf ("Active: %d\n", gtk_toggle_button_get_active (source));
}
void make_toggles (void) {
GtkWidget *window, *toggle1, *toggle2;
GtkWidget *box;
const char *text;
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 12);
text = "Hi, I’m a toggle button.";
toggle1 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text);
// Makes this toggle button invisible
gtk_toggle_button_set_mode (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (toggle1),
TRUE);
g_signal_connect (toggle1, "toggled",
G_CALLBACK (output_state),
NULL);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), toggle1);
text = "Hi, I’m a toggle button.";
toggle2 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text);
gtk_toggle_button_set_mode (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (toggle2),
FALSE);
g_signal_connect (toggle2, "toggled",
G_CALLBACK (output_state),
NULL);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), toggle2);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box);
gtk_widget_show_all (window);
}GtkButtonAccessibleClass parentClassGtkButtonClass parentClassvoid function(GtkToggleButton * toggleButton) toggledvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkToggleToolButton is a #GtkToolItem that contains a toggle button.
Use [gtk.toggle_tool_button.ToggleToolButton.new_] to create a new GtkToggleToolButton.
CSS nodes
GtkToggleToolButton has a single CSS node with name togglebutton.
GtkToolButtonClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkToggleToolButton * button) toggledSignal emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkToolButtons are #GtkToolItems containing buttons.
Use [gtk.tool_button.ToolButton.new_] to create a new #GtkToolButton.
The label of a #GtkToolButton is determined by the properties #GtkToolButton:label-widget, #GtkToolButton:label, and #GtkToolButton:stock-id. If #GtkToolButton:label-widget is non-null, then that widget is used as the label. Otherwise, if #GtkToolButton:label is non-null, that string is used as the label. Otherwise, if #GtkToolButton:stock-id is non-null, the label is determined by the stock item. Otherwise, the button does not have a label.
The icon of a #GtkToolButton is determined by the properties #GtkToolButton:icon-widget and #GtkToolButton:stock-id. If #GtkToolButton:icon-widget is non-null, then that widget is used as the icon. Otherwise, if #GtkToolButton:stock-id is non-null, the icon is determined by the stock item. Otherwise, the button does not have a icon.
CSS nodes
GtkToolButton has a single CSS node with name toolbutton.
GtkToolItemClass parentClassThe parent class.GType buttonTypevoid function(GtkToolButton * toolItem) clickedSignal emitted when the tool button is clicked with the mouse or activated with the keyboard.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkToolItems are widgets that can appear on a toolbar. To create a toolbar item that contain something else than a button, use [gtk.tool_item.ToolItem.new_]. Use [gtk.container.Container.add] to add a child widget to the tool item.
For toolbar items that contain buttons, see the #GtkToolButton, #GtkToggleToolButton and #GtkRadioToolButton classes.
See the #GtkToolbar class for a description of the toolbar widget, and #GtkToolShell for a description of the tool shell interface.
GtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.gboolean function(GtkToolItem * toolItem) createMenuProxySignal emitted when the toolbar needs information from tool_item about whether the item should appear in the toolbar overflow menu.void function(GtkToolItem * toolItem) toolbarReconfiguredSignal emitted when some property of the toolbar that the item is a child of changes.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkToolItemGroup is used together with #GtkToolPalette to add #GtkToolItems to a palette like container with different categories and drag and drop support.
CSS nodes
GtkToolItemGroup has a single CSS node named toolitemgroup.
GtkContainerClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkToolPalette allows you to add #GtkToolItems to a palette-like container with different categories and drag and drop support.
A #GtkToolPalette is created with a call to [gtk.tool_palette.ToolPalette.new_].
#GtkToolItems cannot be added directly to a #GtkToolPalette - instead they are added to a #GtkToolItemGroup which can than be added to a #GtkToolPalette. To add a #GtkToolItemGroup to a #GtkToolPalette, use [gtk.container.Container.add].
GtkWidget *palette, *group;
GtkToolItem *item;
palette = gtk_tool_palette_new ();
group = gtk_tool_item_group_new (_("Test Category"));
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (palette), group);
item = gtk_tool_button_new (NULL, _("_Open"));
gtk_tool_button_set_icon_name (GTK_TOOL_BUTTON (item), "document-open");
gtk_tool_item_group_insert (GTK_TOOL_ITEM_GROUP (group), item, -1);The easiest way to use drag and drop with #GtkToolPalette is to call [gtk.tool_palette.ToolPalette.addDragDest] with the desired drag source @palette and the desired drag target @widget. Then [gtk.tool_palette.ToolPalette.getDragItem] can be used to get the dragged item in the #GtkWidget::drag-data-received signal handler of the drag target.
static void
passive_canvas_drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkDragContext *context,
gint x,
gint y,
GtkSelectionData *selection,
guint info,
guint time,
gpointer data)
{
GtkWidget *palette;
GtkWidget *item;
// Get the dragged item
palette = gtk_widget_get_ancestor (gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context),
GTK_TYPE_TOOL_PALETTE);
if (palette != NULL)
item = gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_item (GTK_TOOL_PALETTE (palette),
selection);
// Do something with item
}
GtkWidget *target, palette;
palette = gtk_tool_palette_new ();
target = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
g_signal_connect (G_OBJECT (target), "drag-data-received",
G_CALLBACK (passive_canvas_drag_data_received), NULL);
gtk_tool_palette_add_drag_dest (GTK_TOOL_PALETTE (palette), target,
GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL,
GTK_TOOL_PALETTE_DRAG_ITEMS,
GDK_ACTION_COPY);CSS nodes
GtkToolPalette has a single CSS node named toolpalette.
GtkContainerClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4The #GtkToolShell interface allows container widgets to provide additional information when embedding #GtkToolItem widgets.
Virtual function table for the #GtkToolShell interface.
GTypeInterface gIfaceGtkIconSize function(GtkToolShell * shell) getIconSizemandatory implementation of [gtk.tool_shell.ToolShell.getIconSize].GtkOrientation function(GtkToolShell * shell) getOrientationmandatory implementation of [gtk.tool_shell.ToolShell.toolShellGetOrientation].GtkToolbarStyle function(GtkToolShell * shell) getStylemandatory implementation of [gtk.tool_shell.ToolShell.getStyle].GtkReliefStyle function(GtkToolShell * shell) getReliefStyleoptional implementation of [gtk.tool_shell.ToolShell.getReliefStyle].void function(GtkToolShell * shell) rebuildMenuoptional implementation of [gtk.tool_shell.ToolShell.rebuildMenu].GtkOrientation function(GtkToolShell * shell) getTextOrientationoptional implementation of [gtk.tool_shell.ToolShell.getTextOrientation].float function(GtkToolShell * shell) getTextAlignmentoptional implementation of [gtk.tool_shell.ToolShell.getTextAlignment].PangoEllipsizeMode function(GtkToolShell * shell) getEllipsizeModeoptional implementation of [gtk.tool_shell.ToolShell.getEllipsizeMode].GtkSizeGroup * function(GtkToolShell * shell) getTextSizeGroupoptional implementation of [gtk.tool_shell.ToolShell.getTextSizeGroup].A toolbar is created with a call to [gtk.toolbar.Toolbar.new_].
A toolbar can contain instances of a subclass of #GtkToolItem. To add a #GtkToolItem to the a toolbar, use [gtk.toolbar.Toolbar.insert]. To remove an item from the toolbar use [gtk.container.Container.remove]. To add a button to the toolbar, add an instance of #GtkToolButton.
Toolbar items can be visually grouped by adding instances of #GtkSeparatorToolItem to the toolbar. If the GtkToolbar child property “expand” is #TRUE and the property #GtkSeparatorToolItem:draw is set to #FALSE, the effect is to force all following items to the end of the toolbar.
By default, a toolbar can be shrunk, upon which it will add an arrow button to show an overflow menu offering access to any #GtkToolItem child that has a proxy menu item. To disable this and request enough size for all children, call [gtk.toolbar.Toolbar.setShowArrow] to set #GtkToolbar:show-arrow to false.
Creating a context menu for the toolbar can be done by connecting to the #GtkToolbar::popup-context-menu signal.
CSS nodes
GtkToolbar has a single CSS node with name toolbar.
GtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function(GtkToolbar * toolbar, GtkOrientation orientation) orientationChangedvoid function(GtkToolbar * toolbar, GtkToolbarStyle style) styleChangedgboolean function(GtkToolbar * toolbar, int x, int y, int buttonNumber) popupContextMenuvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Basic tooltips can be realized simply by using [gtk.widget.Widget.setTooltipText] or [gtk.widget.Widget.setTooltipMarkup] without any explicit tooltip object.
When you need a tooltip with a little more fancy contents, like adding an image, or you want the tooltip to have different contents per #GtkTreeView row or cell, you will have to do a little more work:
- Set the #GtkWidget:has-tooltip property to true, this will make GTK+
monitor the widget for motion and related events which are needed to determine when and where to show a tooltip.
- Connect to the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal. This signal will be
emitted when a tooltip is supposed to be shown. One of the arguments passed to the signal handler is a GtkTooltip object. This is the object that we are about to display as a tooltip, and can be manipulated in your callback using functions like [gtk.tooltip.Tooltip.setIcon]. There are functions for setting the tooltip’s markup, setting an image from a named icon, or even putting in a custom widget.
Return true from your query-tooltip handler. This causes the tooltip to be show. If you return false, it will not be shown.
In the probably rare case where you want to have even more control over the tooltip that is about to be shown, you can set your own #GtkWindow which will be used as tooltip window. This works as follows:
- Set #GtkWidget:has-tooltip and connect to #GtkWidget::query-tooltip as before.
Use [gtk.widget.Widget.setTooltipWindow] to set a #GtkWindow created by you as tooltip window.
- In the #GtkWidget::query-tooltip callback you can access your window using
[gtk.widget.Widget.getTooltipWindow] and manipulate as you wish. The semantics of the return value are exactly as before, return true to show the window, false to not show it.
AtkObjectClass parentClassGTypeInterface gIfacegboolean function(GtkTreeDragDest * dragDest, GtkTreePath * dest, GtkSelectionData * selectionData) dragDataReceivedAsks the #GtkTreeDragDest to insert a row before the path dest, deriving the contents of the row from selection_data.gboolean function(GtkTreeDragDest * dragDest, GtkTreePath * destPath, GtkSelectionData * selectionData) rowDropPossibleDetermines whether a drop is possible before the given destpath, at the same depth as destpath.GTypeInterface gIfacegboolean function(GtkTreeDragSource * dragSource, GtkTreePath * path) rowDraggableAsks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as the source of a DND operation.gboolean function(GtkTreeDragSource * dragSource, GtkTreePath * path, GtkSelectionData * selectionData) dragDataGetAsks the #GtkTreeDragSource to fill in selection_data with a representation of the row at path.gboolean function(GtkTreeDragSource * dragSource, GtkTreePath * path) dragDataDeleteAsks the #GtkTreeDragSource to delete the row at path, because it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop.The #GtkTreeIter is the primary structure for accessing a #GtkTreeModel. Models are expected to put a unique integer in the @stamp member, and put model-specific data in the three @user_data members.
int stampa unique stamp to catch invalid iteratorsvoid * userDatamodel-specific datavoid * userData2model-specific datavoid * userData3model-specific dataThe #GtkTreeModel interface defines a generic tree interface for use by the #GtkTreeView widget. It is an abstract interface, and is designed to be usable with any appropriate data structure. The programmer just has to implement this interface on their own data type for it to be viewable by a #GtkTreeView widget.
The model is represented as a hierarchical tree of strongly-typed, columned data. In other words, the model can be seen as a tree where every node has different values depending on which column is being queried. The type of data found in a column is determined by using the GType system (ie. #G_TYPE_INT, #GTK_TYPE_BUTTON, #G_TYPE_POINTER, etc). The types are homogeneous per column across all nodes. It is important to note that this interface only provides a way of examining a model and observing changes. The implementation of each individual model decides how and if changes are made.
In order to make life simpler for programmers who do not need to write their own specialized model, two generic models are provided — the #GtkTreeStore and the #GtkListStore. To use these, the developer simply pushes data into these models as necessary. These models provide the data structure as well as all appropriate tree interfaces. As a result, implementing drag and drop, sorting, and storing data is trivial. For the vast majority of trees and lists, these two models are sufficient.
Models are accessed on a node/column level of granularity. One can query for the value of a model at a certain node and a certain column on that node. There are two structures used to reference a particular node in a model. They are the #GtkTreePath-struct and the #GtkTreeIter-struct (“iter” is short for iterator). Most of the interface consists of operations on a #GtkTreeIter-struct.
A path is essentially a potential node. It is a location on a model that may or may not actually correspond to a node on a specific model. The #GtkTreePath-struct can be converted into either an array of unsigned integers or a string. The string form is a list of numbers separated by a colon. Each number refers to the offset at that level. Thus, the path 0 refers to the root node and the path 2:4 refers to the fifth child of the third node.
By contrast, a #GtkTreeIter-struct is a reference to a specific node on a specific model. It is a generic struct with an integer and three generic pointers. These are filled in by the model in a model-specific way. One can convert a path to an iterator by calling [gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.getIter]. These iterators are the primary way of accessing a model and are similar to the iterators used by #GtkTextBuffer. They are generally statically allocated on the stack and only used for a short time. The model interface defines a set of operations using them for navigating the model.
It is expected that models fill in the iterator with private data. For example, the #GtkListStore model, which is internally a simple linked list, stores a list node in one of the pointers. The #GtkTreeModelSort stores an array and an offset in two of the pointers. Additionally, there is an integer field. This field is generally filled with a unique stamp per model. This stamp is for catching errors resulting from using invalid iterators with a model.
The lifecycle of an iterator can be a little confusing at first. Iterators are expected to always be valid for as long as the model is unchanged (and doesn’t emit a signal). The model is considered to own all outstanding iterators and nothing needs to be done to free them from the user’s point of view. Additionally, some models guarantee that an iterator is valid for as long as the node it refers to is valid (most notably the #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore). Although generally uninteresting, as one always has to allow for the case where iterators do not persist beyond a signal, some very important performance enhancements were made in the sort model. As a result, the #GTK_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST flag was added to indicate this behavior.
To help show some common operation of a model, some examples are provided. The first example shows three ways of getting the iter at the location 3:2:5. While the first method shown is easier, the second is much more common, as you often get paths from callbacks.
Acquiring a #GtkTreeIter-struct
// Three ways of getting the iter pointing to the location
GtkTreePath *path;
GtkTreeIter iter;
GtkTreeIter parent_iter;
// get the iterator from a string
gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (model,
&iter,
"3:2:5");
// get the iterator from a path
path = gtk_tree_path_new_from_string ("3:2:5");
gtk_tree_model_get_iter (model, &iter, path);
gtk_tree_path_free (path);
// walk the tree to find the iterator
gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
NULL, 3);
parent_iter = iter;
gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
&parent_iter, 2);
parent_iter = iter;
gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
&parent_iter, 5);This second example shows a quick way of iterating through a list and getting a string and an integer from each row. The populate_model() function used below is not shown, as it is specific to the #GtkListStore. For information on how to write such a function, see the #GtkListStore documentation.
Reading data from a #GtkTreeModel
enum
{
STRING_COLUMN,
INT_COLUMN,
N_COLUMNS
};
...
GtkTreeModel *list_store;
GtkTreeIter iter;
gboolean valid;
gint row_count = 0;
// make a new list_store
list_store = gtk_list_store_new (N_COLUMNS,
G_TYPE_STRING,
G_TYPE_INT);
// Fill the list store with data
populate_model (list_store);
// Get the first iter in the list, check it is valid and walk
// through the list, reading each row.
valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (list_store,
&iter);
while (valid)
{
gchar *str_data;
gint int_data;
// Make sure you terminate calls to gtk_tree_model_get() with a “-1” value
gtk_tree_model_get (list_store, &iter,
STRING_COLUMN, &str_data,
INT_COLUMN, &int_data,
-1);
// Do something with the data
g_print ("Row %d: (%s,%d)\n",
row_count, str_data, int_data);
g_free (str_data);
valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (list_store,
&iter);
row_count++;
}The #GtkTreeModel interface contains two methods for reference counting: [gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.refNode] and [gtk.tree_model.TreeModel.unrefNode]. These two methods are optional to implement. The reference counting is meant as a way for views to let models know when nodes are being displayed. #GtkTreeView will take a reference on a node when it is visible, which means the node is either in the toplevel or expanded. Being displayed does not mean that the node is currently directly visible to the user in the viewport. Based on this reference counting scheme a caching model, for example, can decide whether or not to cache a node based on the reference count. A file-system based model would not want to keep the entire file hierarchy in memory, but just the folders that are currently expanded in every current view.
When working with reference counting, the following rules must be taken into account:
- Never take a reference on a node without owning a reference on its parent.
This means that all parent nodes of a referenced node must be referenced as well.
- Outstanding references on a deleted node are not released. This is not
possible because the node has already been deleted by the time the row-deleted signal is received.
- Models are not obligated to emit a signal on rows of which none of its
siblings are referenced. To phrase this differently, signals are only required for levels in which nodes are referenced. For the root level however, signals must be emitted at all times (however the root level is always referenced when any view is attached).
A #GtkTreeModelFilter is a tree model which wraps another tree model, and can do the following things:
- Filter specific rows, based on data from a “visible column”, a column
storing booleans indicating whether the row should be filtered or not, or based on the return value of a “visible function”, which gets a model, iter and user_data and returns a boolean indicating whether the row should be filtered or not.
- Modify the “appearance” of the model, using a modify function.
This is extremely powerful and allows for just changing some values and also for creating a completely different model based on the given child model.
- Set a different root node, also known as a “virtual root”. You can pass
in a #GtkTreePath indicating the root node for the filter at construction time.
The basic API is similar to #GtkTreeModelSort. For an example on its usage, see the section on #GtkTreeModelSort.
When using #GtkTreeModelFilter, it is important to realize that #GtkTreeModelFilter maintains an internal cache of all nodes which are visible in its clients. The cache is likely to be a subtree of the tree exposed by the child model. #GtkTreeModelFilter will not cache the entire child model when unnecessary to not compromise the caching mechanism that is exposed by the reference counting scheme. If the child model implements reference counting, unnecessary signals may not be emitted because of reference counting rule 3, see the #GtkTreeModel documentation. (Note that e.g. #GtkTreeStore does not implement reference counting and will always emit all signals, even when the receiving node is not visible).
Because of this, limitations for possible visible functions do apply. In general, visible functions should only use data or properties from the node for which the visibility state must be determined, its siblings or its parents. Usually, having a dependency on the state of any child node is not possible, unless references are taken on these explicitly. When no such reference exists, no signals may be received for these child nodes (see reference couting rule number 3 in the #GtkTreeModel section).
Determining the visibility state of a given node based on the state of its child nodes is a frequently occurring use case. Therefore, #GtkTreeModelFilter explicitly supports this. For example, when a node does not have any children, you might not want the node to be visible. As soon as the first row is added to the node’s child level (or the last row removed), the node’s visibility should be updated.
This introduces a dependency from the node on its child nodes. In order to accommodate this, #GtkTreeModelFilter must make sure the necessary signals are received from the child model. This is achieved by building, for all nodes which are exposed as visible nodes to #GtkTreeModelFilter's clients, the child level (if any) and take a reference on the first node in this level. Furthermore, for every row-inserted, row-changed or row-deleted signal (also these which were not handled because the node was not cached), #GtkTreeModelFilter will check if the visibility state of any parent node has changed.
Beware, however, that this explicit support is limited to these two cases. For example, if you want a node to be visible only if two nodes in a child’s child level (2 levels deeper) are visible, you are on your own. In this case, either rely on #GtkTreeStore to emit all signals because it does not implement reference counting, or for models that do implement reference counting, obtain references on these child levels yourself.
GObjectClass parentClassgboolean function(GtkTreeModelFilter * self, GtkTreeModel * childModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) visiblevoid function(GtkTreeModelFilter * self, GtkTreeModel * childModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GValue * value, int column) modifyvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeIter * iter) rowChangedSignal emitted when a row in the model has changed.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeIter * iter) rowInsertedSignal emitted when a new row has been inserted in the model.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeIter * iter) rowHasChildToggledSignal emitted when a row has gotten the first child row or lost its last child row.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path) rowDeletedSignal emitted when a row has been deleted.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeIter * iter, int * newOrder) rowsReorderedSignal emitted when the children of a node in the GtkTreeModel have been reordered.GtkTreeModelFlags function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel) getFlagsGet #GtkTreeModelFlags supported by this interface.int function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel) getNColumnsGet the number of columns supported by the model.GType function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, int index) getColumnTypeGet the type of the column.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) getIterSets iter to a valid iterator pointing to path.GtkTreePath * function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) getPathGets a newly-created #GtkTreePath referenced by iter.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, int column, GValue * value) getValueInitializes and sets value to that at column.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) iterNextSets iter to point to the node following it at the current level.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) iterPreviousSets iter to point to the previous node at the current level.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreeIter * parent) iterChildrenSets iter to point to the first child of parent.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) iterHasChildtrue if iter has children, false otherwise.int function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) iterNChildrenGets the number of children that iter has.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreeIter * parent, int n) iterNthChildSets iter to be the child of parent, using the given index.gboolean function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreeIter * child) iterParentSets iter to be the parent of child.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) refNodeLets the tree ref the node.void function(GtkTreeModel * treeModel, GtkTreeIter * iter) unrefNodeLets the tree unref the node.The #GtkTreeModelSort is a model which implements the #GtkTreeSortable interface. It does not hold any data itself, but rather is created with a child model and proxies its data. It has identical column types to this child model, and the changes in the child are propagated. The primary purpose of this model is to provide a way to sort a different model without modifying it. Note that the sort function used by #GtkTreeModelSort is not guaranteed to be stable.
The use of this is best demonstrated through an example. In the following sample code we create two #GtkTreeView widgets each with a view of the same data. As the model is wrapped here by a #GtkTreeModelSort, the two #GtkTreeViews can each sort their view of the data without affecting the other. By contrast, if we simply put the same model in each widget, then sorting the first would sort the second.
Using a #GtkTreeModelSort
{
GtkTreeView *tree_view1;
GtkTreeView *tree_view2;
GtkTreeModel *sort_model1;
GtkTreeModel *sort_model2;
GtkTreeModel *child_model;
// get the child model
child_model = get_my_model ();
// Create the first tree
sort_model1 = gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model (child_model);
tree_view1 = gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (sort_model1);
// Create the second tree
sort_model2 = gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model (child_model);
tree_view2 = gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (sort_model2);
// Now we can sort the two models independently
gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id (GTK_TREE_SORTABLE (sort_model1),
COLUMN_1, GTK_SORT_ASCENDING);
gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id (GTK_TREE_SORTABLE (sort_model2),
COLUMN_1, GTK_SORT_DESCENDING);
}To demonstrate how to access the underlying child model from the sort model, the next example will be a callback for the #GtkTreeSelection #GtkTreeSelection::changed signal. In this callback, we get a string from COLUMN_1 of the model. We then modify the string, find the same selected row on the child model, and change the row there.
Accessing the child model of in a selection changed callback
void
selection_changed (GtkTreeSelection *selection, gpointer data)
{
GtkTreeModel *sort_model = NULL;
GtkTreeModel *child_model;
GtkTreeIter sort_iter;
GtkTreeIter child_iter;
char *some_data = NULL;
char *modified_data;
// Get the current selected row and the model.
if (! gtk_tree_selection_get_selected (selection,
&sort_model,
&sort_iter))
return;
// Look up the current value on the selected row and get
// a new value to change it to.
gtk_tree_model_get (GTK_TREE_MODEL (sort_model), &sort_iter,
COLUMN_1, &some_data,
-1);
modified_data = change_the_data (some_data);
g_free (some_data);
// Get an iterator on the child model, instead of the sort model.
gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model),
&child_iter,
&sort_iter);
// Get the child model and change the value of the row. In this
// example, the child model is a GtkListStore. It could be any other
// type of model, though.
child_model = gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model));
gtk_list_store_set (GTK_LIST_STORE (child_model), &child_iter,
COLUMN_1, &modified_data,
-1);
g_free (modified_data);
}GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A GtkTreeRowReference tracks model changes so that it always refers to the same row (a #GtkTreePath refers to a position, not a fixed row). Create a new GtkTreeRowReference with [gtk.tree_row_reference.TreeRowReference.new_].
The #GtkTreeSelection object is a helper object to manage the selection for a #GtkTreeView widget. The #GtkTreeSelection object is automatically created when a new #GtkTreeView widget is created, and cannot exist independently of this widget. The primary reason the #GtkTreeSelection objects exists is for cleanliness of code and API. That is, there is no conceptual reason all these functions could not be methods on the #GtkTreeView widget instead of a separate function.
The #GtkTreeSelection object is gotten from a #GtkTreeView by calling [gtk.tree_view.TreeView.getSelection]. It can be manipulated to check the selection status of the tree, as well as select and deselect individual rows. Selection is done completely view side. As a result, multiple views of the same model can have completely different selections. Additionally, you cannot change the selection of a row on the model that is not currently displayed by the view without expanding its parents first.
One of the important things to remember when monitoring the selection of a view is that the #GtkTreeSelection::changed signal is mostly a hint. That is, it may only emit one signal when a range of rows is selected. Additionally, it may on occasion emit a #GtkTreeSelection::changed signal when nothing has happened (mostly as a result of programmers calling select_row on an already selected row).
GObjectClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkTreeSelection * selection) changedSignal emitted whenever the selection has (possibly) changed.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkTreeSortable is an interface to be implemented by tree models which support sorting. The #GtkTreeView uses the methods provided by this interface to sort the model.
GTypeInterface gIfacevoid function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable) sortColumnChangedSignal emitted when the sort column or sort order of sortable is changed.gboolean function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable, int * sortColumnId, GtkSortType * order) getSortColumnIdFills in sortcolumnid and order with the current sort column and the order.void function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable, int sortColumnId, GtkSortType order) setSortColumnIdSets the current sort column to be sortcolumnid.void function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable, int sortColumnId, GtkTreeIterCompareFunc sortFunc, void * userData, GDestroyNotify destroy) setSortFuncSets the comparison function used when sorting to be sort_func.void function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable, GtkTreeIterCompareFunc sortFunc, void * userData, GDestroyNotify destroy) setDefaultSortFuncSets the default comparison function used when sorting to be sort_func.gboolean function(GtkTreeSortable * sortable) hasDefaultSortFunctrue if the model has a default sort function.The #GtkTreeStore object is a list model for use with a #GtkTreeView widget. It implements the #GtkTreeModel interface, and consequentially, can use all of the methods available there. It also implements the #GtkTreeSortable interface so it can be sorted by the view. Finally, it also implements the tree [drag and drop][gtk3-GtkTreeView-drag-and-drop] interfaces.
GtkTreeStore as GtkBuildable
The GtkTreeStore implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface allows to specify the model columns with a <columns> element that may contain multiple <column> elements, each specifying one model column. The “type” attribute specifies the data type for the column.
An example of a UI Definition fragment for a tree store:
<object class="GtkTreeStore">
<columns>
<column type="gchararray"/>
<column type="gchararray"/>
<column type="gint"/>
</columns>
</object>GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Widget that displays any object that implements the #GtkTreeModel interface.
Please refer to the
tree widget conceptual overviewfor an overview of all the objects and data types related to the tree widget and how they work together.
Several different coordinate systems are exposed in the GtkTreeView API. These are:

Coordinate systems in GtkTreeView API:
- Widget coordinates: Coordinates relative to the widget (usually
widget->window).
- Bin window coordinates: Coordinates relative to the window that GtkTreeView renders to.
- Tree coordinates: Coordinates relative to the entire scrollable area of GtkTreeView. These
coordinates start at (0, 0) for row 0 of the tree.
Several functions are available for converting between the different coordinate systems. The most common translations are between widget and bin window coordinates and between bin window and tree coordinates. For the former you can use [gtk.tree_view.TreeView.convertWidgetToBinWindowCoords] (and vice versa), for the latter [gtk.tree_view.TreeView.convertBinWindowToTreeCoords] (and vice versa).
GtkTreeView as GtkBuildable
The GtkTreeView implementation of the GtkBuildable interface accepts #GtkTreeViewColumn objects as <child> elements and exposes the internal #GtkTreeSelection in UI definitions.
An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkTreeView:
<object class="GtkTreeView" id="treeview">
<property name="model">liststore1</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkTreeViewColumn" id="test-column">
<property name="title">Test</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkCellRendererText" id="test-renderer"/>
<attributes>
<attribute name="text">1</attribute>
</attributes>
</child>
</object>
</child>
<child internal-child="selection">
<object class="GtkTreeSelection" id="selection">
<signal name="changed" handler="on_treeview_selection_changed"/>
</object>
</child>
</object>CSS nodes
treeview.view
├── header
│ ├── <column header>
┊ ┊
│ ╰── <column header>
│
╰── [rubberband]GtkTreeView has a main CSS node with name treeview and style class .view. It has a subnode with name header, which is the parent for all the column header widgets' CSS nodes. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkContainerClass parentClassvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreePath * path, GtkTreeViewColumn * column) rowActivatedgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) testExpandRowgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) testCollapseRowvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) rowExpandedvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkTreeIter * iter, GtkTreePath * path) rowCollapsedvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView) columnsChangedvoid function(GtkTreeView * treeView) cursorChangedgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, GtkMovementStep step, int count) moveCursorgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) selectAllgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) unselectAllgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, gboolean startEditing) selectCursorRowgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) toggleCursorRowgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView, gboolean logical, gboolean expand, gboolean openAll) expandCollapseCursorRowgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) selectCursorParentgboolean function(GtkTreeView * treeView) startInteractiveSearchvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4void function() GtkReserved5void function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7void function() GtkReserved8The GtkTreeViewColumn object represents a visible column in a #GtkTreeView widget. It allows to set properties of the column header, and functions as a holding pen for the cell renderers which determine how the data in the column is displayed.
Please refer to the tree widget conceptual overview for an overview of all the objects and data types related to the tree widget and how they work together.
GInitiallyUnownedClass parentClassvoid function(GtkTreeViewColumn * treeColumn) clickedvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkUIManager constructs a user interface (menus and toolbars) from one or more UI definitions, which reference actions from one or more action groups.
GtkUIManager is deprecated since GTK+ 3.10. To construct user interfacesfrom XML definitions, you should use #GtkBuilder, #GMenuModel, et al. To work with actions, use #GAction, #GtkActionable et al. These newer classes support richer functionality and integration with various desktop shells. It should be possible to migrate most/all functionality from GtkUIManager.
UI Definitions # {#XML-UI}
The UI definitions are specified in an XML format which can be roughly described by the following DTD.
Do not confuse the GtkUIManager UI Definitions described here withthe similarly named [GtkBuilder UI Definitions][BUILDER-UI].
<!ELEMENT ui (menubar|toolbar|popup|accelerator)* >
<!ELEMENT menubar (menuitem|separator|placeholder|menu)* >
<!ELEMENT menu (menuitem|separator|placeholder|menu)* >
<!ELEMENT popup (menuitem|separator|placeholder|menu)* >
<!ELEMENT toolbar (toolitem|separator|placeholder)* >
<!ELEMENT placeholder (menuitem|toolitem|separator|placeholder|menu)* >
<!ELEMENT menuitem EMPTY >
<!ELEMENT toolitem (menu?) >
<!ELEMENT separator EMPTY >
<!ELEMENT accelerator EMPTY >
<!ATTLIST menubar name #IMPLIED
action #IMPLIED >
<!ATTLIST toolbar name #IMPLIED
action #IMPLIED >
<!ATTLIST popup name #IMPLIED
action #IMPLIED
accelerators (true|false) #IMPLIED >
<!ATTLIST placeholder name #IMPLIED
action #IMPLIED >
<!ATTLIST separator name #IMPLIED
action #IMPLIED
expand (true|false) #IMPLIED >
<!ATTLIST menu name #IMPLIED
action #REQUIRED
position (top|bot) #IMPLIED >
<!ATTLIST menuitem name #IMPLIED
action #REQUIRED
position (top|bot) #IMPLIED
always-show-image (true|false) #IMPLIED >
<!ATTLIST toolitem name #IMPLIED
action #REQUIRED
position (top|bot) #IMPLIED >
<!ATTLIST accelerator name #IMPLIED
action #REQUIRED >There are some additional restrictions beyond those specified in the DTD, e.g. every toolitem must have a toolbar in its anchestry and every menuitem must have a menubar or popup in its anchestry. Since a #GMarkupParser is used to parse the UI description, it must not only be valid XML, but valid markup.
If a name is not specified, it defaults to the action. If an action is not specified either, the element name is used. The name and action attributes must not contain “/” characters after parsing (since that would mess up path lookup) and must be usable as XML attributes when enclosed in doublequotes, thus they must not “"” characters or references to the " entity.
A UI definition
<ui>
<menubar>
<menu name="FileMenu" action="FileMenuAction">
<menuitem name="New" action="New2Action" />
<placeholder name="FileMenuAdditions" />
</menu>
<menu name="JustifyMenu" action="JustifyMenuAction">
<menuitem name="Left" action="justify-left"/>
<menuitem name="Centre" action="justify-center"/>
<menuitem name="Right" action="justify-right"/>
<menuitem name="Fill" action="justify-fill"/>
</menu>
</menubar>
<toolbar action="toolbar1">
<placeholder name="JustifyToolItems">
<separator/>
<toolitem name="Left" action="justify-left"/>
<toolitem name="Centre" action="justify-center"/>
<toolitem name="Right" action="justify-right"/>
<toolitem name="Fill" action="justify-fill"/>
<separator/>
</placeholder>
</toolbar>
</ui>The constructed widget hierarchy is very similar to the element tree of the XML, with the exception that placeholders are merged into their parents. The correspondence of XML elements to widgets should be almost obvious:
- menubar
a #GtkMenuBar
- toolbar
a #GtkToolbar
- popup
a toplevel #GtkMenu
- menu
a #GtkMenu attached to a menuitem
- menuitem
a #GtkMenuItem subclass, the exact type depends on the action
- toolitem
a #GtkToolItem subclass, the exact type depends on the action. Note that toolitem elements may contain a menu element, but only if their associated action specifies a #GtkMenuToolButton as proxy.
- separator
a #GtkSeparatorMenuItem or #GtkSeparatorToolItem
- accelerator
a keyboard accelerator
The “position” attribute determines where a constructed widget is positioned wrt. to its siblings in the partially constructed tree. If it is “top”, the widget is prepended, otherwise it is appended.
UI Merging # {#UI-Merging}
The most remarkable feature of #GtkUIManager is that it can overlay a set of menuitems and toolitems over another one, and demerge them later.
Merging is done based on the names of the XML elements. Each element is identified by a path which consists of the names of its anchestors, separated by slashes. For example, the menuitem named “Left” in the example above has the path /ui/menubar/JustifyMenu/Left and the toolitem with the same name has path /ui/toolbar1/JustifyToolItems/Left.
Accelerators
Every action has an accelerator path. Accelerators are installed together with menuitem proxies, but they can also be explicitly added with <accelerator> elements in the UI definition. This makes it possible to have accelerators for actions even if they have no visible proxies.
Smart Separators # {#Smart-Separators}
The separators created by #GtkUIManager are “smart”, i.e. they do not show up in the UI unless they end up between two visible menu or tool items. Separators which are located at the very beginning or end of the menu or toolbar containing them, or multiple separators next to each other, are hidden. This is a useful feature, since the merging of UI elements from multiple sources can make it hard or impossible to determine in advance whether a separator will end up in such an unfortunate position.
For separators in toolbars, you can set expand="true" to turn them from a small, visible separator to an expanding, invisible one. Toolitems following an expanding separator are effectively right-aligned.
Empty Menus
Submenus pose similar problems to separators inconnection with merging. It is impossible to know in advance whether they will end up empty after merging. #GtkUIManager offers two ways to treat empty submenus:
- make them disappear by hiding the menu item they’re attached to
- add an insensitive “Empty” item
The behaviour is chosen based on the “hide_if_empty” property of the action to which the submenu is associated.
GtkUIManager as GtkBuildable # {#GtkUIManager-BUILDER-UI}
The GtkUIManager implementation of the GtkBuildable interface accepts GtkActionGroup objects as <child> elements in UI definitions.
A GtkUIManager UI definition as described above can be embedded in an GtkUIManager <object> element in a GtkBuilder UI definition.
The widgets that are constructed by a GtkUIManager can be embedded in other parts of the constructed user interface with the help of the “constructor” attribute. See the example below.
An embedded GtkUIManager UI definition
<object class="GtkUIManager" id="uiman">
<child>
<object class="GtkActionGroup" id="actiongroup">
<child>
<object class="GtkAction" id="file">
<property name="label">_File</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>
</child>
<ui>
<menubar name="menubar1">
<menu action="file">
</menu>
</menubar>
</ui>
</object>
<object class="GtkWindow" id="main-window">
<child>
<object class="GtkMenuBar" id="menubar1" constructor="uiman"/>
</child>
</object>GObjectClass parentClassvoid function(GtkUIManager * manager, GtkWidget * widget) addWidgetvoid function(GtkUIManager * manager) actionsChangedvoid function(GtkUIManager * manager, GtkAction * action, GtkWidget * proxy) connectProxyvoid function(GtkUIManager * manager, GtkAction * action, GtkWidget * proxy) disconnectProxyvoid function(GtkUIManager * manager, GtkAction * action) preActivatevoid function(GtkUIManager * manager, GtkAction * action) postActivateGtkWidget * function(GtkUIManager * manager, const(char) * path) getWidgetGtkAction * function(GtkUIManager * manager, const(char) * path) getActionvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4A #GtkVBox is a container that organizes child widgets into a single column.
Use the #GtkBox packing interface to determine the arrangement, spacing, height, and alignment of #GtkVBox children.
All children are allocated the same width.
GtkVBox has been deprecated. You can use #GtkBox with a #GtkOrientable:orientation set to [gtk.types.Orientation.Vertical] instead when calling [gtk.box.Box.new_], which is a very quick and easy change.
If you have derived your own classes from GtkVBox, you can change the inheritance to derive directly from #GtkBox, and set the #GtkOrientable:orientation property to [gtk.types.Orientation.Vertical] in your instance init function, with a call like:
gtk_orientable_set_orientation (GTK_ORIENTABLE (object),
GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);If you have a grid-like layout composed of nested boxes, and you don’t need first-child or last-child styling, the recommendation is to switch to #GtkGrid. For more information about migrating to #GtkGrid, see [Migrating from other containers to GtkGrid][gtk-migrating-GtkGrid].
GtkBox boxGtkBoxClass parentClassGtkButtonBox buttonBoxGtkButtonBoxClass parentClassThe VPaned widget is a container widget with two children arranged vertically. The division between the two panes is adjustable by the user by dragging a handle. See #GtkPaned for details.
GtkVPaned has been deprecated, use #GtkPaned instead.
GtkPaned panedGtkPanedClass parentClassThe #GtkVScale widget is used to allow the user to select a value using a vertical slider. To create one, use [gtk.hscale.HScale.newWithRange].
The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places shown can be set using the parent #GtkScale class’s functions.
GtkVScale has been deprecated, use #GtkScale instead.
GtkScale scaleGtkScaleClass parentClassThe #GtkVScrollbar widget is a widget arranged vertically creating a scrollbar. See #GtkScrollbar for details on scrollbars. #GtkAdjustment pointers may be added to handle the adjustment of the scrollbar or it may be left null in which case one will be created for you. See #GtkScrollbar for a description of what the fields in an adjustment represent for a scrollbar.
GtkVScrollbar has been deprecated, use #GtkScrollbar instead.
GtkScrollbar scrollbarGtkScrollbarClass parentClassThe #GtkVSeparator widget is a vertical separator, used to group the widgets within a window. It displays a vertical line with a shadow to make it appear sunken into the interface.
GtkVSeparator has been deprecated, use #GtkSeparator instead.
GtkSeparator separatorGtkSeparatorClass parentClassThe #GtkViewport widget acts as an adaptor class, implementing scrollability for child widgets that lack their own scrolling capabilities. Use GtkViewport to scroll child widgets such as #GtkGrid, #GtkBox, and so on.
If a widget has native scrolling abilities, such as #GtkTextView, #GtkTreeView or #GtkIconView, it can be added to a #GtkScrolledWindow with [gtk.container.Container.add]. If a widget does not, you must first add the widget to a #GtkViewport, then add the viewport to the scrolled window. [gtk.container.Container.add] does this automatically if a child that does not implement #GtkScrollable is added to a #GtkScrolledWindow, so you can ignore the presence of the viewport.
The GtkViewport will start scrolling content only if allocated less than the child widget’s minimum size in a given orientation.
CSS nodes
GtkViewport has a single CSS node with name viewport.
GtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4#GtkVolumeButton is a subclass of #GtkScaleButton that has been tailored for use as a volume control widget with suitable icons, tooltips and accessible labels.
GtkScaleButton parentGtkScaleButtonClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4GtkWidget is the base class all widgets in GTK+ derive from. It manages the widget lifecycle, states and style.
Height-for-width Geometry Management # {#geometry-management}
GTK+ uses a height-for-width (and width-for-height) geometry management system. Height-for-width means that a widget can change how much vertical space it needs, depending on the amount of horizontal space that it is given (and similar for width-for-height). The most common example is a label that reflows to fill up the available width, wraps to fewer lines, and therefore needs less height.
Height-for-width geometry management is implemented in GTK+ by way of five virtual methods:
- #GtkWidgetClass.get_request_mode()
- #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_width()
- #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height()
- #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height_for_width()
- #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_width_for_height()
- #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width()
There are some important things to keep in mind when implementing height-for-width and when using it in container implementations.
The geometry management system will query a widget hierarchy in only one orientation at a time. When widgets are initially queried for their minimum sizes it is generally done in two initial passes in the #GtkSizeRequestMode chosen by the toplevel.
For example, when queried in the normal [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.HeightForWidth] mode: First, the default minimum and natural width for each widget in the interface will be computed using [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredWidth]. Because the preferred widths for each container depend on the preferred widths of their children, this information propagates up the hierarchy, and finally a minimum and natural width is determined for the entire toplevel. Next, the toplevel will use the minimum width to query for the minimum height contextual to that width using [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredHeightForWidth], which will also be a highly recursive operation. The minimum height for the minimum width is normally used to set the minimum size constraint on the toplevel (unless [gtk.window.Window.setGeometryHints] is explicitly used instead).
After the toplevel window has initially requested its size in both dimensions it can go on to allocate itself a reasonable size (or a size previously specified with [gtk.window.Window.setDefaultSize]). During the recursive allocation process it’s important to note that request cycles will be recursively executed while container widgets allocate their children. Each container widget, once allocated a size, will go on to first share the space in one orientation among its children and then request each child's height for its target allocated width or its width for allocated height, depending. In this way a #GtkWidget will typically be requested its size a number of times before actually being allocated a size. The size a widget is finally allocated can of course differ from the size it has requested. For this reason, #GtkWidget caches a small number of results to avoid re-querying for the same sizes in one allocation cycle.
See [GtkContainer’s geometry management section][container-geometry-management] to learn more about how height-for-width allocations are performed by container widgets.
If a widget does move content around to intelligently use up the allocated size then it must support the request in both #GtkSizeRequestModes even if the widget in question only trades sizes in a single orientation.
For instance, a #GtkLabel that does height-for-width word wrapping will not expect to have #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height() called because that call is specific to a width-for-height request. In this case the label must return the height required for its own minimum possible width. By following this rule any widget that handles height-for-width or width-for-height requests will always be allocated at least enough space to fit its own content.
Here are some examples of how a [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.HeightForWidth] widget generally deals with width-for-height requests, for #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height() it will do:
static void
foo_widget_get_preferred_height (GtkWidget *widget,
gint *min_height,
gint *nat_height)
{
if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
{
gint min_width, nat_width;
GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
&min_width,
&nat_width);
GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_height_for_width
(widget,
min_width,
min_height,
nat_height);
}
else
{
... some widgets do both. For instance, if a GtkLabel is
rotated to 90 degrees it will return the minimum and
natural height for the rotated label here.
}
}And in #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_width_for_height() it will simply return the minimum and natural width:
static void
foo_widget_get_preferred_width_for_height (GtkWidget *widget,
gint for_height,
gint *min_width,
gint *nat_width)
{
if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
{
GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
min_width,
nat_width);
}
else
{
... again if a widget is sometimes operating in
width-for-height mode (like a rotated GtkLabel) it can go
ahead and do its real width for height calculation here.
}
}Often a widget needs to get its own request during size request or allocation. For example, when computing height it may need to also compute width. Or when deciding how to use an allocation, the widget may need to know its natural size. In these cases, the widget should be careful to call its virtual methods directly, like this:
GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS(widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
&min,
&natural);It will not work to use the wrapper functions, such as [gtk.widget.Widget.getPreferredWidth] inside your own size request implementation. These return a request adjusted by #GtkSizeGroup and by the #GtkWidgetClass.adjust_size_request() virtual method. If a widget used the wrappers inside its virtual method implementations, then the adjustments (such as widget margins) would be applied twice. GTK+ therefore does not allow this and will warn if you try to do it.
Of course if you are getting the size request for another widget, such as a child of a container, you must use the wrapper APIs. Otherwise, you would not properly consider widget margins, #GtkSizeGroup, and so forth.
Since 3.10 GTK+ also supports baseline vertical alignment of widgets. This means that widgets are positioned such that the typographical baseline of widgets in the same row are aligned. This happens if a widget supports baselines, has a vertical alignment of [gtk.types.Align.Baseline], and is inside a container that supports baselines and has a natural “row” that it aligns to the baseline, or a baseline assigned to it by the grandparent.
Baseline alignment support for a widget is done by the #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width() virtual function. It allows you to report a baseline in combination with the minimum and natural height. If there is no baseline you can return -1 to indicate this. The default implementation of this virtual function calls into the #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height() and #GtkWidgetClass.get_preferred_height_for_width(), so if baselines are not supported it doesn’t need to be implemented.
If a widget ends up baseline aligned it will be allocated all the space in the parent as if it was [gtk.types.Align.Fill], but the selected baseline can be found via [gtk.widget.Widget.getAllocatedBaseline]. If this has a value other than -1 you need to align the widget such that the baseline appears at the position.
Style Properties
#GtkWidget introduces “style properties” - these are basically object properties that are stored not on the object, but in the style object associated to the widget. Style properties are set in [resource files][gtk3-Resource-Files]. This mechanism is used for configuring such things as the location of the scrollbar arrows through the theme, giving theme authors more control over the look of applications without the need to write a theme engine in C.
Use [gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.installStyleProperty] to install style properties for a widget class, [gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.findStyleProperty] or [gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.listStyleProperties] to get information about existing style properties and [gtk.widget.Widget.styleGetProperty], [gtk.widget.Widget.styleGet] or [gtk.widget.Widget.styleGetValist] to obtain the value of a style property.
GtkWidget as GtkBuildable
The GtkWidget implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <accelerator> element, which has attributes named ”key”, ”modifiers” and ”signal” and allows to specify accelerators.
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying an accelerator:
<object class="GtkButton">
<accelerator key="q" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK" signal="clicked"/>
</object>In addition to accelerators, GtkWidget also support a custom <accessible> element, which supports actions and relations. Properties on the accessible implementation of an object can be set by accessing the internal child “accessible” of a #GtkWidget.
An example of a UI definition fragment specifying an accessible:
<object class="GtkLabel" id="label1"/>
<property name="label">I am a Label for a Button</property>
</object>
<object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
<accessibility>
<action action_name="click" translatable="yes">Click the button.</action>
<relation target="label1" type="labelled-by"/>
</accessibility>
<child internal-child="accessible">
<object class="AtkObject" id="a11y-button1">
<property name="accessible-name">Clickable Button</property>
</object>
</child>
</object>Finally, GtkWidget allows style information such as style classes to be associated with widgets, using the custom <style> element:
<object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
<style>
<class name="my-special-button-class"/>
<class name="dark-button"/>
</style>
</object>Building composite widgets from template XML ## {#composite-templates}
GtkWidget exposes some facilities to automate the procedure of creating composite widgets using #GtkBuilder interface description language.
To create composite widgets with #GtkBuilder XML, one must associate the interface description with the widget class at class initialization time using [gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.setTemplate].
The interface description semantics expected in composite template descriptions is slightly different from regular #GtkBuilder XML.
Unlike regular interface descriptions, [gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.setTemplate] will expect a <template> tag as a direct child of the toplevel <interface> tag. The <template> tag must specify the “class” attribute which must be the type name of the widget. Optionally, the “parent” attribute may be specified to specify the direct parent type of the widget type, this is ignored by the GtkBuilder but required for Glade to introspect what kind of properties and internal children exist for a given type when the actual type does not exist.
The XML which is contained inside the <template> tag behaves as if it were added to the <object> tag defining "widget" itself. You may set properties on @widget by inserting <property> tags into the <template> tag, and also add <child> tags to add children and extend "widget" in the normal way you would with <object> tags.
Additionally, <object> tags can also be added before and after the initial <template> tag in the normal way, allowing one to define auxiliary objects which might be referenced by other widgets declared as children of the <template> tag.
An example of a GtkBuilder Template Definition:
<interface>
<template class="FooWidget" parent="GtkBox">
<property name="orientation">GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL</property>
<property name="spacing">4</property>
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="hello_button">
<property name="label">Hello World</property>
<signal name="clicked" handler="hello_button_clicked" object="FooWidget" swapped="yes"/>
</object>
</child>
<child>
<object class="GtkButton" id="goodbye_button">
<property name="label">Goodbye World</property>
</object>
</child>
</template>
</interface>Typically, you'll place the template fragment into a file that is bundled with your project, using #GResource. In order to load the template, you need to call [gtk.widget_class.WidgetClass.setTemplateFromResource] from the class initialization of your #GtkWidget type:
static void
foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
{
// ...
gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
"/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
}You will also need to call [gtk.widget.Widget.initTemplate] from the instance initialization function:
static void
foo_widget_init (FooWidget *self)
{
// ...
gtk_widget_init_template (GTK_WIDGET (self));
}You can access widgets defined in the template using the [gtk.widget.Widget.getTemplateChild] function, but you will typically declare a pointer in the instance private data structure of your type using the same name as the widget in the template definition, and call gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private() with that name, e.g.
typedef struct {
GtkWidget *hello_button;
GtkWidget *goodbye_button;
} FooWidgetPrivate;
G_DEFINE_TYPE_WITH_PRIVATE (FooWidget, foo_widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)
static void
foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
{
// ...
gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
"/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
FooWidget, hello_button);
gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
FooWidget, goodbye_button);
}
static void
foo_widget_init (FooWidget *widget)
{
}You can also use gtk_widget_class_bind_template_callback() to connect a signal callback defined in the template with a function visible in the scope of the class, e.g.
// the signal handler has the instance and user data swapped
// because of the swapped="yes" attribute in the template XML
static void
hello_button_clicked (FooWidget *self,
GtkButton *button)
{
g_print ("Hello, world!\n");
}
static void
foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
{
// ...
gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
"/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
gtk_widget_class_bind_template_callback (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), hello_button_clicked);
}GInitiallyUnownedClass parentClassThe object class structure needs to be the first element in the widget class structure in order for the class mechanism to work correctly. This allows a GtkWidgetClass pointer to be cast to a GObje...uint activateSignalThe signal to emit when a widget of this class is activated, [gtk.widget.Widget.activate] handles the emission. Implementation of this signal is optional.void function(GtkWidget * widget, uint nPspecs, GParamSpec * * pspecs) dispatchChildPropertiesChangedSeldomly overidden.void function(GtkWidget * widget) destroySignals that all holders of a reference to the widget should release the reference that they hold.void function(GtkWidget * widget) showSignal emitted when widget is shownvoid function(GtkWidget * widget) showAllRecursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is a container).void function(GtkWidget * widget) hideSignal emitted when widget is hidden.void function(GtkWidget * widget) mapSignal emitted when widget is going to be mapped, that is when the widget is visible (which is controlled with [gtk.widget.Widget.setVisible]) and all its parents up to the toplevel widget are also...void function(GtkWidget * widget) unmapSignal emitted when widget is going to be unmapped, which means that either it or any of its parents up to the toplevel widget have been set as hidden.void function(GtkWidget * widget) realizeSignal emitted when widget is associated with a #GdkWindow, which means that [gtk.widget.Widget.realize] has been called or the widget has been mapped (that is, it is going to be drawn).void function(GtkWidget * widget) unrealizeSignal emitted when the GdkWindow associated with widget is destroyed, which means that [gtk.widget.Widget.unrealize] has been called or the widget has been unmapped (that is, it is going to be hid...void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkAllocation * allocation) sizeAllocateSignal emitted to get the widget allocation.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkStateType previousState) stateChangedSignal emitted when the widget state changes. Deprecated: 3.0void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkStateFlags previousStateFlags) stateFlagsChangedSignal emitted when the widget state changes, see [gtk.widget.Widget.getStateFlags].void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkWidget * previousParent) parentSetSignal emitted when a new parent has been set on a widget.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkWidget * previousToplevel) hierarchyChangedSignal emitted when the anchored state of a widget changes.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkStyle * previousStyle) styleSetSignal emitted when a new style has been set on a widget. Deprecated: 3.0void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkTextDirection previousDirection) directionChangedSignal emitted when the text direction of a widget changes.void function(GtkWidget * widget, gboolean wasGrabbed) grabNotifySignal emitted when a widget becomes shadowed by a GTK+ grab (not a pointer or keyboard grab) on another widget, or when it becomes unshadowed due to a grab being removed.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GParamSpec * childProperty) childNotifySignal emitted for each child property that has changed on an object.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, cairo_t * cr) drawSignal emitted when a widget is supposed to render itself.GtkSizeRequestMode function(GtkWidget * widget) getRequestModeThis allows a widget to tell its parent container whether it prefers to be allocated in [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.HeightForWidth] or [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.WidthForHeight] mode. [gtk.types.Siz...void function(GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightThis is called by containers to obtain the minimum and natural height of a widget. A widget that does not actually trade any height for width or width for height only has to implement these two vir...void function(GtkWidget * widget, int height, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthForHeightThis is analogous to #GtkWidgetClass.getpreferredheightforwidth() except that it operates in the oposite orientation. It’s rare that a widget actually does [gtk.types.SizeRequestMode.WidthForHeig...void function(GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumWidth, int * naturalWidth) getPreferredWidthThis is called by containers to obtain the minimum and natural width of a widget. A widget will never be allocated a width less than its minimum and will only ever be allocated a width greater than...void function(GtkWidget * widget, int width, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight) getPreferredHeightForWidthThis is similar to #GtkWidgetClass.getpreferredheight() except that it is passed a contextual width to request height for. By implementing this virtual method it is possible for a #GtkLabel to tell...gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, gboolean groupCycling) mnemonicActivateActivates the @widget if @groupcycling is false, and just grabs the focus if @groupcycling is true.void function(GtkWidget * widget) grabFocusCauses @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it’s inside.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkDirectionType direction) focusvoid function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkDirectionType direction) moveFocusSignal emitted when a change of focus is requestedgboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkDirectionType direction) keynavFailedSignal emitted if keyboard navigation fails.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEvent * event) eventThe GTK+ main loop will emit three signals for each GDK event delivered to a widget: one generic ::event signal, another, more specific, signal that matches the type of event delivered (e.g. "key-p...gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventButton * event) buttonPressEventSignal will be emitted when a button (typically from a mouse) is pressed.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventButton * event) buttonReleaseEventSignal will be emitted when a button (typically from a mouse) is released.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventScroll * event) scrollEventSignal emitted when a button in the 4 to 7 range is pressed.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventMotion * event) motionNotifyEventSignal emitted when the pointer moves over the widget’s #GdkWindow.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventAny * event) deleteEventSignal emitted if a user requests that a toplevel window is closed.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventAny * event) destroyEventSignal is emitted when a #GdkWindow is destroyed.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventKey * event) keyPressEventSignal emitted when a key is pressed.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventKey * event) keyReleaseEventSignal is emitted when a key is released.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventCrossing * event) enterNotifyEventSignal event will be emitted when the pointer enters the widget’s window.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventCrossing * event) leaveNotifyEventWill be emitted when the pointer leaves the widget’s window.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventConfigure * event) configureEventSignal will be emitted when the size, position or stacking of the widget’s window has changed.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventFocus * event) focusInEventSignal emitted when the keyboard focus enters the widget’s window.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventFocus * event) focusOutEventSignal emitted when the keyboard focus leaves the widget’s window.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventAny * event) mapEventSignal emitted when the widget’s window is mapped.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventAny * event) unmapEventSignal will be emitted when the widget’s window is unmapped.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventProperty * event) propertyNotifyEventSignal will be emitted when a property on the widget’s window has been changed or deleted.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventSelection * event) selectionClearEventSignal will be emitted when the the widget’s window has lost ownership of a selection.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventSelection * event) selectionRequestEventSignal will be emitted when another client requests ownership of the selection owned by the widget's window.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventSelection * event) selectionNotifyEventgboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventProximity * event) proximityInEventgboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventProximity * event) proximityOutEventgboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventVisibility * event) visibilityNotifyEventSignal emitted when the widget’s window is obscured or unobscured.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventWindowState * event) windowStateEventSignal emitted when the state of the toplevel window associated to the widget changes.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventExpose * event) damageEventSignal emitted when a redirected window belonging to widget gets drawn into.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventGrabBroken * event) grabBrokenEventSignal emitted when a pointer or keyboard grab on a window belonging to widget gets broken.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkSelectionData * selectionData, uint info, uint time) selectionGetvoid function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkSelectionData * selectionData, uint time) selectionReceivedvoid function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkDragContext * context) dragBeginSignal emitted on the drag source when a drag is started.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkDragContext * context) dragEndSignal emitted on the drag source when a drag is finished.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkDragContext * context, GtkSelectionData * selectionData, uint info, uint time) dragDataGetSignal emitted on the drag source when the drop site requests the data which is dragged.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkDragContext * context) dragDataDeleteSignal emitted on the drag source when a drag with the action [gdk.types.DragAction.Move] is successfully completed.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkDragContext * context, uint time) dragLeaveSignal emitted on the drop site when the cursor leaves the widget.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkDragContext * context, int x, int y, uint time) dragMotionsignal emitted on the drop site when the user moves the cursor over the widget during a drag.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkDragContext * context, int x, int y, uint time) dragDropSignal emitted on the drop site when the user drops the data onto the widget.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkDragContext * context, int x, int y, GtkSelectionData * selectionData, uint info, uint time) dragDataReceivedSignal emitted on the drop site when the dragged data has been received.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkDragContext * context, GtkDragResult result) dragFailedSignal emitted on the drag source when a drag has failed.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget) popupMenuSignal emitted whenever a widget should pop up a context menu.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkWidgetHelpType helpType) showHelpAtkObject * function(GtkWidget * widget) getAccessibleReturns the accessible object that describes the widget to an assistive technology.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkScreen * previousScreen) screenChangedSignal emitted when the screen of a widget has changed.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, uint signalId) canActivateAccelSignal allows applications and derived widgets to override the default GtkWidget handling for determining whether an accelerator can be activated.void function(GtkWidget * widget) compositedChangedSignal emitted when the composited status of widgets screen changes. See [gdk.screen.Screen.isComposited].gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, int x, int y, gboolean keyboardTooltip, GtkTooltip * tooltip) queryTooltipSignal emitted when “has-tooltip” is true and the hover timeout has expired with the cursor hovering “above” widget; or emitted when widget got focus in keyboard mode.void function(GtkWidget * widget, gboolean * hexpandP, gboolean * vexpandP) computeExpandComputes whether a container should give this widget extra space when possible.void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkOrientation orientation, int * minimumSize, int * naturalSize) adjustSizeRequestConvert an initial size request from a widget's #GtkSizeRequestMode virtual method implementations into a size request to be used by parent containers in laying out the widget. adjustsizerequest ad...void function(GtkWidget * widget, GtkOrientation orientation, int * minimumSize, int * naturalSize, int * allocatedPos, int * allocatedSize) adjustSizeAllocationConvert an initial size allocation assigned by a #GtkContainer using [gtk.widget.Widget.sizeAllocate], into an actual size allocation to be used by the widget. adjustsizeallocation adjusts to a chi...void function(GtkWidget * widget) styleUpdatedSignal emitted when the GtkStyleContext of a widget is changed.gboolean function(GtkWidget * widget, GdkEventTouch * event) touchEventSignal emitted when a touch event happensvoid function(GtkWidget * widget, int width, int * minimumHeight, int * naturalHeight, int * minimumBaseline, int * naturalBaseline) getPreferredHeightAndBaselineForWidthvoid function(GtkWidget * widget, int * minimumBaseline, int * naturalBaseline) adjustBaselineRequestvoid function(GtkWidget * widget, int * baseline) adjustBaselineAllocationvoid function(GtkWidget * widget, const(cairo_region_t) * region) queueDrawRegionInvalidates the area of widget defined by region by calling [gdk.window.Window.invalidateRegion] on the widget's window and all its child windows.GtkWidgetClassPrivate * privvoid function() GtkReserved6void function() GtkReserved7GtkWidgetPath is a boxed type that represents a widget hierarchy from the topmost widget, typically a toplevel, to any child. This widget path abstraction is used in #GtkStyleContext on behalf of the real widget in order to query style information.
If you are using GTK+ widgets, you probably will not need to use this API directly, as there is [gtk.widget.Widget.getPath], and the style context returned by [gtk.widget.Widget.getStyleContext] will be automatically updated on widget hierarchy changes.
The widget path generation is generally simple:
Defining a button within a window
{
GtkWidgetPath *path;
path = gtk_widget_path_new ();
gtk_widget_path_append_type (path, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW);
gtk_widget_path_append_type (path, GTK_TYPE_BUTTON);
}Although more complex information, such as widget names, or different classes (property that may be used by other widget types) and intermediate regions may be included:
Defining the first tab widget in a notebook
{
GtkWidgetPath *path;
guint pos;
path = gtk_widget_path_new ();
pos = gtk_widget_path_append_type (path, GTK_TYPE_NOTEBOOK);
gtk_widget_path_iter_add_region (path, pos, "tab", GTK_REGION_EVEN | GTK_REGION_FIRST);
pos = gtk_widget_path_append_type (path, GTK_TYPE_LABEL);
gtk_widget_path_iter_set_name (path, pos, "first tab label");
}All this information will be used to match the style information that applies to the described widget.
A GtkWindow is a toplevel window which can contain other widgets. Windows normally have decorations that are under the control of the windowing system and allow the user to manipulate the window (resize it, move it, close it,...).
GtkWindow as GtkBuildable
The GtkWindow implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <accel-groups> element, which supports any number of <group> elements representing the #GtkAccelGroup objects you want to add to your window (synonymous with [gtk.window.Window.addAccelGroup].
It also supports the <initial-focus> element, whose name property names the widget to receive the focus when the window is mapped.
An example of a UI definition fragment with accel groups:
<object class="GtkWindow">
<accel-groups>
<group name="accelgroup1"/>
</accel-groups>
<initial-focus name="thunderclap"/>
</object>
...
<object class="GtkAccelGroup" id="accelgroup1"/>The GtkWindow implementation of the #GtkBuildable interface supports setting a child as the titlebar by specifying “titlebar” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.
CSS nodes
window.background
├── decoration
├── <titlebar child>.titlebar [.default-decoration]
╰── <child>GtkWindow has a main CSS node with name window and style class .background, and a subnode with name decoration.
Style classes that are typically used with the main CSS node are .csd (when client-side decorations are in use), .solid-csd (for client-side decorations without invisible borders), .ssd (used by mutter when rendering server-side decorations). GtkWindow also represents window states with the following style classes on the main node: .tiled, .maximized, .fullscreen. Specialized types of window often add their own discriminating style classes, such as .popup or .tooltip.
GtkWindow adds the .titlebar and .default-decoration style classes to the widget that is added as a titlebar child.
GtkContainerAccessibleClass parentClassGtkBinClass parentClassThe parent class.void function(GtkWindow * window, GtkWidget * focus) setFocusSets child as the focus widget for the window.void function(GtkWindow * window) activateFocusActivates the current focused widget within the window.void function(GtkWindow * window) activateDefaultActivates the default widget for the window.void function(GtkWindow * window) keysChangedSignal gets emitted when the set of accelerators or mnemonics that are associated with window changes.gboolean function(GtkWindow * window, gboolean toggle) enableDebuggingClass handler for the #GtkWindow::enable-debugging keybinding signal. Since: 3.14void function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3A #GtkWindowGroup restricts the effect of grabs to windows in the same group, thereby making window groups almost behave like separate applications.
A window can be a member in at most one window group at a time. Windows that have not been explicitly assigned to a group are implicitly treated like windows of the default window group.
GtkWindowGroup objects are referenced by each window in the group, so once you have added all windows to a GtkWindowGroup, you can drop the initial reference to the window group with [gobject.object.ObjectWrap.unref]. If the windows in the window group are subsequently destroyed, then they will be removed from the window group and drop their references on the window group; when all window have been removed, the window group will be freed.
GObjectClass parentClassvoid function() GtkReserved1void function() GtkReserved2void function() GtkReserved3void function() GtkReserved4Abstract interface type for the D-Bus interface <link linkend="gdbus-interface-org-Gtk-MountOperationHandler.top_of_page">org.Gtk.MountOperationHandler</link>.
Class structure for #_GtkMountOperationHandlerProxy.
GDBusProxyClass parentClassThe parent class.Class structure for #_GtkMountOperationHandlerSkeleton.
GDBusInterfaceSkeletonClass parentClassThe parent class.